Overline KXTVP200 Voicemail User Programming Manual

Voice Processing System
I
M
NSTALLATION
ANUAL
Please read this manual before connecting
the Voice Processing System.
TVP200
VOICE PROC
ESSING SYSTE
M KX-TVP200
MODEL
KX-TVP200E
Panason
ic
Attention
Precaution
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVICED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS
BECOMING ACCESSIBLE, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD
IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE
POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT, AND
RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR SAFETY
REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING CONTACT
SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS.
THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE,
ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET-OUTLET IS LOCATED/INSTALLED NEAR THE
EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
NOTE
This Installation Manual does not show complete model numbers that indicate
the country where your models should be used. The model number of your unit
is found on the label affixed to the unit.
MODEL NO.
(label)
APPROVED for connection to

telecommunication systems specified
73/23/EEC
89/336/EEC
92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC
in the instructions for use subject to

the conditions set out in them.
504265
Precaution
FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT
CAREFULLY.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience.
A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and
that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer.
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME
THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED
INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET.
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below.
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING : THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.

IMPORTANT : The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Green-and-Yellow :
Earth
Blue :
Neutral
Brown :
Live
As the colours of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which
is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol
or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with
the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with
the letter L or coloured RED.
ii
Precaution
How to replace the fuse : Open the-fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse and fuse
cover.
FUSE
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Do not connect KX-TVP200E to any AC outlet other than the standard AC 230240V, 50Hz.
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN):

This relates to the performance of the apparatus when used in combination with other items of apparatus. It enables the
calculation of the maximum number of items of apparatus that may be connected simultaneously to the line by
summing the REN values of each items. A BT supplied instrument has a REN value of 1 unless otherwise marked. A
maximum REN value of 4 should not be exceeded. The REN value of this apparatus is 3.
Connection:
The apparatus is suitable for connection to a direct exchange line on the PSTN or via a compatible PBX.
The apparatus is not suitable as an extension to a payphone and should not be used on lines with shared
services.
It cannot be guaranteed that the apparatus will operate under all possible conditions of connection to compatible
PBX's.
No other telephone should be connected in parallel with the apparatus.
This apparatus has been approved for the use of the following facilities:
1) Voice Mail Service
2) Auto-calling
3) Auto-answering
4) Auto-clearing
5) PBX timed break register recall
6) MF signalling
7) LD signalling
Any other usage will invalidate the approval of the apparatus if as a result, it then ceases to conform to the standards
against which approval was granted.
Any cases of difficulty should be referred in the first instance to the supplier of the apparatus.
iii
Precaution
Attention
Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices
such as fluorescent lamps, motors and television. These noise sources can interfere
with the performance of the Voice Processing System.
This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40C /
104F) and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or other holes of this unit.
If there is any trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug the telephone
directly into the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly, do not reconnect the
unit to the line until the trouble has been repaired. If the telephone does not operate
properly, chances are that the trouble is in the telephone system, and not in the unit.
Do not use benzine, thinner, or the like, or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet.
Wipe it with a soft cloth.
Do not drop this unit to avoid the damage to the hard disk.
WARNING:
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS

PRODUCT TO RAIN OR ANY TYPE OF MOISTURE.
The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom of the unit.
You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as
a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.:
SERIAL NO.:
For your future reference

DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALERS ADDRESS
iv
How ToPrecaution
Use This Manual
This manual consists of 7 chapters as follows:
Chapter 1 Overview explains the outline of the Voice
Processing System (VPS).
Chapter 2 System Installation explains the basic
system installation and wiring instructions, as well as how
to install the optional cards.
Chapter 3 Detailed Feature and Service Descriptions
explains all features and services in alphabetical order.
It also provides information about the programming required, conditions and related features.
Chapter 4 System Administrators Guide explains
terminal based programming through the System Administrator Interface.
Chapter 5 System Managers Guide explains telephone based programming through the System Manager
Mailbox.
Chapter 6 Message Managers Guide explains message management, recording system prompts and company greetings through the Message Manager Mailbox.
Chapter 7 Maintenance explains Utility Commands,
System Usage Reports, Initializing the System and Troubleshooting Guide.
Specifications
Index
Worksheets
Precaution
Terms
to Know
These are terms used throughout this manual.
System Administrator
The person in charge of system setup tasks such as setting

system parameters and running reports using a data terminal.
System Manager
The person in charge of daily management of system, such as

creating and deleting mailboxes, changing system parameters, and checking system status using touch-tone telephone.
Message Manager
The person in charge of recording prompts used on systemwide basis. The Message Manager is also responsible for
answering operator-seeking calls and handling messages left
in the General Delivery Mailbox.
Subscriber
The owner of a personal mailbox. Subscribers can retrieve

their messages (left by callers) from any touch-tone telephone. Subscribers can also access various features of the
VPS by accessing their own mailboxes.
Non-Subscriber
A caller who does not have a mailbox. He or she can select

a mailbox to leave a message by pressing DTMF keypad of
his or her telephone. As for rotary callers, they can be
automatically sent to the General Delivery Mailbox or the
operator.
Mailbox
A storage place for messages on the VPS. A Subscriber

(mailbox owner) can access many functions by dialing it.
Also, mailboxes are usually associated with an extension that
is often the same number.
Port
An interface between the telephone line and the VPS. The

VPS can have a maximum of 8 ports, so it can handle
8 calls at a time (D-PITS integration case).
Prompts
A recorded list of options or a guidance message played to the

user.
System Prompts set to English at the factory
User Prompts ....................... to be recorded by the Message
(User 1 and User 2) ............ Manager so that Multi-Lingual
Service can be available.
D-PITS
An abbreviation for Digital Proprietary Telephone.

(e.g., KX-T7230, KX-T7250)
vi
Contents
Chapter 1
(KX-TVP200 Installation Manual)

Overview
1.1
Introduction .......................................................................................... 1-2
1.2
Call Services ......................................................................................... 1-4
1.3
Other Features ..................................................................................... 1-7
1.4
Outside Caller Handling ..................................................................... 1-9
1.5
Configuration ........................................................................................ 1-10
1.6
Guidelines for Preparation ................................................................. 1-11
1.7
Mailbox Management .......................................................................... 1-15
1.8
System Diagnosis .................................................................................. 1-17
Chapter 2
System Installation
2.1
System Components.............................................................................
2.1.1 Port Card.....................................................................................
2.1.2 CPU Card ...................................................................................
2.1.3 Hard Disk Drive .........................................................................
2-2
2-5
2-5
2-6
2.2
Installation ............................................................................................
2.2.1 Preparation ..................................................................................
2.2.2 System Expansion ......................................................................
2.2.3 Extension or CO Line Connection ............................................
2.2.4 Data Terminal or Printer Connection ........................................
2.2.5 Power Cable Connection ...........................................................
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-13
2-22
2-25
Chapter 3
Detailed Feature and Service Descriptions
Alternate Extension Group ....................................................................

Auto Configuration (D-PITS Only) ......................................................
Auto Forwarding ....................................................................................
Automated Attendant Service ...............................................................
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
Broadcasting Messages .......................................................................... 3-7

Busy Coverage Mode ............................................................................ 3-7
Callback Number Entry .........................................................................

Call Blocking .........................................................................................
Call Screening ........................................................................................
Call Services ..........................................................................................
3-7
3-9
3-9
3-9
Contents
0-1
Contents
0-2
Call Transfer Status ...............................................................................

Class of Service .....................................................................................
Company Greetings ...............................................................................
Covering Extension ...............................................................................
Custom Service ......................................................................................
3-10
3-12
3-12
3-13
3-13
Day Service ............................................................................................

Daylight Saving Time Assignment .......................................................
Department Dialing ...............................................................................
Dialing by Name ...................................................................................
Direct Mailbox Access (D-PITS Only) ................................................
D-PITS ...................................................................................................
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-21
Extension Group ....................................................................................

Extension Numbering Plan ...................................................................
External Message Delivery List............................................................
External Message Delivery Service ......................................................
External Message Delivery Status ........................................................
3-22
3-22
3-22
3-22
3-24
Fax Management ................................................................................... 3-24
Group Distribution List, Personal ......................................................... 3-25

Group Distribution List, System ........................................................... 3-25
Hold ........................................................................................................ 3-26

Holiday Service ..................................................................................... 3-26
Inband .....................................................................................................
Incomplete Call Handling Service ........................................................
Intercom Paging (D-PITS Only) ...........................................................
Interview Service ...................................................................................
Live Call Screening (D-PITS Only) ..................................................... 3-32

Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox) ............................ 3-33
Mailbox ..................................................................................................
Mailbox Group.......................................................................................
Message Delivery, Internal ...................................................................
Message Delivery Status .......................................................................
Message Reception Mode .....................................................................
Message Scan.........................................................................................
Message Transfer ...................................................................................
Message Waiting Notification-Device ..................................................
Contents
3-26
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-33
3-35
3-36
3-36
3-37
3-37
3-38
3-38
Contents
Message Waiting Notification-Lamp .................................................... 3-41
Multi-Lingual Service ............................................................................ 3-42
N
No-Answer Coverage Mode.................................................................. 3-46
Operator Service .................................................................................... 3-46
PBX Integration .....................................................................................

Personal Greetings .................................................................................
Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting .....................................
Port Service ............................................................................................
Private Message .....................................................................................
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-49
3-50
Receive Message ...................................................................................

Record Message .....................................................................................
Reply to Message Sender......................................................................
Rotary Telephone Service .....................................................................
3-50
3-51
3-51
3-52
Selection Menu ......................................................................................

Service Access Commands ...................................................................
Special Feature Authorization ...............................................................
System Clock .........................................................................................
System Reports ......................................................................................
3-52
3-53
3-53
3-54
3-54
Two-Way Recording (D-PITS Only) ................................................... 3-55
Utility Commands .................................................................................. 3-56
Voice Mail Service ................................................................................ 3-56

Voice Prompts ....................................................................................... 3-58
Chapter 4
System Administrators Guide
4.1
System Administrators Function ...................................................... 4-2
4.2
Using the Interface .............................................................................. 4-4

4.2.1 Keyboard Operation ................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Programming Guidance .............................................................. 4-5
4.3
Startup System ..................................................................................... 4-6

4.3.1 Quick Setup ................................................................................ 4-8
4.4
Programming Menu Structure Diagram .......................................... 4-16
4.5
Programming the System Parameters .............................................. 4-18

4.5.1 Setting up Mailboxes ................................................................. 4-19
Contents
0-3
Contents
4.5.1.1 Creating and Editing Mailboxes ....................................
4.5.1.2 Deleting a Mailbox .........................................................
4.5.1.3 Resetting a Mailbox Password .......................................
4.5.1.4 Listing Mailboxes ...........................................................
4.5.2 Setting COS (Class of Service) Parameters .............................
4.5.2.1 Class of Service Setting .................................................
4.5.2.2 Special Feature Authorization ........................................
4.5.3 Port Service ................................................................................
4.5.3.1 Port Assignment ..............................................................
4.5.4 Service Settings ..........................................................................
4.5.4.1 Automated Attendant Parameters ...................................
4.5.4.2 Custom Service ...............................................................
4.5.5 System Parameter Settings .........................................................
4.5.5.1 System Group Assignment .............................................
4.5.5.2 Day Service .....................................................................
4.5.5.3 Holiday Setting ...............................................................
4.5.5.4 Daylight Saving Time .....................................................
4.5.5.5 Prompt Setting.................................................................
4.5.5.6 Other Parameters .............................................................
4.5.6 Hardware Settings ......................................................................
4.5.6.1 RS-232C Parameters .......................................................
4.5.6.2 Port Setting ......................................................................
4.5.6.3 PBX Interface Parameters ..............................................
Chapter 5
0-4
4-19
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-32
4-37
4-37
4-40
4-40
4-50
4-53
4-53
4-57
4-58
4-61
4-62
4-63
4-76
4-76
4-77
4-78
System Managers Guide
5.1
System Managers Function ............................................................... 5-2
5.2
Accessing the System Managers Mailbox ....................................... 5-3
5.3
Setting up Mailboxes ...........................................................................

5.3.1 Creating and Editing a Mailbox ................................................
5.3.2 Deleting a Mailbox ....................................................................
5.3.3 Deleting a Mailbox Password....................................................
5.4
Setting COS (Class of Service) Parameters ..................................... 5-7
5.5
Setting the System Clock .................................................................... 5-11
5.6
Checking System Usage (System Reports) ....................................... 5-12

5.6.1 Obtaining System Reports ......................................................... 5-12
5.6.2 Clearing the Reports .................................................................. 5-13
Contents
5-4
5-4
5-6
5-6
Contents
5.7
Delivering Messages.............................................................................
5.7.1 Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes
(Broadcasting Messages) ............................................................
5.7.2 Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes ...........................
5.7.3 Checking Mailbox Distribution .................................................
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-15
5.8
Customizing the System Managers Mailbox .................................. 5-16
5.9
Listening to Messages ......................................................................... 5-17
Chapter 6
Message Managers Guide
6.1
Message Managers Function ............................................................. 6-2
6.2
Accessing the Message Managers Mailbox ..................................... 6-3
6.3
Managing the General Delivery Mailbox ......................................... 6-5

6.3.1 Listening to Messages ................................................................ 6-5
6.3.2 Transferring Messages ............................................................... 6-6
6.4
Setting up Message Waiting Notification .........................................

6.4.1 Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status .....................................
6.4.2 Setting Notification by Calling Status ......................................
6.4.2.1 Setting Device Status ......................................................
6.4.2.2 Assigning Notification Numbers ....................................
6.5
Customizing the Message Managers Mailbox ................................ 6-10

6.5.1 Message Managers Password ................................................... 6-10
6.5.2 Operators Extensions ................................................................ 6-10
6.6
Setting the System Clock .................................................................... 6-11
6.7
Recording Company Messages ..........................................................

6.7.1 Recording Company Greetings ..................................................
6.7.2 Recording Company Name ........................................................
6.7.3 Recording Department Dialing Menu Messages ......................
6.7.4 Recording Custom Service Menu Messages.............................
6.7.5 Recording Voice Labels for Mailbox Lists ..............................
6.7.6 Recording User Prompts ............................................................
6.7.7 Recording Selection Menus .......................................................
6-7
6-7
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-16
List of Modifiable Prompts ................................................................ 6-18
Chapter 7
7.1
Maintenance
Utility Commands ................................................................................ 7-2

Contents
0-5
Contents
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
7.1.7
7.1.8
7.1.9
7.1.10
7.1.11
7.1.12
7.1.13
7.1.14
7.1.15
7.1.16
7.1.17
7.1.18
7.1.19
Off-line Set (OFLN) ..................................................................

On-line Set (ONLN) ..................................................................
Set Password (PASS) .................................................................
Set Time (TIME) .......................................................................
Print Reports at Specified Time (PSET) ..................................
Error Log Display (ELOG) .......................................................
Saving the System Data to the
Backup Device (SAVE) ........................................................
Loading the Saved Data to the VPS (LOAD) .........................
Print All of the VPS Parameters (GPRN) ................................
Program Version Display (VERS) ............................................
Custom Service Report (CREP) ................................................
Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear
(CCLR) ...................................................................................
Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times (MWL) .........................
Setting Minimum Recording Length (MRL) ............................
Modified Prompt List (MPLT) ..................................................
Utility Command List (HELP) ..................................................
Quick Setup (QSET) ..................................................................
Circuit Condition Display (LMON) ..........................................
DTMF Information Display (PUTD) ........................................
7-7
7-9
7-10
7-10
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-14
7-15
7-15
7.2
System Reports.....................................................................................
7.2.1 Mailbox Assignments .................................................................
7.2.2 COS (Class of Service) Assignments .......................................
7.2.3 System Service Report ...............................................................
7.2.4 Call Account Report ..................................................................
7.2.5 Port Usage Report ......................................................................
7.2.6 Disk Usage Report .....................................................................
7.2.7 Mailbox Usage Report ...............................................................
7.2.8 Fax Call Report ..........................................................................
7.3
Initializing the System ......................................................................... 7-25
7.4
Troubleshooting Guide ........................................................................ 7-27
Specifications
Index
Worksheets
0-6
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-5
Contents
7-17
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-24
Chapter 1
Overview
This chapter describes the outline of the
Voice Processing System (VPS).
Contents
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Introduction ..........................................................
Call Services ..........................................................
Other Features ......................................................
Outside Caller Handling ......................................
Configuration ........................................................
Guidelines for Preparation ..................................
Mailbox Management ..........................................
System Diagnosis ..................................................
1-2
1-4
1-7
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-15
1-17
1.1
Introduction
Welcome to the Panasonic Voice Processing System

The Voice Processing System (VPS) is a flexible, automated communication tool
that may have a profound effect on the productivity of your work place.
The TVP200 is an 8-port system. The TVP200 can store up to 32 hours of voice
data. Each VPS port is connected to an extension port of a PBX or a CO line.
How the VPS and PBX communicate is quite simple. The PBX thinks that the
VPS is a single line telephone. The VPS will mimic all the actions that a live attendant would carry out from an ordinary single line telephone. The voice prompts
help you command the VPS. You can communicate with the VPS using keys on
your phone.
The VPS enables you to receive and deliver messages using mailboxes which are
assigned to each of you. You can control all your calls responding to voice
prompts with the touch of a key entry on a phone, even if you are away from your
office. The VPS follows your instructions quickly and gives you reliable, accurate
services. Whether you are out of the office, on the phone, or just unavailable to
answer the phone, the VPS handles all your calls accordingly. For example, transferring to an extension directly, paging over the intercom system, taking a message
in a mailbox, and so forth.
If messages arrive in your mailbox, the VPS will notify you by using a lamp on the
phone, a beeper or a telephone call. With this feature, you do not have to worry
about missing important calls.
Exchanging information with the VPS is fast and simple. You can leave a voice
message without speaking directly to the recipient by accessing the desired mailbox.
You do not need any extra paperwork. The editing function in the system enables
you to review and change messages. Also you can assign a password to your message to protect it from being heard by any other person.
The VPS increases the value of time spent in your business and personal life by
minimizing paperwork. It sends messages and notifies you of new messages at the
exact time you designate. It never wastes time by tying you up with lengthy calls.
For both you and outside callers, the VPS will contribute greatly to the growth of
your telephone service.
1-2
Overview
1.1
Introduction
The VPS provides four incoming call services: Automated Attendant service,
Voice Mail service, Custom service, or Interview service. A number of features
incorporated into the VPS can be carried out depending upon your communication
needs. By assigning one of the incoming call services to a VPS port, people who
dial the VPS telephone number can select specific communication features by responding to the voice prompts. You can use the VPS as a backup receptionist to
handle the overflow of unanswered calls to your live attendant. Or you can use the
system to guide your callers to the services you provide. The VPS is equipped
with many convenient features which will allow you to create an effective communication system to suit your needs.
Overview
1-3
1.2
Call Services
You can set the VPS to answer incoming calls with the following four call services: Automated Attendant service, Voice Mail service, Custom service, or Interview service. These services can be assigned to each VPS port. See Port Assignment in Chapter 4.
Each service can not only be assigned to a VPS extension as an independent service, but also can be used in combination with other services. Refer to these four
services in Chapter 3.
Callers can also access the Automated Attendant service and Voice Mail service
any time by pressing the appropriate Service Access Command key during the
other call services (see Service Access Command in Chapter 3).
Automated Attendant Service

When callers reach this service, they will hear a list of options. Callers can reach
their desired party by entering the extension number followed by [#]. Callers may
also dial by department (Department Dialing) or by name (Dialing by Name).
The VPS responds to the command by either routing the caller to the extension or
the operator. When a station is specified, the call will be treated with the Call
Transfer status set up by each station:
Call Blocking
You can block incoming calls so as not to be connected with your extension.
Call Screening
The VPS tells you the callers name before connecting the call. You can decide
whether or not to answer the call.
Intercom Paging
The VPS pages you over the intercom paging system.
Calling a Beeper
The VPS calls your beeper and displays the callers callback number on the beeper
display.
For further information, refer to Call Transfer Status in Chapter 3. You also have
the option of not setting a Call Transfer Status. Call will be directly connected
with your extension. Even if the extension is busy or there is no answer, the VPS
will handle the call with one of the following:
Hold
When the extension is busy, the caller has the option of holding the call temporarily. After a short period, the VPS will call the extension again.
Leaving a Message
The caller is automatically transferred to the mailbox of the extension.
1-4
Overview
1.2
Call Services
Transfer to the Covering Extension
The call is transferred to the covering extension which handles the call by its own
Call Transfer status.
Intercom Paging
The VPS pages you over the intercom paging system.
Calling a Beeper
The VPS calls your beeper and displays the callers callback number on the beeper
display.
Calling the Operator
The caller can talk to the operator.
Returning to the Automated Attendant Top Menu
The call is sent back to the top menu of the Automated Attendant service and may
have the option of calling another extension.
You can activate several options simultaneously so that the caller can choose one
among them. See Incomplete Call Handling Service in Chapter 3 which describes this in detail.
Voice Mail Service

This service is a voice message receiving and delivery service which allows callers
to leave messages. After accessing this service, callers reach the desired mailbox
by entering the mailbox number followed by [#]. Meanwhile, you can use other
versatile features (Subscriber service):
Message Scan
You can listen to the first four seconds of each recorded message.
Receive Message
You can playback messages.
Message Transfer
After listening to the messages, you can transfer them to other mailboxes with your
additional comments.
Message Delivery, Internal
The VPS will automatically deliver your message to other mailboxes.
Private Message
You can prohibit your message from being transferred to other mailboxes.
Group Distribution List, System/Personal
You can send the identical message to several mailboxes with a single operation.
Extension Group
You can share one mailbox with other people in your company.
Overview
1-5
1.2
Call Services
Message Delivery Status
You can check if your message has been already sent to the desired destination.
See Chapter 3 for other available features. And for Subscribers, the Subscribers
Guide has been edited to show how to use these features from a telephone.
Your VPS messages are safely locked in a mailbox guarded by a password known
only to you. The VPS also reduces telephone tag and illegibly-written messages
as well as giving you a confidential form of communication. Likewise, this service
can be used to encourage development of concise messages, making it an efficient
time-management tool. For example, you can minimize interruptions when you
need to focus on work at hand by forwarding your calls to the VPS. The Voice
Mail service can also be a reminder service, by scheduling messages to yourself.
Interview Service
When most of your callers will want a service like service scheduling and order
taking, use the interview mailbox. It will help you gather concise information in a
methodical way. You can set up a questionnaire mailbox with as many as ten
questions, and obtain specific information from customers calling the VPS. When
callers access this mailbox, they can leave messages responding to a series of questions presented to them. An interview mailbox can be assigned to each mailbox
owner depending upon the Class of Service setting. Therefore, the questions can
be recorded by the owner of the interview mailbox by telephone. One of the interview mailboxes can be used for the Interview service on a port basis.
Custom Service
By assigning specific functions to the telephone keypad digits, callers can access
the services or people they need. This service is the key to making your business
stronger. For example, the VPS can give your customers 24-hour service: they can
leave orders in mailboxes, obtain product information, or notify your service staff
of an emergency. Callers can reach their desired extensions or mailboxes by selecting a key one by one. On the other hand, callers can skip the Custom service
menus to go to either the desired party or mailbox.
The System Administrator is responsible for programming each custom service
menu. The custom service menu messages are recorded by the Message Manager.
In regarding the Custom service and Interview service, it is necessary to program
the details on your own. You will find a programming example in Chapter 3. See
Custom Service and Interview Service.
1-6
Overview
1.3
Other Features
Some of the mailbox features are restricted in some mailboxes. The following features are only available to mailbox owners who are authorized by the Class of Service (COS) setting.
Message Waiting Notification

The VPS will notify you of messages which came in your mailbox by illuminating
the message waiting lamp on your extension and by calling a pre-programmed telephone or beeper. The telephone number of the caller can be displayed on the
beeper instead of a VPS extension number. In this case, you can directly contact
with the caller in an emergency without retrieving the message in the mailbox.
When you often work out of the office, this service eliminates the need to regularly
check your mailbox. Also up to two time frames can be set on each day of the
week. You can not only concentrate on your work but also deal with an urgent
matter wherever you are.
External Message Delivery

In addition to message delivery to other mailboxes, the VPS can send your message to people outside of your company. You can also set the delivery date and
time. When the set time comes, the VPS will call the destination. The VPS voice
prompts will tell the receiver to receive the message. Only the person who knows
the password can listen to the message. With the password (four digits), the VPS
gives you a reliable, confidential communication service.
Auto Forwarding
You can set the unreceived messages to be forwarded or copied automatically to
another mailbox. With this feature, you can assign your job to another extension
on your day-off.
When the VPS is connected to a Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system with D-PITS Voice
Mail Integration, the following convenient features will enhance the mailbox operation.
Live Call Screening (LCS)*

LCS is like having an answering machine right at your desk. It combines the functions of the VPS with a proprietary telephone set. When the LCS feature is activated, you can monitor incoming messages to the mailbox, and decide whether or
not to take the call.
Overview
1-7
1.3
Other Features
Two-Way Recording*
This feature reduces the trouble of writing down messages. You can record a conversation in the mailbox or another persons mailbox while talking on the phone.
If you press the feature key on your proprietary telephone, the VPS will start to
record your telephone conversation.
Direct Mailbox Access*

You can reach your mailbox by simply dialing a VPS extension without dialing
your mailbox number. All you have to do is to enter the correct password.
* Applicable only when you have a Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system and the D-PITS
Voice Mail Integration is activated.
Chapter 3 describes these features in detail.
1-8
Overview
1.4
Outside Caller Handling

The VPS helps a caller access his desired party. The VPS plays voice prompts to
instruct him what to do next. The caller has only to press the suitable key on the
phone following the voice prompts.
Even rotary telephone callers can make use of the VPS. The system can be set to
send callers to the operator or the General Delivery Mailbox (G.D.M.). When they
leave messages in the G.D.M., the Message Manager will transfer the message to
other mailboxes. See Rotary Telephone Service in Chapter 3.
With the VPS, you can also communicate with people all over the world. To expand your business field, the VPS has been designed to support up to three languages. Callers can choose the language of the instructions of the VPS. The first
language, English, is recorded at the factory. The second and the third languages
are recorded by the Message Manager according to your business needs. See
Multi-Lingual Service and Voice Prompts in Chapter 3.
When callers access the VPS, they are greeted by one of 32 company greetings.
The Message Manager records the greetings so that callers are also properly
greeted on holidays or during after-hours. See Company Greetings in Chapter 3.
The VPS connects the caller who needs human help with an operator. He can
reach a live operator by pressing [0] at any time. Up to three operators can be assigned. See Operator Service in Chapter 3.
Callers can access the desired extension by dialing a one-digit number (19) when
they are in the Department Dialing menu. For callers to access the Department Dialing service, the Service Access Command [#] [3] is available. See Department
Dialing in Chapter 3.
Some callers who do not know the number of their desired extensions or mailboxes
may be unable to enter the correct number when asked by the VPS. However, they
can also reach the desired party by dialing the first three or four letters of the persons last name. For callers to access this feature, the Service Access Command
[#] [1] is available. See Dialing by Name in Chapter 3.
Because written communication is also essential to enhance the efficiency of your
business capability, you may want to have fax calls received frequently. To avoid
being interrupted by fax signals, the VPS identifies a fax call and transfers it to a
fax extension for you. Up to two fax extensions can be specified as the destination,
so that one serves as a backup for the other. The system notifies a specified person
whether the fax call was successfully completed. See Fax Management in Chapter 3.
Overview
1-9
1.5
Configuration
VPS Connections to the PBX

TVP200
VOICE PROC
ESSING SYSTE
M KX-TVP200
RS-232C Interface
Data Terminal
Panason
ic
(CO line)
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
HYBRID SYSTE
Fax
Panaso
nic
Subscriber
CO Line
DIGIT
AL
Pana
soni
c
System Manager
DIGITAL
Pana
sonic
Message Manager
(Operator)
1-10
Overview
Panaso
nic
1.6
Guidelines for Preparation
Programming
The System Administrator is responsible for setting up system parameters, administrating the parameters, or diagnosing the system with the use of an interactive
screen based program. The VPS can be programmed using VT100, Compatible
Terminals or other ASCII Terminals. On top of each screen display in this manual,
you will find a programming instruction indicated by an arrow (see page 4-5).
This will help you locate the desired programming screen quickly.
To begin with, confirm that the system installation preparations are complete and
that the rotary switch is set to the right value (see Chapter 2).
After you finish system startup, we recommend that you employ the Quick Setup
feature. This provides a quick way of setting up the VPS for basic Voice Mail or
Automated Attendant service. It includes mailbox creation, incoming call service
setting for all ports, time setting, password setting and several other programming
items which must be done initially in order to start the VPS operation. See Quick
Setup in Chapter 4.
The VPS provides a remarkable setup which is a combination of the startup system
and the Quick Setup. In other words, the Quick Setup can be done automatically
when you start up the VPS when D-PITS Voice Mail Integration with a Panasonic
KX-TD series telephone system is activated (see page 4-3). The VPS obtains necessary information from your PBX over data link: extension numbers which the
VPS refers to create mailbox and the time. See Auto Configuration in Chapter 3.
If you select the Program mode at the System Administration top menu (see page
4-7), you can customize the VPS:
Mailbox Setting
You can edit the parameters of each mailbox. Also, you can set parameters for the
Message Waiting Notification-Device feature, including the time frame setting.
Class of Service
You can define a set of services (164) available for each mailbox.
Port Service
You can assign one of four incoming call services to each VPS port. According to
the set port service, you need to select a proper company greeting.
Service Setting
You can set up some features which are related to the Automated Attendant service: Department Dialing, Operator Service, Alternate Extension.
Overview
1-11
1.6

Furthermore, you can program the Custom service by assigning a specific functions or services to a particular key.
System Parameter Setting
System Group Assignment
You can set up mailbox groups and extension groups. Up to 20 group lists can
be programmed respectively.
Holiday Setting
You can specify the incoming call service parameters which will be used on
holidays.
Daylight Saving Time
You can set the VPS to adjust the clock for daylight savings time.
Prompt Setting
You can program the Multi-Lingual service.
Other Parameters
You can specify the parameters used for outgoing call services: Message Waiting Notification, External Message Delivery.
You can allow callers to hold when the line is busy.
You can define how to handle rotary telephone callers.
You can program the intercom paging parameters in accordance with your PBX.
You can enable the VPS to transfer fax calls to the fax machine automatically.
Hardware Setting
You can modify RS-232C parameters.
You can also specify the dialing parameters such as the integration mode for your
PBX.
Chapter 4 describes in detail how to set these parameters.
Telephone Programming
The System Manager and the Message Manager can also log in the VPS by telephone to change the system parameters and to record voice prompts.
To log in by telephone, call the VPS and gain access to the Voice Mail service.
Then enter the star key and one of their mailbox numbers. You can set the password (up to eight digits) to prevent other people from logging into these two mailboxes.
1-12
Overview
1.6
System Manager
You can change the system parameters through the System Managers mailbox.
In the System Managers main command menu, you can coordinate the VPS, even
though some of the programming items overlap those by the System Administrator:
Setting up Mailboxes
You can assign a mailbox to somebody in your company. Up to 1022 mailboxes
can be created excluding the System Managers mailbox and the Message
Managers mailbox.
On the other hand, you can delete a mailbox. Or you can delete a mailbox password so that the mailbox owner can reset the password.
Setting Class of Service (COS) Parameters
You can define each set of services (164) available for the mailbox owners. Class
of Service determines the mailbox capacity, whether or not to enable the special
features and so forth. It is also possible to assign a sub-mailbox called an Interview mailbox. The mailbox owner who has this mailbox can record questionnaires
to the callers.
Setting the System Clock
You can set the time after a prolonged power loss.
Checking System Usage
You can obtain eight types of system reports to monitor the VPS operating status.
There is a feature called Broadcasting Messages which is unique to the System
Manager. You can deliver a message to all the mailbox owners at the same time.
For example, you can report the schedule of a company event. You do not have to
type a letter or make copies and deliver them to all the people in your company.
By using Broadcasting Messages, your message is distributed via the VPS.
When you program, refer to Chapter 5.
Message Manager
Via the Message Managers mailbox, you can record voice prompts which are
played to callers, such as company greetings, department dialing menu messages
and so on.
In the Message Managers main command menu, you can manage following items:
Recording Company Greetings
You can record up to 32 company greetings which are played to callers when they
reach the VPS.
Overview
1-13
1.6

Recording Company Name
When the person who receives an external message fails to enter the password
which is assigned to that message, he receives the recorded company name.
Recording Department Dialing Menu Messages
You can record the voice prompts that will guide callers to a speed dialing feature.
Recording Custom Service Menu Messages
You can record the voice prompts that will guide callers to their desired service by
going down the layers of menus.
Recording Voice Labels for Mailbox Lists
You can record a name for each mailbox list.
Recording User Prompts
You can record the voice prompts in other languages to support the Multi-Lingual
service.
Recording Selection Menus
You can record the language selection menu message that prompts callers to select
the desired language.
When you program, refer to Chapter 6.
1-14
Overview
1.7
Mailbox Management
When you have a mailbox, you are regarded as a Subscriber. You can receive and
send messages and answer incoming calls via a mailbox. Before you begin normal
operations, you have to log into the main command menu to customize your mailbox. You can set up your mailbox by telephone. Just call the VPS Voice Mail
service and enter the star key and your mailbox number. It is important to also
have a password (up to eight digits) to access the Subscriber service menu.
You have to set up the following before using your mailbox:
Recording your name
Played to the callers when they enter the spelling of your name to reach you.
Recording Personal Greetings
Greet the callers who reach your mailbox. You can record three types.
Setting up a Covering Extension
This extension may answer the call which you could not answer.
Recording Questions for the Interview Mailbox
When you have an Interview mailbox by COS setting, callers can leave messages
by responding to your questions.
Setting the Message Reception Mode
Specifies whether to receive messages in the usual mailbox or the Interview mailbox.
Setting the Incomplete Call Handling Status
Specifies how to treat calls when you are unable to answer. Six options are available: leaving a message, covering extension transfer, intercom paging, calling a
beeper, operator transfer, or returning to top menu Automated Attendant service.
See Incomplete Call Handling Service in Chapter 3.
Setting the Call Transfer Status
Specifies how the VPS should handle incoming calls before connecting them to
your extension. Five options are available: call blocking, call screening, intercom
paging, calling a beeper, or transferring directly to your extension. See Call
Transfer Status in Chapter 3.
You can also set the following additional features to use your mailbox more efficiently:
Entry of Personal Group Distribution Lists
If you have put mailboxes together into a list, you can send the same message to
these mailboxes by simply specifying the mailbox group number (14). You can
create up to two lists with 20 entries per each list.
Overview
1-15
1.7
Mailbox Management
Message Waiting Lamp Notification Setting
Specifies whether the VPS should notify you of recorded messages by illuminating
the message waiting lamp of your telephone. Authorization by the COS is required.
Setting Notification by Calling
Specifies whether the VPS should notify you of recorded messages by calling a
pre-assigned telephone or a beeper. Authorization by the COS is required.
The Subscribers Guide will explain the above in detail.
1-16
Overview
1.8
System Diagnosis
Using a data terminal connected to a RS-232C port of the VPS, you can maintain
the VPS: running reports, backing up data, getting error logs. In addition to the
task of programming the system (see Chapter 4), the System Administrator is responsible for diagnosing the system (see Chapter 7).
System Reports
If you select the System Reports mode at the System Administration top menu (see
page 4-7), you can get detailed information about VPS activities.
The System Reports provide statistics on system-wide operation and usage of the
VPS. Therefore you can monitor various operational aspects of the VPS. These
reports can be printed or displayed on a terminal.
Mailbox Assignments
Class of Service Assignments
System Service Report
Call Account Report
Port Usage Report
Disk Usage Report
Mailbox Usage Report
Fax Call Report
For more information, see System Reports in Chapter 7. Also, running system reports can be done by telephone via the System Managers mailbox (See Chapter 5).
Utility Commands
If you select the Utility Command mode at the System Administration top menu,
the following Utility Commands can be used:
OFLN
You can turn off the call progressing mode of the VPS, used for deleting a mailbox.
ONLN
You can restore the call progressing mode of the VPS.
PASS
You can create and change system passwords.
TIME
You can set the system date and time.
PSET
You can set some of the system reports at designated time everyday.
Overview
1-17
1.8
System Diagnosis
ELOG
You can get the error log of devices such as CPU card, Port card and hard disk
drive.
SAVE
You can back up voice prompts and all system programming data to a floppy disk
on a data terminal.
LOAD
You can restore the saved data to the VPS in the event of a hard disk drive failure.
GPRN
You can display System Programming parameters.
VERS
You can display the version of hard disk, main ROM and Port card.
CREP
You can display the programming of Custom service.
CCLR
You can clear the access count of each Custom service.
MWL
You can specify the message waiting lamp retry times.
MRL
You can set the minimum recording length of one message.
MPLT
You can display the User Prompts recording status.
HELP
You can display the available Utility Commands.
QSET
You can start the Quick Setup.
LMON
You can monitor the condition of each VPS port.
PUTD
You can see the DTMF tones the VPS is receiving and sending.
1-18
Overview
Chapter 2
System Installation
This chapter tells you about the installation of
the VPS and the expansion of the system.
Contents
2.1 System Components ..............................................
2.1.1 Port Card .....................................................
2.1.2 CPU Card ....................................................
2.1.3 Hard Disk Drive ..........................................
2.2 Installation ............................................................
2.2.1 Preparation ..................................................
2.2.2 System Expansion .......................................
2.2.3 Extension or CO Line Connection ..............
2.2.4 Data Terminal or Printer Connection ..........
2.2.5 Power Cable Connection.............................
2-2
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-13
2-22
2-25
2.1
System Components
The Voice Processing System (VPS) comprises a main card (Port card and CPU
card), a hard disk drive and proprietary system software.
Main Cabinet
TVP200 can be expanded
to store up to 32 hours of
voice data and handle a
maximum of eight simultaneous calls by installing
optional Port cards.
TVP200
VOICE PRO
CESSING SYST
EM KX-TVP20
EIA (RS-232C)
Connector
Ground Terminal
Fuse
Panaso
nic
AC Inlet
Power Switch
Power Indicator
Note: EIA port is at SELV.
2-2
Installation
2.1
System Components
Inside View of the Main Cabinet

Grounding strap
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
Slot for an optional

Port card
Rotary Switch
3.5" Hard Disk Drive
Ferrite Core
POWER
Power Indicator
Note: The actual shape of the 3.5" Hard Disk Drive will be changed.
Installation
2-3
2.1
System Components
Main Cabinet Components

Ground Terminal
Connect the frame of the main unit to ground.
EIA Connector (RS-232C)

Connecting a data terminal to the VPS unit via EIA connector allows the System
Administrator to set the system parameters of the VPS. A serial printer can be
connected to this port to print the reports.
Fuse
If the Power Indicator goes off while the system is running, the fuse may have
been blown. When replacing the fuse with a new one, be sure the Power Switch
is turned off.
AC Power Jack
Connect the Power Cable to an AC outlet dedicated to the VPS unit.
Rotary Switch
The rotary switch is used, for example, when performing initial parameters settings.
Power Indicator
When turning on the Power Switch, this indicator flashes while setting up the
system, then it stays on to show the system is on-line mode.
Power Switch
Pressing the Power Switch starts the system beginning with the self test. When
making any connections or opening the cover, be sure the Power Switch is turned
off.
Grounding Strap
To protect the printed circuit board from static electricity, first discharge any
body static by touching the grounding strap.
2-4
Installation
2.1
System Components
2.1.1 Port Card

The following two types of Port cards can be installed in the KX-TVP200.
4 Digital ports expansion card (KX-TVP204)
2 Digital/Analog ports expansion card (KX-TVP102)
No Port cards are installed at the factory.
Please purchase above two port cards per your requirement.
KX-TVP102
KX-TVP102 consists of the following two cards:
Telephone line interface card
Digital signal processor (DSP) card
The telephone line interface transmits and receives analog and digital signals to
and from the telephone line. The analog input signal is digitized at a sampling
rate of 8kHz to create a 16-bit digital signal.
The DSP has the following features.
Voice Compression and Decompression
DTMF Detection
DTMF Generation
Call Progress Tone Detection
KX-TVP204
KX-TVP204 consists of a telephone line interface and a DSP.
The telephone interface of the KX-TVP204 transmits and receives only digital signals to and from the telephone line. The DSP has the same features as the KXTVP102.
2.1.2 CPU Card

The CPU card includes the central microprocessor, Flash ROM, dynamic RAM,
system controller, a Rotary switch and a RS-232C interface. It is mounted inside
the main cabinet.
The central microprocessor communicates with and controls the DSPs on the Port
card via FIFO memory.
The Flash memory stores ROM-based system boot program, operating system, production-diagnostic software and basic application program.
Parts of the Flash memory (except the fixed boot part) can be updated from the
hard disk if they are out of date.
The other application programs and the system administration table from the hard
disk are read into dynamic RAMs for use by the system.
Installation
2-5
2.1
System Components
The rotary switch has several functions:
Position 0: Factory preset
Normal setting
Position 1: RS-232C parameters are initialized when the system is booted up.
This setting should be used if there is some uncertainty about the
parameters to be used when making connections.
Default RS-232C parameters are:

Speed
: 9600 bps
Number of data bits : 8
Number of stop bits : 1
Parity
: None
Position 2*:When first installing the system, Quick Setup is automatically executed and all ports are set up to handle callers with Automated Attendant service. (Please wait a minimum of two minutes for the setup
to finish.)
Position 3*:When first installing the system, Quick Setup is automatically executed and all ports are set up to handle callers with Voice Mail service. (Please wait a minimum of two minutes for the setup to finish.)
Position 5: System parameters are initialized and set automatically to the factory
default values (see Chapter 4) when the system is booted up.
* When you have a Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system with D-PITS Voice Mail Integration
Notes: You must return the Rotary switch to position 0 after using positions 1, 2,
3, or 5. Otherwise, system programming, user recorded prompts, etc. may
be lost on the next power up.
The RS-232C interface can be used to connect a terminal for system programming or a printer for printing reports.
2.1.3 Hard Disk Drive

The hard disk stores the proprietary system program, the system administration
table, the voice prompts (about 40 minutes worth) and has the capacity to record
approximately 32 hours of messages from callers. The hard disk drive is controlled
by the central microprocessor.
2-6
Installation
2.2
Installation
Hard Disk Drive Usage Environment
Temperature
Relative humidity
Shock
Vibration
Magnetic Field
:
:
:
:
5 C 40 C
10 70 %
Under 5 G
5 22 Hz : 0.020 inch displacement; double amplitude,
1 octave per minute.
23 350 Hz : Under 0.5 G
: DC : 6 gauss
to 700 KHz : 7 milligauss
700 KHz 1.5 MHz : 3 milligauss
Note: We recommend you back up the hard disk data regularly to

save the data. Please consult with your dealer for details.
2.2.1 Preparation
Tools needed
Screwdriver
Drill
Hardware
Install the VPS on the wall (See page 2-11)
Connect telephone lines between the VPS and PBX (See page 2-13)
Connect a data terminal or a printer to the VPS (See page 2-22)
Connect the power cable to the VPS (See page 2-25)
Software
Set the RS-232C parameters (See page 4-76)
Startup System (See page 4-6)
Quick Setup (See page 4-8)
Installation
2-7
2.2
Installation
2.2.2 System Expansion

Installing an optional Port card
The KX-TVP200 can handle up to eight calls simultaneously by installing the
following optional Port cards.
KX-TVP102 (2 Digital/Analog ports expansion card)
KX-TVP204 (4 Digital ports expansion card)
No Port cards are installed at the factory.
Precaution
When installing an optional Port card, make sure the Power Switch is turned off.
To protect the printed circuit board from static electricity, first discharge any body
static by touching the grounding strap. Refer to the manual accompanying the optional card about precautions and the installation procedure.
The optional Port card for system expansion should be inserted into a proper slot as
illustrated below.
1.
Remove the adhesive tape from the

card.
2.
Loosen screw* with a screwdriver.
4.
Insert the optional Port card into the

SLOT 1 using the guide rails.
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
5.
* The screw is unnecessary after
installation.
3.
Loosen the screw on the grounding

strap, then remove the strap from the
unit.
Press the left and right card latches

firmly, then fix the grounding strap to
the unit with a screwdriver.
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
Card latch
2-8
Installation
Guide rail
2.2
Installation
1.
Remove the adhesive tape from the

card.
3.
Insert the optional Port card into the

SLOT 1 using the guide rails.
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
2.
Guide rail
Loosen the screw on the grounding

strap, then remove the strap from the
unit.
4.
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
Press the left and right card latches

firmly, then fix the grounding strap to
the unit with a screwdriver.
SLOT 1
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
Card latch
Installation
2-9
2.2
Installation
The VPS can be installed on the wall. Please read the following notes concerning
installations and connections before installing the VPS.
Installation Precautions
Avoid installing the VPS in the following places:
(Doing so may result in malfunction, noise or discoloration.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places.

(Temperature range : 5 C 40 C, Relative humidity range : 10 70 %)
Areas where there are thermal springs, etc. where sulfuric gases may damage the
equipment or contacts.
Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into contact with the unit.
Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders.
On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave
ovens or air conditioners.
(It is preferable not to be installed in the same room with the above equipment.)
Install at least 1.8 m (6 feet) from televisions.
Do not obstruct the area around the PBX and the VPS. (Be especially careful to
allow space for cooling above and at the sides of both systems for maintenance and
inspection.)
Wiring Precautions
Make sure to observe the following instructions when wiring:
1
2
3
2-10
Do not wire the telephone cable parallel to an AC power source, computer, telex,
etc. If the cables are run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or
use shielded cables and ground the shields.
If cables are run on the floor, use protectors or the like to protect the wires from
being stepped on. Avoid wiring under carpets.
Avoid sharing the same AC power supply for computers, telexes, and other office
equipment. Otherwise, the VPS operation may be interrupted by the induction
noise from such equipment.
Installation
2.2
Installation
Mounting the VPS on the Wall

The wall where the VPS is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of
the VPS. If screws other than the ones supplied are used, use the same-sized diameter screws as the enclosed ones.
To Mount on a Wooden Wall:

1
Place the template on the wall to

mark the 3 screw positions.
,,,,
,,,,
,,,,
,,,,
Install the 3 screws into the wall.
Wooden
Wall
Template
Drive the screw
to this position.
Hook the unit on the screw heads.
Note: Template is included with the unit.
Installation
2-11
2.2
Installation
To Mount on Concrete or Mortar Walls

1
Place the template (included) on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions.
Drill 3 holes and drive the anchor plugs (included) with a hammer, flush with the
wall.
To the wall surface
Anchor Plug
Concrete Wall
6.4 mm
(1/4 inch)
29 mm
(1 1/8 inch)
Drive the screw

to this position.
2-12
,,,,
,,,,
,,,,
,,,,
Install the 3 screws into the anchor plug.
Hook the unit on the screw heads.
Installation
2.2
2.2.3
Installation
Extension or CO Line Connection
The VPS must be connected to extension or CO line before using the system. Up
to eight lines can be connected to the modular jacks on the Port card.
Warning: No other apparatus should be connected in parallel with this apparatus
on the same line. Such connection may cause unsatisfactory operation
and would invalidate the approval.
To connect telephone lines:

1
Loosen two screws on the right side of the main unit, then open the front cover
in the direction of arrow A .
TVP200
VOICE PROC
ESSING SYST
EM KX-TVP200
screw
A
screw
Panaso
nic
Note: The screws are attached to the front cover with springs so that they will not
be lost.
Insert a screwdriver into the opening of the ferrite core and open it.
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
POWER
Installation
2-13
2.2
3
Installation
Insert the modular plug of the telephone cord into the modular jack on the Port
card. Let the telephone cord through the ferrite core. Then close the ferrite core.
Telephone line modular jacks
PORT 1 and 2 PORT 3 and 4
PORT 1
PORT 2
KX-TVP204 KX-TVP102
Telephone line modular jacks

on the Port card (KX-TVP102)
is at TNV.
To extension ports of the PBX or CO line
You can use the following two kinds of Port cards in the KX-TVP200.
(No port cards are installed at the factory.)
4 Digital ports expansion card (KX-TVP204)
2 Digital/Analog ports expansion card (KX-TVP102)
One KX-TVP204 (2 jacks) can support four VPS ports using D-PITS Integration mode only, and KX-TVP204 does not work under other integration
modes (INBAND Integration, None).
One KX-TVP102 (2 jacks) can support two VPS ports under any integration
mode.
The Number of Ports VPS Cards can support
Card Type
Integration Mode
D-PITS
Inband/None
KX-TVP204
Not available
KX-TVP102
Note: You can use only one Integration mode among D-PITS, Inband, and None.
To set the Integration mode, please see "4.5.6.3.1 Dialing Parameters".
There are three SLOTs in the KX-TVP200, and 4 VPS ports are assigned physically for each SLOT, so 12 VPS ports are physically prepared in total, however
system can support only 8 ports max.
But in case you use the KX-TVP102, only the first 2 ports of the physical 4 ports
of the card will be effective.
For example, when you mount the KX-TVP204 in SLOT1, the VPS supports Port
1-4. But when you mount the KX-TVP102 in SLOT1, the VPS supports only
Port1 and Port2. Please see the following table for all card configurations and the
effective number of ports in each case. When the VPS administrator sets up
parameters for any port ("4.5.3 Port Service" and "4.5.6.2 Hardware-Port
Setting"), please be careful to set up for the proper port number of VPS ports.
2-14
Installation
2.2
Installation
Card Configuration (D-PITS Integration)
Pattern
No.
1
SLOT 1
(Port 1,2,3,4)
TVP204
(Port 1,2,3,4)
SLOT 2
SLOT 3
Total Number
of Ports
(Port 5,6,7,8) (Port 9,10,11,12)
4
TVP204
(Port 5,6,7,8)
TVP204
(Port 9,10,11,12)
3
4
5
TVP204
(Port 1,2,3,4)
TVP204
(Port 1,2,3,4)
6
7
8
9
10
TVP204
(Port 1,2,3,4)
TVP204
(Port 1,2,3,4)
TVP204
(Port 1,2,3,4)
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
11
12
13
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
14
15
16
17
18
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
TVP204
(Port 5,6,7,8)
4
8
TVP204
(Port 9,10,11,12)
TVP204
TVP204
(Port 5,6,7,8) (Port 9,10,11,12)
TVP102
(Port 5,6)
TVP102
(Port 9,10)
TVP102
TVP102
(Port 5,6)
(Port 9,10)
TVP204
(Port 5,6,7,8)
TVP204
TVP102
(Port 5,6,7,8)
(Port 9,10)
TVP204
TVP102
(Port 5,6,7,8)
(Port 9,10)
TVP204
(Port 9,10,11,12)
TVP102
TVP204
(Port 5,6) (Port 9,10,11,12)
TVP102
TVP204
(Port 5,6) (Port 9,10,11,12)
8
8
6
6
8
6
6
8
6
6
8
2
TVP102
(Port 5,6)
2
TVP102
(Port 9,10)
Installation
2-15
2.2
Installation
Pattern
No.
19
20
SLOT 1
(Port 1,2,3,4)
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
21
22
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
SLOT 2
SLOT 3
Total Number
of Ports
(Port 5,6,7,8) (Port 9,10,11,12)
TVP102
4
(Port 5,6)
TVP102
4
(Port 9,10)
TVP102
TVP102
4
(Port 5,6)
(Port 9,10)
TVP102
TVP102
6
(Port 5,6)
(Port 9,10)
Card Configuration (non D-PITS Integration)

Pattern
No.
1
SLOT 1
(Port 1,2,3,4)
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
SLOT 2
SLOT 3
Total Number
(Port 5,6,7,8) (Port 9,10,11,12)
of Ports
2
TVP102
(Port 5,6)
TVP102
(Port 9,10)
3
4
5
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
6
7
TVP102
(Port 1,2)
TVP102
(Port 5,6)
TVP102
(Port 5,6)
TVP102
(Port 5,6)
2
4
TVP102
(Port 9,10)
TVP102
(Port 9,10)
TVP102
(Port 9,10)
4
4
6
In conclusion, the KX-TVP200 can support a maximum of 8 ports in D-PITS

Integration mode and a maximum of 6 ports in non D-PITS Integration mode.
2-16
Installation
2.2
Installation
D-PITS Integration
To the Panasonic KX-TD series PBX, the VPS ports look like digital extensions.
The digital communication (2B+D) provides two VPS ports for each Digital
Station port of the PBX.
For example, when you mount two KX-TVP204 cards, you can use eight VPS
ports in total by connecting four jacks of the KX-TD1232 to four jacks of the
KX-TVP200.
Note: 1. To use D-PITS Integration, the lowest jack of the KX-TVP200 must be
connected to the lowest number jack assigned as a Voice Mail Port
Assignment in KX-TD series. Please see the following connection examples.
Connection Example (KX-TVP204u 2)
PBX (KX-TD series)
TVP200
SLOT 3
Jack 5
Jack 3
SLOT 2
Jack 4
Port 5,Port 6 Port 7,Port 8
Jack 4
TVP204
Jack 3
SLOT 1
Jack 2
Jack 1
Jack 2
Port 1,Port 2 Port 3,Port 4
TVP204
assigned as D-PITS VPS ports
Installation
2-17
2.2
Installation
Connection Example (KX-TVP102u 3, D-PITS Integration Mode)
TVP200
PBX (KX-TD series)
SLOT 3
Jack 6
Jack 5
Port 9,Port 10
TVP102
Jack 4
SLOT 2
Jack 4
Jack 3
Port 5,Port 6
TVP102
Jack 3
Jack 2
SLOT 1
Jack 2
Jack 1
Port 1,Port 2
TVP102
assigned as D-PITS VPS ports
2. To communicate between the VPS and the PBX through D-PITS Integration, the PBX and VPS must be programmed to work together.
Please refer to "4.5.6.3.1 Dialing Parameters" about the VPS setting of
Integration Mode, and please refer to the Installation Manual of
Panasonic KX-TD series regarding "Voice Mail Port Assignment" on the
PBX side.
2-18
Installation
2.2
Installation
Inband/None Integration
To the PBX, the VPS looks like SLT sets through standard single-line(tip/ring)
telephone interfaces.
Please see the following connection example.
Connection Example ( KX-TVP102u 3, Inband/None Integration Mode)

PBX
TVP200
Jack 11
SLOT 3
Jack 5
Jack 6
Port 9
Port 10
Jack 10
TVP102
Jack 9
SLOT 2
Jack 3
Jack 4
Port 5
Port 6
Jack 8
TVP102
Jack 7
SLOT 1
Jack 6
Jack 1
Jack 2
Port 1
Port 2
TVP102
Installation
2-19
2.2
Installation
Example:
Your PBX
VPS
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
TVP200
HYBRID SYSTE
VOICE PROC
ESSING SYSTE
M KX-TVP200
Panason
ic
Panaso
nic
Connect the telephone cord.

Connecting to a Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system:
Please refer to the illustration below.
6-pin plug
Terminal wire
Panasonic KX-TD series
L
A
B
H
L
A
B
H
telephone system
RJ-11
5
4
3
2
VPS 200
Note: If you make use of D-PITS Voice Mail Integration (see page 4-81), use a
4-conductor wiring cord.
Connecting to other PBX (KX-TVP102 only):
Terminal wire
other PBX
A
B
RJ-11
4
3
VPS 200
Note: Use a 2-conductor wiring cord. The maximum length of the wire varies
according to your PBX type. Please refer to your PBX Installation Manual.
Connecting to CO Line (KX-TVP102 only):
Master socket
BT plug
CO Line
Note: Use a 2-conductor wiring cord.
2-20
Installation
Terminal wire
5
2
4
3
RJ-11
VPS 200
2.2
Installation
The following models are recommended to be connected to the VPS:
Panasonic KX-T30810 BE-2
Panasonic KX-T61610 BE
Panasonic KX-T123210BE
Panasonic KX-TD816E
Panasonic KX-TD1232E
Close the front cover of the VPS (and PBX if the cover is removed).
Reverse the procedure of step 1.
Tighten the two screws firmly.

Reverse the procedure of step 1.
Installation
2-21
2.2
2.2.4
Installation
Data Terminal or Printer Connection
For the system administration (system setup, mailbox setup, and system diagnosis),
the RS-232C terminal must be connected to a serial interface (EIA port) of the unit.
If the VT100 or VT100 compatible terminal is used, the System Administrator can
set up system parameters and diagnose the system with the conversational menudriven program. Other RS-232C terminals can be also used.
If you wish to output reports and the like to a printer, it must first be connected to
the system using a RS-232C cable. The wiring and parameters are the same as
those for a terminal. The communication parameters of the unit have been set to
the following values at the factory.
RS-232C parameters
Baud Rate: 9600 bps
Word Bit Length: 8 bits
Parity:
Stop Bit Length:
None
1 bit
Connecting RS-232C cable

Precaution
TV
S200make sure the power switch on both data terminals
Before connecting the
cable,
and the VPS is OFF.
VOICE PRO
CESSING SYS
TEM
RS-232C Cable
Data
terminal
or Printer
Panaso
nic
EIA Port
(RS-232C)
EIA port is at SELV
Insert the RS-232C cable into the VPS with the connector indicating the same direction.
Printer Connection
Make cables so that the printer may be connected to the VPS as shown in the chart.
Cables must be shielded and the maximum length is 2 m (6.5 feet).
2-22
Installation
2.2
Installation
Connection Chart:
EIA (RS-232C) port on
the VPS
EIA (RS-232C) port on

the Printer
Circuit
Type
(EIA)
Signal
Name
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Signal
Name
Circuit
Type
(EIA)
AA
BA
FG
TXD
1
2
1
3
FG
RXD
AA
BB
BB
RXD
TXD
BA
AB
SG
CD
DTR
20
20
7
5
6
8
DTR
SG
CTS
DSR
DCD
CD
AB
CB
CC
CF
The pin configuration of the EIA (RS-232C) connector is as

follows.
Pin
Number
Signal Name
Circuit Type
EIA
CCITT
1
2
FG
TXD
Frame Ground Transmitted

Data
AA
BA
101
103
3
4
RXD
RTS
Received Data Request To

Send
BB
CA
104
105
DSR
Ready
CC
107
7
8
SG
DCD
Signal Ground Data Carrier

Detect
AB
CF
102
109
20
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
CD
108.2
Installation
2-23
2.2
Installation
EIA (RS-232C) SIGNALS:
Frame Ground (FG)
Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord.
Transmitted Data (TXD) .............................................................................. (output)
Conveys signals from the unit to the printer (or terminal). A Mark condition is
held unless data or BREAK signals are being transmitted.
Received Data (RXD) ...................................................................................... (input)
Conveys signals from the printer (or terminal).
Request To Send (RTS) ................................................................................ (output)
This lead is held ON whenever DSR is ON.
Signal Ground (SG)
Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) ....................................................................... (output)
This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON LINE. Circuit
DTR ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the
printer (or terminal). It is switched OFF when the unit is OFF LINE.
2-24
Installation
2.2
Installation
2.2.5 Power Cable Connection

Before connecting the power cable to an AC outlet, make sure all other connections (RS-232C data terminal with VPS, PBX with VPS, PBX with telephone lines)
are secure, and the front cover is closed firmly. Use the AC outlet dedicated to the
VPS unit.
Example:
TVP200
VOICE PROC
ESSING SYSTE
M KX-TVP200
Data Terminal
RS-232C Interface
To AC Outlet (230-240VAC, 50Hz)

Panason
ic
D1232
DIGITAL SUPER
CO
HYBRID SYSTEM
Extn.202
Extn.203
Extn.204
Extn.205
Extn.206
Extn.207
Panaso
nic
DIGIT
AL
Pan
ason
ic
DIGITAL
CO 01
Pana
sonic
Extn.201
Panaso
nic
Note: Connect the AC plug with the correct polarity.

When you operate this product, the mains socket outlet should be near the
product and be easily accessible.
Installation
2-25
Chapter 3
Detailed Feature and Service
Descriptions
This chapter describes all basic, optional, and
programmable features in alphabetical order. It also provides
information about the conditions, programming and operation
required, related features, and operation for all features.
Features and Services
Before Reading This Chapter

In this chapter important features and services about the VPS are described in the following
format.
Feature Ref.
Shows the master feature (service) of the
feature (service).
Description
Describes the function of the feature (service)
briefly.
More
Information
Shows the features (services) to be referred
to when you want to use the feature more
efficiently and effectively. Each headline
shows the name of the feature (service) so
that you can look it up in Chapter 3 by
headline.
Description
The Subscriber can listen to

the messages left in his
Subscribers mailbox.
More
Information
Reply to Message Sender

After listening, you can reply

Receive Message
Conditions
Shows the conditions that must be satisfied
to use the feature (service). Some features
(services) can only be used exclusively and
some require special setting before use.
3-2
Features
S.A.
Shows the pages to be referred to by the System Administrator to set the feature (service).
S.M.
Shows the pages for the System Managers
reference to set the feature (service).
M.M.
Shows the pages to be referred to by the Message Manager to use or set the feature (service).
Receive Message
Feature Ref.
The words "System Programming" and "Class

of Service" will be frequently seen in this
chapter and define the settings done by the
System Administrator via data terminal.
These settings can be partly done by the
System Manager from a touch-tone telephone.
Subscriber
Shows the pages to be referred to by the
Subscriber to use or set the feature (service).
Alternate Extension Group

Description
Transfers the call coming in to the extensions in this group following the
sequence specified by Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence.
S.A.
Alternate Extension Assignment (page 4-48)

Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence (page 4-80)
Auto Configuration (D-PITS Only)

Description
The VPS can obtain extension numbers from a Panasonic KX- TD series
telephone system to automatically create mailboxes.
Conditions
This feature is available only when the D-PITS Voice Mail Integration with
a Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system is activated.
All the mailboxes are numbered the same length. If your PBX provides
extension numbers with three and four digits at the same time, the VPS
attaches 0 to the end of the three digit numbers to make them to four
digits.
S.A.
Integration Mode (page 4-81)
Auto Forwarding
Description
Messages that have not been heard for a specified amount of time can be
automatically forwarded or copied to another mailbox.
Conditions
This service is available only to Subscribers.

Class of Service programming determines the mailboxes that can use this
feature.
Messages marked as private cannot be forwarded.
S.A.
Authorization of Auto Forwarding (page 4-34)
S.M.
Auto Forwarding Status (page 5-10)
Features
3-3

Description
The Automated Attendant answers incoming calls and then routes the caller
to the desired extension.
This service can be assigned on a port-by-port basis.
Calling the Automated Attendant
When the caller reaches the Automated Attendant service, he will first hear
the following Automated Attendant service top menu.
Please enter your partys extension.
To enter by name, press [#] and [1].
(For department dialing, press [ ].)*
* The prompt in parentheses ( ) is heard only when the Department Dialing feature is
programmed and the prompts have been recorded beforehand.
Note:
You can record the above prompt in other languages. Refer to "Recording
User Prompts" in Chapter 6.
If the caller enters an extension number, the VPS transfers him to the specified
extension automatically.
How to Access the Automated Attendant Service
VPS port
Dial a telephone number connected to a VPS port which is assigned to the
Automated Attendant service (see Port Assignment).
Via Custom Service
Press a key which is assigned to the Automated Attendant service (see
Custom Service).
- Dialing the service access command [#] [8] during a call enables the caller to access the
Automated Attendant service whatever service he is in (Service Access Commands).
More
Information
3-4
Dialing by Name
Entering the first three or four letters of the extension owners last name
after pressing [#] [1] also enables the caller to reach his desired extension.
Features
Department Dialing
Choosing an option among the department dialing menu also enables the
caller to reach his desired extension.
Rotary Telephone Service
Callers who are dialing from a rotary phone, or callers who are not familiar
with VPS operation can be automatically transferred to the operator or
General Delivery Mailbox.
System Programming determines which one the caller should be transferred.
Call Transfer Status
The Subscriber (mailbox owner) can specify how the VPS should handle a
call directed to his extension.
Incomplete Call Handling Service
If the called extension is busy or if there is no answer, the caller is offered
several options.
Hold
When the line is busy, the caller has the option of redialing the extension.
S.A.
Incoming Call Service (page 4-38)

Department Dialing (page 4-40) / Operators Parameters (page 4-41)
Dialing Parameters (page 4-65) / Call Hold Parameters (page 4-70)
Rotary Telephone Service (page 4-71)
Intercom Paging Parameter (page 4-71)
PBX Interface Parameters (page 4-78)
Subscriber
Setting the Call Transfer Status (Subscriber's Guide page 5-2)

Setting up a Covering Extension (Subscriber's Guide page 5-3)
Setting the Incomplete Call Handling Status
(Subscriber's Guide page 5-4)
Setting the Message Reception Mode (Subscriber's Guide page 5-6)
Features
3-5

Call Automated
Attendant
Hello, ...
Service
Please enter
the extension
number.
Call Operator
Enter the extension number

1
A regular extension
A logical extension
Call Screening
All deactivated
Record the
callers
name
Intercom
Paging
Call Blocking
Announce
No
Answer
Intercom
Paging
Call a
Beeper
Call a
Beeper
Sorry, no
one is ...
Stephan
Jones.
Record
message
Hello, ..
Talk
Busy
Redial
Hello.

Unanswered
Record
message
Call Operator
Call a
Beeper
Hello, ..
Call Covering
Extension
Intercom
Paging
Another
Extension
Answered
3-6
Features
BC
Broadcasting Messages
Description
Allows the System Manager to deliver an identical message to all of the

Subscribers at the same time. This feature is useful to inform all Subscribers
about current VPS status, such as remaining hard disk capacity, or to request
them to delete unnecessary messages.
Conditions
This feature is available to the System Manager only.
S.M.
Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes (Broadcasting Messages)

(page 5-14)
Busy Coverage Mode

Feature Ref.
Operator Service
Description
Specifies the treatment of calls to the operator when the line is busy.
Available options are:
1.
Hold
The VPS calls the operator again while putting the caller on hold (see
Hold).
2.
No-answer Coverage
The caller is treated with the No-answer Coverage Mode setting (see
No-Answer Coverage Mode).
3.
Call Waiting
The VPS notifies the operator that another call is waiting by using the
Call Waiting feature in the PBX.
4.
Disconnect Message
The caller is disconnected from the VPS after hearing Thank you for
calling.
Conditions
Some PBXs do not support the Call Waiting feature.
S.A.
Busy Coverage Mode (page 4-43)
Callback Number Entry

Feature Ref.
Message Waiting Notification-Device
Description
When the caller records his message in a mailbox, the VPS asks him to enter
his telephone number (Callback number). The number is played when the
Subscriber accesses his mailbox. If the Subscriber receives the message
waiting notification via beeper, the number is displayed on its LCD.
Features
3-7
3
Note:
The callback number is the number which the caller wishes you
to callback.
There are five options in this mode. System Programming specifies one:
(a) Disable:
Deactivates this mode. Notification is made without the
callback number display.
(b) Select:
The VPS asks the caller to enter a callback number only
when the message is specified as urgent.
(c) Before:
The VPS asks the caller to enter a callback number before
message recording.
(d) After:
The VPS asks the caller to enter a callback number after
message recording.
(e) Without:
The VPS asks the caller only for the entry of a callback
number. The caller cannot record a message.
When Busy or No-Answer
The VPS retries notification as many times as specified in Retry Times.
The callback number is displayed on the beeper only for the first set of
retries.
* If the message is recorded at the last moment of a notification time, the notification time
may expire before the VPS starts calling. In this case, the callback number is never
displayed even if it is entered correctly.
Conditions
Only the Subscriber or the Message Manager who is authorized by Class of

Service programming can use this feature.
To use this feature, the following two conditions must be satisfied:
(a) The callback number display code must be included in the beeper
number.
(b) The beeper is activated and it is within the notification time.
To differentiate voice mail callback notification from regular beeper pages,
it may be helpful to prefix the callback number with a one or two digit code
of your choice.
If the caller does not enter a callback number, the VPS displays the system
callback number stored in the VPS.
The VPS starts notification via the beeper immediately after the message
with a callback number is recorded. Even if the VPS is attempting to retry
notification of other messages, the attempt is canceled.
S.A.
Number to Dial (page 4-23)

Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode (page 4-33)
Outgoing Call Ports (page 4-67)
Max. Digits for Callback No. (page 4-67)
Callback No. Entry Interdigit Time-Out (page 4-67)
System Callback No. (page 4-68)
3-8
Features
S.M.
Class of Service No. (page 5-5)

Message Notification Status (page 5-9)
M.M.
Assigning Notification Numbers (page 6-8)
Subscriber
Notification Number Assignment (Subscriber's Guide page 5-15)
Call Blocking
See Call Transfer Status.
Call Screening
See Call Transfer Status.
Call Services
Description
More
Information
Consists of incoming and outgoing call services. Call service control functions
include port assignment and Special Service Authorization.
1
Incoming Call Services

(a) Automated Attendant Service
Routes the call to the desired extension.
(b) Voice Mail Service
Routes the call to the desired mailbox.
(c) Interview Service
Routes the call to an interview mailbox and the caller will hear
questions stored there.
(d) Custom Service
Routes the call to the desired extension or mailbox by going down
the tree-structured custom service menus.
Outgoing Call Services

(a) Message Waiting Notification
Notifies the Subscriber that there are unplayed messages in his
mailbox.
(b) External Message Delivery
Delivers a message to both Subscribers and Non-Subscribers.
Port Service
System Programming determines per port basis with which service the VPS
will answer incoming calls.
Features
3-9

Feature Ref.
Description
The Subscriber can specify how the VPS should handle a call before connecting
it with his extension.
Four options are available: Call Screening, Call Blocking, Intercom Paging
and Calling a Beeper.
Note:
If no option is selected, calls are directly connected with the

Subscribers extension.
In this case, the Subscriber may:

(a) take the call, or
(b) not answer the call, or
(c) be busy with another call.
In any event, the system will take appropriate action.
1. Call Screening
The Subscriber can decide whether or not to take a call by confirming the
callers name beforehand.
If this feature is activated, the caller hears:
Record your name at the tone.
When the call is transferred to the Subscribers extension, the Subscriber
hears:
You have a call from (Name).
To answer the call, press [1].
Otherwise press [2], and hang up.
To accept the call, press [1].

The call is transferred to the Subscribers extension.
To refuse the call, press [2].
The caller hears:
Sorry, no one is available to answer the call.
Then the caller hears Incomplete Call Handling Service menu message (see
Incomplete Call Handling Service).
3-10
Features
2. Call Blocking
The Subscriber can set the VPS to block all incoming calls to his extension.
Sorry, no one is available to answer the call.
The caller then hears the Incomplete Call Handling Service menu message.
3. Intercom Paging
By turning on this feature, the VPS permits callers to page a Subscriber over
the Intercom Paging system of the PBX (see Intercom Paging).
Please hold while I page your party.
Then the VPS pages the Subscriber:

There is a call for <Subscribers Name>.
If answered within 20 seconds (default)*, the caller is connected to his intended

extension:
* This time length can be changed by System Programming. See Intercom Paging Parameter
(page 4-71).
If not, the caller hears:

Sorry, this pager is not available.
The caller then hears the Incomplete Call Handling service menu message.
Note:
4. Calling a Beeper
If this feature is turned on, the VPS asks the caller to enter his telephone
number for callback and prompts to hang up. The VPS will then call the
Subscribers beeper and display the callback number on the LCD (see Callback
Number Entry).
Conditions
This feature is available to the Subscriber only.
Subscriber
Features
3-11
Class of Service
Description
Used to define a set of services available to the Subscriber. Up to 64 different

types of Class of Service can be established by System Programming.
A Class of Service number can be assigned to each mailbox.
Conditions
Class of Service No. 63 is used for the Message Manager and No. 64 is for
the System Manager.
S.A.
Class of Service Number (page 4-21)

Setting COS (Class of Service) Parameters (page 4-27)
S.M.
Company Greetings
Description
Used to greet incoming callers to the VPS.

The Company Greeting is assigned port-by-port and Day/Night basis by the
System Administrator.
If a company greeting is not recorded, the caller hears the following voice
prompt.
Good morning / Good afternoon / Good evening.
Welcome to the Voice Processing System.
Note:
Conditions
A total of 32 different Company Greetings can be recorded by the Message

Manager.
S.A.
Port Assignment Company Greeting No. (page 4-38)

Holiday Setting Company Greeting Number (page 4-60)
M.M.
Recording Company Greetings (page 6-12)
3-12
Features
Covering Extension
Feature Ref.
Description
Used to take a call to the Subscriber while he is not available to answer.

This extension also acts as a personal operator. Pressing [0] while listening
to the personal greeting of the mailbox allows the caller to reach this extension.
This feature also works while recording a message.
This person should be someone who knows the Subscribers whereabouts or
the like.
Conditions
If the Covering Extension is also busy or there is no answer, the caller will
hear the Incomplete Call Handling service menu message arranged by the
Covering Extension.
A desirable Covering Extension must satisfy the following:
(a) Owns a mailbox.
(b) Is not a Logical Extension (see Logical Extension).
(c) Neither the Call Blocking nor Calling a Beeper is set as the Call Transfer
Status (see Call Transfer Status).
S.A.
Covering Extension (page 4-21)
Subscriber

Setting the Incomplete Call Handling Status (Subscriber's Guide page 5-4)
Custom Service
Description
What is Custom Service?

You can program your VPS to route incoming calls as you wish.
When a caller reaches the Custom service, he will hear a menu message as
below.
Ex. Menu Message...
If you wish to speak with our General Manager, press [1].
For other people, press [2].
The caller should press [1] to speak with the General Manager. Then the
VPS connects him to the General Manager. If not, press [2]. Then another
menu message will be heard. This way, the caller can reach their desired
parties by answering up to eight menus.
Features
3-13
How to Access a Custom Service

Dial an extension or telephone number which is connected to the Custom
service port.
Conditions
The VPS accommodates up to 100 menus.

The Message Manager must record Custom service menus in his own voice.
If a menu is not recorded, the prompt Custom Service Menu is played.
Multi-Lingual service is available (see Multi-Lingual Service).
S.A.

Custom Service (page 4-50)
M.M.
Recording Custom Service Menu Messages (page 6-14)
[Programming Example]
As Custom service is so tailored, it is impossible to write all of potential
examples in this manual. We will illustrate a short sample program with
which we will show you how to create a Custom service in the VPS.
Suppose that you are a general manager of a distributor of office automation
machines and tools. Most of your incoming calls are either orders for articles
of consumption or requests for repair service. These calls have been increasing
recently, so you decided to introduce a VPS to handle them instead of hiring
an operator.
You want to transfer the calls for repair service directly to the engineers of
the respective machines so that the caller can directly talk with the person in
charge in detail about the situation of the machine.
On the other hand, you want to use an Interview mailbox to receive calls for
purchase orders. Answering each question is the shortest way for callers to
leave information required for purchase order.
1. Constructing a Tree
First of all, you should create a tree to design how to route incoming calls
to the desired extension or mailbox. The drawing will help you to see the
route at a glance. Please note that the tree should include all the options
among which the caller can choose. The tree should not be deeper than eight
layers.
The next figure shows the tree of the sample program.
You can see the structure of the tree on the display of your terminal using
the Utility Command CREP (see Utility Commands).
3-14
Features

Custom1
Repair or Purchase
Selection
Repair
Purchase
Custom2
Interview
Mailbox
Product
Selection
FAX
FAX
Printer
Printer
Copier
Copier
Other
Other
2. Filling the Worksheet

In each Custom service menu, you can:
(a) assign one of 11 call transfer functions to each key of 0 to 9,
and #. These functions determine where the call should be transferred
next.
(b) define how to handle the call when there is no input. Chapter 4 describes
the details of each parameter.
In addition to mailbox or extension numbers, you can assign another Custom
service menu that contains different options. See Custom 1 in the above
figure. If the caller chooses the repair service order, he will be transferred
into Custom 2 in which he can choose his desired person.
In this way, Custom service will eliminate the need to transfer calls yourself.
Use the worksheet appears at the end of this manual when you specify these
parameters. If you have filled in the worksheet beforehand, the input operations
will go smoother and quicker.
Features
3-15
Worksheets of Sample Program
System Administration Top Menu 1 4 2

Custom
Description
No.
1100
Prompt
Mode
Up to 32
System
alphanumeric User 1
characters
User 2
Menu
Repeat
Cycle
Call
Transfer
Anytime
Wait for
Second
Digit
No DTMF
Input
Operation
1-3
times
Extn.
Mbx
No
1- 5
seconds
a: Transfer
to Mailbox
b: Transfer
to Extension
c: Operator
d: Exit
e: Previous
Menu
f: Custom
Service
Keypad Assignment
a:
b:
c:
d:
e:
f:
g:
h:
i:
j:
k:
l:
m:
n:
Transfer to Mailbox
Transfer to Extension
Operator
Exit
Previous Menu
Custom Service
Voice Mail Service
Call Transfer Service
Subscriber Service
Department Dialing
Dial by Name
Repeat Menu
Main Menu
Fax Transfer
REPAIR OR
PURCHASE
System
Extn.
1: f, 2
4:
7:
:d
2:
5:
8:
0: c
3:
6:
9:
#:
PRODUCT
SELECTION
System
Extn.
1: b, 100
4: b, 103
7:
:d
2: b, 101
5:
8:
0: c
3: b, 102
6:
9:
#:
3. Input the Custom Service Menus

The System Administrator is responsible for the actual input operations of the
Custom service menus.
Fill in the worksheets and enter the values in each parameter referring to your
worksheet.
Note:
3-16
If you set i: Subscriber Service to [ ], the Subscriber can enter the

Subscribers service by pressing [ ] + mailbox number. This is the same
image as in the Voice Mail service.
Features

Custom Service Settings Screen for Sample Program
Custom 1
Program Service Setting Custom Service Setting Custom 1
Description ------------------------------------------------------ : REPAIR OR PURCHASE
:
Prompt Mode (1. Sys 2: User 1 3: User 2) ------ : System

Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3) ---------------------------------- : 3
times
Call Transfer Anytime (Extn. / Mbx / No) ------------ : Extn.
Wait for Second Digit (1-5 seconds) ------------------ : 1
seconds
No DTMF Input Operation (a-f) -------------------------- : c
Keypad Assignment
2: a, mailbox no. 300
3:
1: f, Custom 2
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
:d
0: c
#:
Please choose one of the following functions or services.
a. Transfer to Mailbox
h. Call Transfer Service
b. Transfer to Extension
i. Subscriber Service
c. Operator
j. Department Dialing
d. Exit
k. Dial by Name
e. Previous Menu
l. Repeat Menu
f. Custom Service
m. Main Menu
g. Voice Mail Service
n. Fax Transfer
Custom 2
Description ------------------------------------------------------ : PRODUCT SELECTION
:
Prompt Mode (1. Sys 2: User 1 3: User 2) ------ : System

Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3) ---------------------------------- : 3
times
Wait for Second Digit (1-5 seconds) ------------------ : 1
seconds
Keypad Assignment
1: b, extn. no. 100
2: b, extn. no. 101
3: b, extn.9 no. 102
4: b, extn. no. 103
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
: d
0: c
#:
Please choose one of the following functions or service.
Note:
indicates that menu messages of Custom 2 are recorded by the

Message Manager.
Custom 2
Features
3-17
4. Recording the Menu Messages

Once the System Administrator finishes entering parameters into all of the
menus, next is recording the menu messages.
The menu messages can be the only clue for callers to select an option to
which they are transferred. Considering this, you have to make a menu
message which contains all of the potential options available for the caller.
The recording of menu messages is carried out by the Message Manager.
Access the Message Managers service and choose Recording Custom Service
Menu Messages.
You will hear the following prompt:
Enter the custom service prompt number [1] through [100].
To record custom service exit prompt, press [0].
Enter the menu messages for Custom 1 and Custom 2 as below.

Menu Messages of the Sample Program
Custom
Number
Menu Message
For repair service orders, press [1].

For purchase orders, press [2].
For
For
For
For
facsimiles, press [1].

printers, press [2].
copiers, press [3].
other machines, press [4].
5. Checking the Program

After you finish both entering and recording all menus, it is important to
check your program if there are any problems for the caller. Check if the call
is transferred as you have planned, if there is any menu message that has not
been recorded, and the like. You should check it thoroughly comparing with
the tree or worksheet.
You have to also check if you have assigned the operation for rotary phone
callers.
3-18
Features
Day Service
Description
Sets the parameters, below to handle incoming calls properly during the
respective daytime and nighttime hours.
Company Greeting No. (page 4-38)
Incoming Call Service Prompt (page 4-38)
Delayed Answer Time (page 4-39)
Operators Parameters (page 4-41)
Conditions
These settings are ignored on days specified as holidays. On holidays,

special settings for holidays are provided whole day (see Holiday Service).
S.A.
Day Service (page 4-57)
Daylight Saving Time Assignment

Description
Adjusts the internal clock for the starting and ending day of Daylight Savings
Time.
S.A.
Start Date / End Date (page 4-61)
Department Dialing
Feature Ref.
Description
This is a speed dialing function.

Allows the caller to access his desired extension by simply dialing a one digit
number (19) during or after hearing the Department Dialing menu message.
Conditions
Department Dialing menu message is played to the caller in the following

cases;
When the caller accesses the Automated Attendant service.
When the caller dials [#] [3] during a call (see Service Access Commands).
S.A.
Department Dialing (page 4-40)
M.M.
Recording Department Dialing Menu Messages (page 6-13)
Features
3-19
Dialing by Name
Feature Ref.
Description
Allows the caller to reach the desired extension or mailbox by entering the
first three or four letters of the extension owners last name. The VPS will
play the possible names among the Subscribers and ask the caller if it is the
desired party one after another.
The caller should enter [#] [1] and press the corresponding buttons. For
example, to call Mr. Smith, enter [#] [1] and [7] [6] [4] [8] for [S] [M] [I]
[T].
Each digit of the telephone keypad (touch-tone telephone only) corresponds
to alphabetical characters as follows.
Note:
To enter the letter Q, press [7].

To enter the letter Z, press [9].
Conditions
This feature is not available if the extension owners last name was not
registered by the System Administrator or the System Manager beforehand.
S.A.
Owner Name, Last (page 4-21)
S.M.
Initial 3 or 4 Letters of Subscribers Last Name (page 5-5)
3-20
Features
Direct Mailbox Access (D-PITS Only)

Feature Ref.
Voice Mail Service
Description
Allows the Subscriber to access his mailbox without entering the mailbox
number.
Conditions
The Subscriber must be calling from his extension.

This feature is available only when the D-PITS Voice Mail Integration with
a Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system is activated.
The Subscriber may be asked to enter the correct password.
Class of Service programming determines which extensions this feature is
available on.
S.A.
Direct Mailbox Access (page 4-29)

PBX Type (page 4-79) / Integration Mode (page 4-81)
S.M.
Direct Mailbox Access Status (page 5-9)
D-PITS
Feature Ref.
PBX Integration
Description
Your PBX sends the VPS the information and commands on the calling
extension via D-PITS interfaced data link to help it work more effectively.
Using the information and commands, the VPS can: (a) identify the extension
number of the caller; (b) know where the call is forwarded from and its line
status; (c) recognize what the caller wants to do.
The following features are available only with D-PITS Voice Mail Integration.
Auto Configuration
Direct Mailbox Access
Intercom Paging
Live Call Screening
Two-Way Recording
Conditions
This feature can be activated only when your PBX is a Panasonic KX-TD
series telephone system and the system supports D-PITS Integration.
S.A.
Dialing Parameters (page 4-78)
Features
3-21
Extension Group
Description
A number of extensions can be grouped together as an extension group.

They can own the same mailbox to share the same information.
Up to 20 extension groups can be created in the system and each group can
contain a maximum 20 extensions.
Conditions
A Subscriber cannot have more than one mailbox.

The VPS turns on the Message Waiting Notification Lamp on each extension
when a message is left in the mailbox (see Message Waiting NotificationLamp).
S.A.
Extension Group (page 4-55)
Extension Numbering Plan

Description
Specifies the first one or two digits of the extension numbers in your PBX
so that the VPS can recognize the extension number as a valid one.
Conditions
If a number does not contain the specified figures, the VPS regards it as an
outside number and dials it via a CO line.
S.A.
Extension Numbering Plan (page 4-63)
External Message Delivery List

Feature Ref.
External Message Delivery Service
Description
Allows the Subscriber to deliver an external delivery message to multiple

destinations with a single operation.
Conditions
The Subscriber can maintain up to two lists.

One External Message Delivery List accommodates up to eight entries.
When the Subscriber changes some of the entries in a list, the delivery
programs using the old list is canceled.
Subscriber
Setting up an External Message Delivery List (Subscriber's Guide page

3-4)

Description
3-22
Allows the Subscriber to deliver a message to anyone including the NonSubscriber. The VPS rings the telephone and plays the message directly to
Features
the receiver.
A password can be assigned, if necessary, to protect the message from being
received by some other person. The Subscriber can also specify the date and
time for delivery. Otherwise, the message is delivered immediately after
being recorded.
After listening to the message, the receiver can reply to the Subscriber without
specifying the mailbox number (see Reply to Message Sender).
If the receiver does not have a time to receive the message at that moment,
it is possible to have the VPS call him back later.
When Busy or No Answer
The VPS calls the receiver as many times as specified by Retry Times
Setting.
More
Information
External Message Delivery List

You can send an identical message to several parties with a single operation.
External Message Delivery Status
You can check the distribution status of the external delivery messages,
cancel unnecessary messages and change their settings.
If you are sending your message only to Subscribers, you can send the
message to their mailboxes.
Conditions
This feature is available only to Subscribers.

Class of Service programming determines which Subscriber can use this
feature.
The delivery date should be a date within one month after message recording.
If the receiver fails to enter the correct password within three tries, the VPS
disconnects the line after playing the company telephone number so that the
receiver can make a call later.
If a message has not been delivered within the time tries by Message
Retention Time measured from the delivery date, it is automatically deleted.
S.A

Authorization of External Message Delivery (page 4-34) / Prompt Mode
(page 4-34)
External Message Delivery Parameters (page 4-68)
S.M.
External Message Delivery Status (page 5-10)
Subscriber
Sending External Delivery Messages (Subscriber's Guide page 3-6)
Features
3-23
EF

Feature Ref.
Description
Allows the Subscriber to check distribution status of undelivered and pending

external delivery messages.
Unnecessary messages can be deleted. The settings (destination number,
voice-recorded receivers name, password assignment or delivery schedule)
can also be changed.
The VPS reports the following in a voice announcement.
a) Voice-recorded receivers name
b) Delivery schedule
Conditions
No reports are provided on the messages which have been already delivered
to the destinations.
If the destination of the message is an External Message Delivery List, the
Subscriber can check the status of each respective member.
Subscriber
Checking and Setting External Message Delivery Status (Subscriber's Guide

page 3-7)
Fax Management
Description
When receiving a fax signal (CNG Signaling) from incoming calls, the VPS
has a function to transfer the call automatically to a specified fax machine.
Conditions
Up to two fax machines can be assigned.

If the VPS fails to connect a call to the first fax machine, the call will be
transferred automatically to an alternate one. If notification to the second
machine also fails, the VPS will:
(a) leave a message in the Fax Managers mailbox
(b) call the extension which belongs to Fax Managers mailbox
(c) take no action
- The VPS's action is defined by the Fax No-answer Coverage Mode.
The VPS reports the result to the Fax Manager.

The reports show only how the calls were handled, but do not show whether
the fax messages have been properly received.
S.A.
3-24
Fax Management (page 4-73)
Features
Group Distribution List, Personal

Feature Ref.

Message Transfer
Description
Subscribers may sometimes want to simultaneously send a message to several

mailboxes. These mailboxes can be put together into a list. If the Subscriber
specifies the list as the destination, he can send the same message to one or
more destinations with a single operation.
Conditions
This feature is available only to Subscribers.

Up to four lists can be set up by each Subscriber.
Each list accommodates up to 20 entries.
Subscriber
Entry of Personal Group Distribution Lists

Recording the Names of Personal Group Distribution Lists
Deleting from Personal Group Distribution lists
Group Distribution List, System

Feature Ref.

Message Transfer
Description
Subscribers may sometimes want to simultaneously send a message to several

mailboxes. These mailboxes can be put together into one list.
These lists are set up by the System Administrator and commonly used by all
Subscribers, System Manager and Message Manager in the system.
Conditions
The VPS accommodates up to 20 lists.

Each list accommodates up to 20 entries.
The list number should be the same number of digits as the mailbox number.
S.A.
Mailbox Group (page 4-53)
M.M.
Recording Voice Labels for Mailbox Lists (page 6-15)
Features
3-25
HI
Hold
Feature Ref.
Description
When the specified extension is busy, the caller has the option of holding the
call temporarily. After a short period, the VPS will call the extension again.
If several callers are holding their calls to be connected to the same extension,
they will be connected in the order in which they were received. The VPS
will announce how many people are waiting. For example, Sorry, three
people are waiting to connect. If you would like to hold, press [2].
Conditions
It is possible to deactivate a call hold.

It is possible to deactivate the call queuing announcement.
S.A.
Call Hold Parameters (page 4-70)
Holiday Service
Feature Ref.
Day Service
Description
The VPS will provide another service and Company Greetings on days
specified as holidays.
Conditions
You can program the special service mode for up to 20 holidays.

The System Administrator defines whether the settings are canceled or
maintained after the holiday is over.
This service is effective only for specified ports. On these ports, the Day
service setting is ignored. Other ports provide the usual Day service.
S.A.
Holiday Setting (page 4-58)
Inband
Feature Ref.
PBX Integration
Description
With Inband Integration, the PBX sends certain information to the VPS with
DTMF tone.
Inband Integration can be categorized into the following two types:
(a) Voice Mail Integration
This integration works together with Call Forwarding feature of the
PBX. And you have to set the station hunting type of your PBX to VM
mode.
3-26
Features
(b)
When activated, the PBX sends the digits of the mailbox number of the
called extension with DTMF tone to the VPS before connecting the
caller.
These digits are commonly known as the Follow-on ID.
As a result, the caller who does not know the mailbox number of the
called extension can leave a message.
DTMF tone Integration
This integration works together with Automated Attendant service of
the VPS.
When activated, the PBX informs the VPS of the state of the call (busy,
answered, ringing, etc.) by sending a code with DTMF tone before
sending the normal call progress tone (busy tone, ringback tone, etc.).
These codes enable the VPS to immediately recognize the current state
of the call and improve its call handling performance.
Conditions
Each code must be set in System Programming according to the PBX codes.
If your PBX is a Panasonic KX-T series telephone system, the Inband
Integration codes will automatically default to the proper codes.
S.A.

Inband Signaling Parameters (page 4-83)
Digit Translation Table Parameters (page 4-85)
Features
3-27
[Example of Inband Integration]

Outside Caller
VPS
PBX
Outside Caller
dials Ext. 201
(listening to A.A.)
Outside Caller
VPS
PBX
VPS flashes, dials
Ext. 201
(on hold)
Outside Caller
VPS
PBX
PBX sends
Ringback Code 1
(on hold)
Ext. 201
DIGIT
AL
Pan
ason
ic
(ringing)
Outside Caller
VPS
PBX
PBX sends
Answer Code 5
(on hold)
Ext. 201
DIGIT
AL
Pan
ason
ic
(answers)
Outside Caller
VPS
PBX
VPS tells Ext. 201
You have a call
and disconnects
(talking to Ext. 201)

Ext. 201
DIGIT
AL
Pan
ason
ic
(talking to Outside
Caller)
3-28
Features

Feature Ref.
Description

If a caller specifies an extension which is busy or does not answer, the VPS
will offer the Incomplete Call Handling Service.
The Subscriber specifies options to offer:
1 Leaving a Message
The caller can leave a voice message in the mailbox or the interview mailbox
of the extension (see Message Reception Mode).
- If the extension does not have a mailbox (Non-Subscriber), the caller is transferred to the
General Delivery Mailbox where he can leave a message.
- Check the mailbox capacity regularly to make sure that there is enough area to record
additional messages.
2 Transfer to Covering Extension

See Covering Extension.
3 Returning to the Automated Attendant Top Menu
The caller hears the Automated Attendant initial menu again, and can call
another extension.
4 Intercom Paging
See Call Transfer Status and Intercom Paging.
5 Calling a Beeper
See Call Transfer Status and Callback Number Entry.
6 Calling Operators
See Operator Service.
- If Operator 1 is not available to answer the call, the caller will receive instructions
defined by System Programming (see Busy Coverage Mode/No-answer Coverage Mode).
How the VPS Works

The caller who enters this service will hear the following voice prompt.
(To leave a message, press [1].)
(To reach the covering extension, press [2].)
(To page your party, press [3].)
(To notify your partys beeper, press [4].)
(To call the operator, press [0].)
(To enter another extension, press [
].)
The caller chooses one of these options by pressing a key.
Features
3-29
3
- The prompts in parentheses (
Note:
More
Information

) are heard only when that option is activated.
The above prompt can be recorded in other languages. Refer to "Recording

Hold
In case the line is busy, the caller may hold a call before entering this
service. Then the VPS will call the extension again later on.
Conditions
This feature is available to Subscribers only.

If the specified extension is not a Subscriber, callers will always hear the
following three options.
a) Leaving a message
b) Returning to the Automated Attendant top menu
c) Calling operators
If none of the options is activated, the call will be disconnected.
Subscriber

Intercom Paging (D-PITS Only)

Feature Ref.

Description
Callers can page Subscribers through built-in speakers and external paging
equipment.
Conditions
This feature is available only when the D-PITS Integration with a Panasonic
KX-TD series telephone system is activated.
The VPS must be integrated with your PBX in the specified mode.
Speakers used for paging are determined by System Programming.
S.A.
Intercom Paging Group (page 4-30)

Intercom Paging Parameter (page 4-71)
Integration Mode (page 4-81)
S.M.
Intercom Paging Group Number (page 5-9)
Subscriber

3-30
Features
Interview Service
Description
When a caller accesses this service, a set of questions recorded in the Interview
mailbox is announced to the caller. This service is useful to make inquiries
or to receive repair service orders.
How to Assign the Interview Service
This service can be not only assigned to a VPS port as an independent
service, but also can be used in combination with other services.
1. VPS Port
If you assign an Interview mailbox number to a VPS port, all calls to this port
will be answered by the Interview mailbox and asked the questions stored
there (see Port Service).
2. Voice Mail Service
Callers can directly access the Interview Service by entering an Interview
mailbox number.
3. Automated Attendant Service
Each Subscriber can assign his Interview mailbox to receive the messages
when the Subscriber is unavailable to answer the call (see Incomplete Call
Handling Service "Leaving a Message").
4. Custom Service
An Interview mailbox number can be assigned to a key as the destination of
the call transfer (see Custom Service).
Conditions
Mail box programming determines which Subscriber can own an Interview

mailbox.
The questions are recorded by the Subscriber.
Up to ten questions can be recorded in an Interview mailbox.
S.A.
Interview Mailbox No. (page 4-21)
S.M.
Interview Mailbox No. (page 5-5)
Subscriber
Setting Answer Lengths for the Interview Mailbox

Erasing Questions from the Interview Mailbox
Features
3-31
IL
3
Call Interview Service
and have an Interview
Hello, ....
Please answer the following questions.

Receive a question
Give an answer
Please tell me
your name.
Stephan
Jones
Next
question
Receive a question
What is your
telephone
number ?
Give an answer
473-0922112
Live Call Screening (D-PITS Only)

Description
The Subscriber can decide whether or not to answer a call by monitoring

incoming calls that are being recorded in his mailbox.
There are two modes for this feature:
(a) Hands-Free Mode
When a caller starts to record a message, the callers voice is heard
from the built-in speaker of the telephone; the Subscriber can talk to the
caller by picking up the handset.
(b) Private Mode
When a caller starts to record a message, a notification tone is heard
from the telephone. If the Subscriber goes off-hook, he can monitor the
callers voice. Furthermore, he can talk to the caller by pressing the
feature button. Also, he can stop listening to the message by going onhook.
Conditions
This feature is available only if D-PITS Voice Mail Integration with a

Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system is activated, which provides a
feature button for Live Call Screening.
If the Subscriber answers the call, the VPS stops recording or continues
recording according to the PBX programming (see Live Call Screening
Recording Mode Assignment); when he starts to talk or when he finishes the
conversation. It is possible to cancel the recorded conversation, depending
upon the COS parameter setting.
3-32
Features
LM
S.A.

Message Cancel for Live Call Screening (page 4-29)
S.M.
Message Cancel for Live Call Screening Status (page 5-9)
Subscriber
Live Call Screening (Subscriber's Guide page 2-9)
Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)

Description
A Logical Extension is not a real extension of a PBX. All calls to this type
of extension always land in a mailbox.
Conditions
This feature is useful for the Subscriber who has little opportunity to receive
a call directly because he is often outside his office.
Mailbox Settings programming determines which mailboxes can use this
feature.
S.A.
All Calls Transfer to Mailbox (page 4-22)
S.M.
All Calls Transfer to Mailbox (page 5-5)
Mailbox
Feature Ref.
Voice Mail Service
Description
A mailbox receives messages sent to the Subscriber. Subscribers can also

send messages through the mailbox.
The VPS accommodates up to 1024 mailboxes including the System Managers
mailbox and the Message Managers mailbox.
Subscribers Mailbox
Up to 1022 Subscribers mailboxes can be assigned. The Subscribers mailbox
allows any caller to leave a message and also allows the Subscriber to gain
access to a variety of Subscriber services (see Voice Mail Service).
A Subscribers mailbox may have a sub-mailbox called an Interview mailbox.
- Mailboxes in an extension group can own one mailbox together in order to share the same
information (see Extension Group).
- It is possible to assign a Subscribers mailbox to a person who does not have any extension
of your PBX (see Logical Extension).
Features
3-33
Interview Mailbox
This mailbox is a sub-mailbox of the Subscribers mailbox. To use this
mailbox, the Subscriber needs to get authorization by System Programming.
When a caller accesses this mailbox, a series of questions are asked. He can
leave his answers, responding to each question. These questions will be
recorded by the Subscriber.
The answers are recorded in a string in the associated Subscribers mailbox
and can be received together with other messages.
System Managers Mailbox
This is a special mailbox for the System Manager, who is in charge of the
overall operation of the VPS after it is fully installed and programmed. By
accessing this mailbox, the System Manager performs a variety of System
Manager services (see Voice Mail Service). Any caller, of course, can leave
messages.
Message Managers Mailbox
This is a special mailbox for the Message Manager, who is in charge of
managing the various voice prompts commonly used in the whole system.
By accessing this mailbox, the Message Manager performs a variety of
Message Manager services (see Voice Mail Service). Any caller, of course,
can leave messages.
This mailbox also works as the General Delivery Mailbox.
General Delivery Mailbox
Callers who are not familiar with Voice Mail operation, or who are calling
from rotary telephones are transferred to this mailbox where they can leave
messages. Messages left in this mailbox are received by the Message Manager
and then transferred to an appropriate Subscriber. The General Delivery
Mailbox and the Message Managers mailbox are one and the same.
Creating a Mailbox
The System Administrator or the System Manager creates Subscribers
mailboxes. Usually, the Subscribers extension number is assigned as the
mailbox number.
On the other hand, the System Managers mailbox and the Message Managers
mailbox have been already installed in the VPS at the factory with the
following numbers.
3-34
Number of Digits
System Managers
Mailbox Number
99
999
9999
99999
Message Managers
Mailbox Number
98
998
9998
99998
Features
- Number of Digits is determined by System Programming (see page 7-25). The default
value is set to three digits at the factory.
Mailbox Capacity
The following five parameters determine how many messages one mailbox
accommodates at a time. The System Administrator or the System Manager
sets them according to the Subscribers demand and disk capacity.
Setting
Range
Subscribers System and Message

Mailbox
Managers Mailbox
(default)
(default)
New Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
30
Saved Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
0:Unlimited
30
Max. Length of One 1-6 mins

Message
Maximum Messages 5-100 msgs
10
100
Max. Length of All 5-100 mins

Messages Combined
10
100
- If the Auto Forwarding feature is authorized by System Programming, messages that have
not been heard (New Messages) are automatically transferred to another mailbox after a
specified length of time (see Auto Forwarding).
S.A.
Setting up Mailboxes (page 4-19)

New Message Retention Time (page 4-28)
Saved Message Retention Time (page 4-28)
Message Length (page 4-28)
Mailbox Capacity Maximum Messages (page 4-28)
Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time (page 4-28)
S.M.
Setting up Mailboxes (page 5-4)

New Message Retention Time (page 5-7)
Message Length (page 5-8)
Number of Messages (page 5-8) / Total Message Time (page 5-8)
Mailbox Group
See Group Distribution List, System.
Features
3-35

Description
More
Information
The VPS automatically delivers a single message to multiple mailboxes with

a single operation. As a destination, it is possible to specify a System Group
Distribution List or a Personal Distribution Group List as well as a mailbox
number. The Subscriber can specify the date and time for delivery. Otherwise,
the message is delivered immediately after being recorded. Also the message
can be specified as private to prevent it being transferred to other mailboxes
by the receiving Subscriber.
Private Message
You can specify your message as private.
Group Distribution List, System, Group Distribution List, Personal
You can send an identical message to several Subscribers with a single
operation.
You can check if the message has been already sent to the destination.
You can directly send your message to both Subscribers and Non-Subscribers.
Conditions
This feature is only available to the System Manager and the Subscriber.
Up to 20 mailboxes can be specified as destinations. For example, if a
Personal Distribution Group List which contains eight members has been
already specified, there is room for 12 more mailboxes.
S.M.
Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes (page 5-14)
Subscriber
Delivering Messages to Other Subscribers (Subscriber's Guide page 3-2)

Feature Ref.
Description
Allows the Subscriber to check the delivery status of a message per mailbox
basis. After checking, he can cancel any unnecessary messages.
If the receiving Subscriber has not listened to the message, the VPS reports
the following in a voice announcement.
a) When the message was recorded.
b) Mailbox number of the destination.
c) The message.
If the message has been already listened to, the VPS reports when it is
listened.
3-36
Features
Conditions
Up to 84 message delivery statuses can be stored.

One delivery status is for one recipient (mailbox). When multiple mailboxes,
for example, a Group Distribution List, are specified, each mailbox has a
delivery status.
A message delivery status is automatically erased on condition that:
a) the message was delivered and the Subscriber has listened to its delivery
status.
b) the Subscriber cancels the delivery.
c) when the mailbox already holds 84 delivery statuses. In this case, the
oldest status is erased when a new message is recorded.
-
To keep the oldest delivery status, delete any unnecessary one before sending a new
message.
The Subscriber can erase unnecessary statuses himself.

To cancel a delivery, its delivery status must exist without being erased.
A message which has been already delivered can be canceled only if it has
not been listened to.
As for a Group Distribution List, you can cancel the message delivery on
a mailbox basis.
S.M.
Checking Mailbox Distribution (page 5-15)
Subscriber
Checking Mailbox Distribution (Subscriber's Guide page 3-3)
Message Reception Mode

Description
The Subscriber can specify whether callers are directed to the regular mailbox
or the Interview mailbox when he is unable to take calls.
Subscriber
Setting the Message Reception Mode (Subscriber's Guide page 5-6)
Message Scan
Feature Ref.
Receive Message
Description
The Subscriber can listen to only the first four seconds of each message.
While scanning, pressing the corresponding key allows the Subscriber to
receive the entire message. He can also receive the message recording
information; date and time of recording and message senders name.
Conditions
System Programming determines which Subscriber can receive the message

recording information.
S.A.
Message Scanning with Information (page 4-28)

Features
3-37
S.M.
Message Scanning with Information (page 5-8)
Subscriber
Message Playback Options (Subscriber's Guide Page 2-3)
Message Transfer
Feature Ref.
Receive Message
Description
Allows the Subscriber to transfer a message left in his mailbox to other

mailboxes immediately after listening.
As destinations, one or more mailboxes can be specified. It is possible to put
some comment to the top of the message.
More
Information
Group Distribution List, System, Group Distribution List, Personal

You can transfer a message to several Subscribers with a single operation.
Conditions
This feature is also available to the System Manager and the Message
Manager.
Up to 20 mailboxes can be specified as destinations.
Messages specified as private by the message sender cannot be transferred.
Messages transferred to other mailboxes still remain in the Subscribers
mailbox until the Subscriber erases them himself; or until the Saved Message
Retention Time expires.
S.A.
S.M.
Listening to Messages (page 5-17)
M.M.
Subscriber
Message Transfer (Subscriber's Guide page 2-6)
Message Waiting Notification Device

Description
The VPS notifies the Subscriber that there are messages recorded in his
mailbox. This feature eliminates the need to regularly check the mailbox.
The VPS calls a specified telephone or beeper. If it is a telephone, the VPS
plays the message. If it is a beeper, the callers callback number can be
displayed on its LCD.
3-38
Features
Notification Device
Up to three devices (either a telephone or a beeper) can be assigned as
destinations.
Each device can be on or off for a whole day. Also a notification schedule
can be made for each day of the week. Up to two time frames can be set.
Here is an example of notification using a schedule.
12AM
10 12PM
10 12AM
Dev.1
(Telephone)
Dev.2
(Beeper)
Dev.3
(Telephone)
To set the schedule for Monday, the following System Programming is

required:
Device 1 Parameters
Number to Dial ------------------------------------ | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type --------------------------------------------------- | Telephone
Use Device ----------------------------------------- | Scheduled
Schedule
Day
Mon
Time Frame 1
Start Time
9:00,AM
End Time
12:00,PM
Time Frame 2
Start Time
1:00,PM
End Time
5:00,PM
Device 2 Parameters
Number to Dial ------------------------------------ | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type --------------------------------------------------- | Beeper
Schedule
Day
Mon
Time Frame 1
Start Time
9:00,AM
End Time
7:00,PM
Time Frame 2
Start Time
End Time
Features
3-39
Device 3 Parameters
Number to Dial ------------------------------------ | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type --------------------------------------------------- | Telephone
Schedule
Day
Mon
Time Frame 1
Start Time
7:00,PM
End Time
11:00,PM
Time Frame 2
Start Time
End Time
When Busy or No-Answer

If the Subscriber is unable to answer a call, the VPS keeps calling in the
following manner:
a) Calls the same device as many times as specified in Number of Retries.
b) If the notification to the first device is unsuccessful, then the VPS changes
the destination to the second one. If it is not during the notification time,
the VPS skips the device and calls the third one.
-
If a message is recorded when there is no device available, the VPS extends the notification
until the next available device status.
c) The VPS calls Device 1 through Device 3 in this order.

- The above is also true of beepers. In this case, the VPS keeps calling the beeper until
the Subscriber gains access to the mailbox.
Termination
The notification is terminated, even if unplayed messages still exist in the
mailbox on condition that:
a) the Subscriber gains access to the mailbox.
b) the attempt to the third device fails.
c) the day changes.
-
More
Information
3-40
If the message is recorded at the last moment of a day, it is likely that the day will change
before the VPS starts calling. In this case, no notification will be given even if the
message was recorded properly.
To have all the messages notified, System programming is required (Device Notification
for Unreceived Message).
Callback Number Entry

When the destination is a beeper, you can receive a callback number.
Message Waiting NotificationLamp
You can set the Message Waiting Notification-Lamp at the same time.
When both types of notification are activated at the same time, the VPS will
turn on the lamp first and then call the devices.
Features
Conditions
This feature is also available to the Message Manager.

Class of Service programming determines which Subscriber can use this
feature.
The Subscriber must contact the System Administrator to check the set
schedule.
S.A.
Class of Service Number (page 4-21) / Number to Dial (page 4-23)

Type (page 4-24) / Use Device (page 4-24)
Number of Retries (page 4-24) / Busy Delay (page 4-24)
No Answer Delay (page 4-24) / Time frame 1, 2 (page 4-24)
Authorization of Message Notification (page 4-33)
Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode (page 4-33)
Device Notification for Unreceived Message (page 4-33)
Outgoing Call Ports (page 4-67)
S.M.
M.M.
Setting Notification by Calling Status (page 6-7)
Subscriber
Setting Notification by Calling (Subscriber's Guide page 5-14)
Message Waiting Notification Lamp

Description
The VPS notifies the Subscriber that there are unplayed messages waiting in
the mailbox by illuminating the Message Waiting Lamp on his telephone.
This feature eliminates the need to regularly check the mailbox.
Conditions
This feature is also available to the Message Manager.

Class of Service programming determines which Subscriber can have this
feature.
This feature is available only on telephones which has a Message Waiting
Lamp.
If the mailbox belongs to an Extension Group, the VPS turns on the Message
Waiting Lamp on all the telephones in the group (see Extension Group).
If D-PITS Voice Mail Integration is not activated, make sure that the
following System Programming items of Panasonic KX-TD series telephone
system are completed for this feature:
[114] VM Command DTMF Set-GETMSG= H
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes-Mailbox ID code=Mailbox number
[990] System Additional Information-Field (18)=1
Features
3-41
Once the Subscriber gains access to the VPS to listen to the newly recorded
messages, the Message Waiting Lamp turns off automatically even if some
messages remain unreceived. To keep the lamp illuminated, System
Programming is necessary (Message Waiting Lamp Notification for
Unreceived Messages).
It is possible to set the Message Waiting Notification-Device feature at the
same time. When both types of notification are activated, the VPS will turn
on the lamp first and then call the devices.
S.A.

Authorization of Message Notification (page 4-33)
MWL Notification for Unreceived Message (page 4-33)
Message Waiting Lamp Ports (page 4-67)
Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message (page 4-67)
S.M.
M.M.
Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status (page 6-7)
Subscriber
Message Waiting Lamp Notification Setting

Multi-Lingual Service
Description
Callers can hear the voice prompts in one of the three languages which the
VPS supports.
Prompt Options
The VPS supports three prompt options:
System prompt: English (recorded at the factory)
User 1 prompt: another language (recorded by the Message Manager)
User 2 prompt: another language (recorded by the Message Manager)
In addition, setting the prompt mode to Selective enables the callers to
select a desired language from the three. They will hear the Selection Menu
first:
Ex. Selection menu
For English, press [7].
For French, press [8].
For Chinese, press [9].
-
3-42
Features
Callers from a rotary telephone cannot specify the language. System Programming
determines the prompt mode for them.
Conditions
The Message Manager records User 1 and User 2 prompts. If some prompts
have not been recorded, corresponding System prompts will be played
instead.
The Selection Menu should be recorded by the Message Manager in the
appropriate language.
In incoming call service, the prompt mode selected in one service will be
passed on to another service which the caller may enter. For example, if
the caller enters the Automated Attendant service from the Voice Mail
service by using the Service Access Command [#] [8], the prompts are
played in the same language as in the Voice Mail service.
Prompt Mode Setting for Incoming and Outgoing Services
In incoming call services, basically the port setting is valid. In some services,
however, additional settings which replace the port setting are required. Some
services also do not support the Multi-Lingual service itself.
In outgoing call services, there is no port setting. Prompt mode should be
specified on a COS basis.
Valid Setting
COS
Setting
(Prompt
Mode)
COS
Authorization
(Prompt For
External
Message
Delivery)
Custom
(Prompt
Mode)
System
Manager
Only System Prompt provided.
Message
Manager
Only System Prompt provided.
NonSubscriber
Subscriber
Automated Attendant
Service
Interview Service *1
Questions must be recorded

separately.
Custom Service *2
Menu Messages must be

recorded appropriately.
External Message
Delivery
Message Waiting
Notification
Voice
Mail
Service
Incoming
Services
Outgoing
Services
Remarks
Port
(Incoming
Call
Service
Prompt)
Personal Greeting must be

recorded separately.
= Valid setting
Features
3-43
Available Prompt Options

System
User 1
User 2
Selective
System
Manager
Message
Manager
NonSubscriber
Subscriber
Automated Attendant
Service
Interview Service
Custom Service
External Message
Delivery
Message Waiting
Notification
Valid Setting
Voice
Mail
Service
Incoming
Services
Outgoing
Services
= an available option
*1 In the Interview service, no voice prompt is played. Callers will only hear the questions
recorded by the Subscriber. To utilize the Multi-Lingual service, the Subscriber must
record the questions in the appropriate language.
2
* In the Custom service, each Custom service menu has its own prompt mode. The menu
messages should be recorded separately in the appropriate language. See below.
Ex. Menu Message

If you wish to speak with Mr. Stephan Jones, press [1].
If with Ms. Sally Williams, press [2].
Supporting the Multi-Lingual Service in the Custom Service

Custom 1 acts as a language selection menu where the caller selects the
language he wishes to hear.
For example, to provide bilingual service in English and Spanish, record the
menu message of Custom 1 in English or Spanish as follows.
3-44
Features

Ex. Custom 1 Menu Message for Bilingual Service
For Spanish, press [8].
Then create the tree as below:

Custom 1
Prompt Mode: System or User 1
8
Custom 2
Custom 3
Prompt Mode : System
Prompt Mode : User 1
English Service
Spanish Service
In Custom 1, set the prompt mode to System (English) or User 1 (Spanish)

In Custom 2, record the message menu in English and also set the prompt
mode to System (English). Create subsequent menus in this manner.
In Custom 3, record the message menu that has the same options as Custom
2 in Spanish and also set the prompt mode to User 1 (Spanish). Create
subsequent menus in this manner.
S.A.
Class of Service Setting Prompt Mode (page 4-30)

Special Feature Authorization Prompt Mode (page 4-34)
Custom Service Prompt Mode (page 4-51)
Prompt Setting (page 4-62)
S.M.
Subscriber Service Prompt Mode (page 5-9)
M.M.
Recording Company Messages (page 6-12)
Subscriber
Recording Personal Greetings (Subscriber's Guide page 5-7)

Features
3-45
NO
No-Answer Coverage Mode

Feature Ref.
Operator Service
Description
Specifies how to handle a call when the Operator does not answer it within
Operator No-Answer Time.
Available options are:
1 Caller Select
The caller can choose one of the following two options.
(a) Leave a message
(b) Call another extension
2 Leave Message
The caller can leave a message in the mailbox of Operator 1.
3 Disconnect Message
The caller is disconnected from the VPS after hearing Thank you for calling.
4 Next Operator
The caller is transferred to the extension of Operator 2.
The factory setting is Caller Select.
Conditions
Next Operator cannot be set for Operator 3.
S.A.
No-answer Coverage Mode (page 4-47)
Operator
Service
Description
Up to three operators can be assigned to help callers reach their desired

extension. Three other operators can be assigned in the night mode.
More
Information
3-46
Busy Coverage Mode, No-Answer Coverage Mode

When the line is busy or there is no answer, the call should be handled by
the Busy Coverage Mode or No-Answer Coverage Mode.
Features
OP

Operator Call Coverage
Busy
Options
Hold
Hold
Waiting
Disconnect
Use
No-answer
No-answer Caller
Options
Select
Leave
Message
Disconnect
Next
Operator
Busy
Options
Hold
Hold
Waiting
Disconnect
Use
No-answer
No-answer Caller
Options
Select
Leave
Message
Disconnect
Next
Operator
Busy
Options
Hold
Hold
Waiting
Disconnect
Use
No-answer
No-answer Caller
Options
Select
Leave
Message
Disconnect
Operator 1
Operator 2
Operator 3
* Lets the caller choose whether to leave his message or to try another extension.
Conditions
System Programming or the Message Manager determines the operators

extension number.
Usually, the Message Manager is assigned as Operator 1.
This service can be deactivated by System Programming and operator-seeking
calls are transferred to the General Delivery Mailbox.
S.A.
M.M.
Operators Extensions (page 6-10)
PBX
Integration
Description
The VPS works well with all Panasonic KX-T series PBXs and it can be
programmed to work with most other manufacturers PBXs that fully support
single line telephone interfaces.
However, since both the VPS and PBX are independent systems, Integration
with the PBX is necessary to make the two systems work more closely.
Features
3-47
Without Integration, both systems will work separately without knowing the
status of the other system.
One of the following two types of Integration is available between the VPS
and PBX, if your PBX supports Integration feature.
(a) Inband Integration
The PBX sends the VPS several codes with DTMF tone via speech
path (see Inband).
(b) D-PITS Integration
The PBX sends the VPS information over the data link (see D-PITS).
Conditions
System Programming determines the Integration type.
S.A.
Personal Greetings
Description
The Subscriber can record personal greeting messages, if necessary, with

their own voice for callers who enter the mailbox. Personal Greetings can be
categorized into the following three types:
(a) No-Answer
played during business hours
(b) Busy
played whenever the line is busy
(c) After Hours
played outside of business hours
The No-answer greeting is also played:
(a) when the caller accesses the mailbox directly
(b) when the Busy or the After Hours greeting has not been recorded.
More
Information
Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting

The Guidance for Recording in System Prompt can be played for the caller
to instruct them how to record a message.
S.A.
Personal Greeting Length (page 4-28)
S.M.
Personal Greeting Length (page 5-7)
Subscriber
Recording Personal Greetings (Subscriber's Guide page 5-7)
3-48
Features
Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting

Feature Ref.
Personal Greeting
Description
Specifies whether or not Guidance for Recording is played to the caller after
the Personal Greeting.
Guidance for Recording is:
To end recording, hang up or press [1] for more features.
To pause and restart recording, press [2].
Note:
The above prompt can be recorded in other languages. Refer to "Recording

Conditions
If a Personal Greeting is not recorded, Guidance for Recording is always

played to the caller before recording.
S.A.
Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting (page 4-29)
S.M.
Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting Status (page 5-8)
Port Service
Feature Ref.
Call Services
Description
One of the incoming call services can be assigned to each port.

A maximum of eight ports are available for TVP200.
Also a Company Greeting number, prompt mode and delayed answer time
can be set by respective ports.
More
Information
Incoming Call Service

The VPS has the following four services to answer incoming calls.
1 Voice Mail Service
2 Automated Attendant Service
3 Interview Service
-
Custom Service
-
S.A.
A Subscribers interview mailbox can be assigned to the port.

A Custom service will be assigned to the port.
Port Assignment (page 4-37)

Features
3-49
PR
Private Message
Feature Ref.
Message Transfer
Description
Allows the Subscriber to specify the sending message as private. Once it is

specified, then the receiving Subscriber cannot transfer it to other mailboxes.
Conditions
Messages can be specified as private only by the Message Delivery, Internal

feature.
Subscriber
Message Transfer (Subscriber's Guide page 2-6)

Delivering Messages to Other Subscribers (Subscriber's Guide page 3-2)
Receive Message
Description
More
Information
All Subscribers, System Manager and Message Manager can listen to the
messages left in their mailboxes.

After listening to a message, the Subscriber can reply to the sender without
specifying the extension.
Message Transfer
After listening to a message, the Subscriber can transfer it to other mailboxes.
Message Scan
Subscribers can listen to the first four seconds of each message.
S.A.
Message Retrieval Order (page 4-28)
S.M.
Message Retrieval Order (page 5-8)

M.M.
Subscriber
Receiving Messages (Subscriber's Guide page 2-2)
3-50
Features
Record Message
Description
More
Information
Subscriber
Any caller who accesses the Voice Mail service can record a message in a
mailbox; System Managers mailbox, Message Managers mailbox or
Subscribers mailbox including an Interview mailbox.

For callers with a rotary telephone, the General Delivery Mailbox is provided
to leave a message.
Two-Way Recording
The Subscriber can record the conversation in his mailbox.
Recording Messages (for any caller) (Subscriber's Guide page 4-2)
Recording Messages (from a rotary telephone)

Feature Ref.
Receive Message
Description
The Subscriber can reply to a message sender in two ways:

(a)
Send a message to the senders mailbox.
(b)
Call the senders extension.
In both cases, the Subscriber does not have to specify the senders mailbox
or extension. The date and time for reply can be also specified.
Conditions
This feature is available to the Subscribers, the System Manager and the
Message Manager.
There are four possible situations which can utilize this feature;
(a) When messages are transferred or delivered via other Subscribers
mailboxes. (Message Delivery, Internal, Message Transfer)
(b) * When messages are left by a Subscriber who entered the VPS from
his extension to access the intended mailbox.
If Direct Mailbox Access of COS is set to No, this feature is
available. If set to Yes, the Subscriber will be directly connected
to his own mailbox when entering the VPS (see Direct Mailbox
Access).
(c) * When messages are left by a Subscriber who called from his extension
and was forwarded to the VPS.
(d) When messages are delivered via the External Message Delivery
service, but the recipient can only leave an immediate reply in the
senders mailbox (see External Message Delivery Service).
Features
3-51
RS
* To use these features, your PBX must be one of the Panasonic KX-TD series telephone
systems and the D-PITS Voice Mail Integration is activated.
Subscriber
Replying to Messages (Subscriber's Guide page 2-5)

Replying to External Delivery Messages (Subscriber's Guide page 4-5)

Feature Ref.
Description
The VPS will provide guidance to callers using rotary telephones. These
callers are automatically directed to either the operators extension or to the
General Delivery Mailbox in Automated Attendant service.
Conditions
This service is also available to callers who do not enter anything during
the first few seconds because they are unfamiliar with the VPS.
The System Administrator needs to define guidance for daytime and
nighttime respectively.
When the operator is not available to answer a call, the call is treated by
the operators coverage mode (see Operator Service).
When calls from rotary telephones enter a Custom service, they are treated
according to the System Programming of Custom service.
When calls from rotary telephones enter Voice Mail service, they can leave
messages in the General Delivery Mailbox.
S.A.
M.M.
Managing the General Delivery Mailbox (page 6-5)
Subscriber
Recording Messages (from a rotary phone)


No DTMF Input Operation (page 4-51)
Rotary Telephone Service (page 4-71)
Selection Menu
See Multi-Lingual Service.
3-52
Features
Service Access Commands

Description
Entering the following commands allows the caller to directly access the
respective features.
[0]
repeat the Help menu (to call the operator for the caller)
[ ]
back up
[#] [1] dial by name
[#] [3] Department Dialing
[#] [5] Log in
[#] [6] Voice Mail service
[#] [7] restart (Subscribers main command)
[#] [8] Automated Attendant service (call transfer)
[#] [9] exit the menu
Conditions
They cannot be used in cases where functions have been assigned to each
number, or when [#] is necessary to enter the specified parameters such as
date or time.
Subscriber
Accessing VPS Services (Subscriber's Guide page 1-3)
Special Feature Authorization

Description
Determines whether or not to allow a Subscriber to use the following special

features.
Auto Forwarding
Conditions
All of the features are deactivated when a new mailbox is created.
S.A.
Special Feature Authorization (page 4-32)
S.M.
Features
3-53
System Clock
Description
More
Information
When a new VPS is installed, it is necessary to set the date and time. It is
important to set the exact time as some of the essential features of the VPS
such as the Message Waiting Notification, External Message Delivery,
Automatic Message Deletion are scheduled according to this setting.

The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight
savings time begins and when it ends.
Conditions
The System Administrator, System Manager or Message Manager can set

the clock. (Only one at the time can access the feature.)
S.A.
Set Time (TIME) (page 7-4)
S.M.
Setting the System Clock (page 5-11)
M.M.
Setting the System Clock (page 6-11)
System Reports
Description
The System Administrator can provide eight types of system reports to help
monitor the VPS operating status. The reports can be sent out via the RS232C port to a printer or a terminal. The following eight report options are
available:
Mailbox Assignments
This report provides information about authorized features for each mailbox,
and current settings for mailbox parameters.
COS (Class of Service) Assignments
This report provides all information on the Class of Service.
This report provides information about the usable ports of the VPS. It also
indicates the services assigned to each VPS port for Day, Night and Holiday
modes, and the incoming and outgoing call services.
Call Account Report
The VPS can maintain information on up to 80 outgoing call sequences for
the call account.
3-54
Features
ST
Port Usage Report

This report provides information about port usage and allows you to measure
traffic on the system and ports.
Disk Usage Report
This report indicates the amount of disk storage in use and availability in
minutes.
This report provides information about the usage of a specific mailbox.
Fax Call Report
This report provides information about the fax transfer status when the VPS
receives a fax signal.
S.A.
System Reports (page 7-17)
S.M.
Obtaining System Reports (page 5-12)
Two-Way Recording (D-PITS Only)

Feature Ref.
Record Message
Description
The Subscriber can record a conversation in his own mailbox or other

Subscribers mailboxes while talking on the phone. A beep sounds every
sixteen seconds during recording.
Conditions
This feature is available only if D-PITS Voice Mail Integration with a

Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system is activated, which provides a
feature button for Two-Way Recording.
When the Subscriber records his Two-Way telephone conversation, he should
inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded.
To record a conversation, press the feature button of the Proprietary
Telephone of the PBX. To record the conversation in another Subscribers
mailbox, enter its mailbox number besides the feature button.
S.A.
Subscriber
Recording a Two-Way Conversation (Subscriber's Guide page 2-10)
Features
3-55
UV
Utility Commands
Description
Allows the System Administrator to access the functions described below by

entering the appropriate command at the $ prompt.
OFLN....... Sets the System to off-line mode (OFF)
ONLN ...... Sets the System to on-line mode (ON)
PASS ....... Sets the System Administrators password and System Reset/
Clear password
TIME. ...... Sets the system clock (date and time)
PSET ........ Specifies the reports printing time
ELOG ...... Displays device error log
SAVE....... Stores a backup of the program or data on the hard disk
LOAD ...... Restores a backup of the program or data to the system
GPRN ...... Displays all of the VPS parameters
VERS ....... Displays the version of the hard disk, main ROM and Port
card
CREP ....... Displays current settings of a Custom service menu
CCLR....... Clears the access count of a Custom service menu
MWL ....... Sets the retry count of Message Waiting Lamp
MRL ........ Sets the minimum recording length of a message
MPLT ...... Displays the user prompt recording status
HELP ....... Lists utility command names
QSET ....... Sets up the VPS so you can use it quickly
LMON ..... Line Monitor
PUTD....... Display DTMF Information
S.A.
Utility Commands (page 7-2)
Voice Mail Service

Description
This service is a message taking service, which allows the Non-Subscriber to

leave a message in the mailbox of the Subscriber, System Manager or Message
Manager.
In addition, the mailbox owner (Subscriber, System Manager and Message
Manager) performs a variety of special services by accessing the mailbox.
Subscriber Service
Supports a variety of voice messaging services unique to the Subscriber by
accessing his own mailbox.
The Subscriber can listen to the recorded messages or deliver messages to the
Subscriber or Non-Subscriber.
In addition, various settings required for receiving calls and messages
effectively can be performed.
3-56
Features
Receiving Messages
Delivering Messages to Mailboxes
Setting Message Waiting Notification
Setting External Message Delivery
Setting the Automated Attendant Status
Interview Mailbox Management
Setting Password
Recording Personal Greeting
System Manager Service

The System Manager takes care of coordinating the VPS to ensure that it
operates efficiently and effectively.
He performs a whole range of functions by using any touch-tone telephone.
These include daily maintenance, the creation and editing of mailboxes in
response to requests from Subscribers, and the deletion of unneeded mailboxes
to prevent the systems storage capacity from overloading.
Creating Subscribers Mailboxes
Setting the Class of Service
Delivering Broadcasting Messages
Obtaining the System Reports
Receiving Messages
Delivering Messages to Mailboxes
Setting Password
Message Manager Service
Supports a variety of message recording services unique to the Message
Manager by accessing the Message Managers mailbox.
The Message Manager takes care of the General Delivery Mailbox, recording
Company Greetings, and voice prompts by accessing the Message Managers
mailbox.
Recording Company Greetings and Voice Prompts
General Delivery Mailbox Management
Receiving Messages
Setting Password
Setting Message Waiting Notification
How to Access the Voice Mail Service
1. Voice Mail Port
This service can be assigned independently to VPS ports as an incoming call
service (see Port Assignment). This means that dialing an extension or
telephone number of this port allows the caller to directly access this service.
Features
3-57
2. Service Access Command

Dial [#] [6] during a call. The caller then can access Voice Mail service
regardless of the current accessing service (see Service Access Command).
3. Via Custom Service
This service can be assigned to the keypad as the call transfer destination.
More
Information

The Subscriber can access his own mailbox by simply calling the extension
number assigned to Voice Mail service.
Callers who are dialing from a rotary phone, or callers who are not familiar
with VPS operation can be automatically transferred to the operator or
System Programming determines which one the caller should be transferred.
Voice Prompts
Description
The VPS tells callers in a voice prompt what they should do next.
Ex. Voice Prompt
Please enter your partys extension.
Prompt Options
System prompt
User 1 prompt
User 2 prompt
recorded in English at the factory

to be recorded by the Message Manager
to be recorded by the Message Manager
By recording User 1 or User 2 prompt in other languages, Multi-Lingual

service is available in the VPS.
These user prompts can also be used when you want to modify some phrases
in the System prompt.
Recording User 1 and User 2 Prompts
The Message Manager records User 1 and User 2 prompts via telephone. If
some prompts are not recorded, the system prompts are played instead.
Linked Prompts
Some prompts link together and are played as if they were one prompt. For
example, the following announcement consists of two prompts:
3-58
Features

(prompt 315) Good morning.
(prompt 316) Welcome to the Voice Processing System.
Turning off a Prompt

Note the word order of your language. Direct translation may sometimes
cause errors. In the following prompt, (date), (time) and (mailbox number)
are always played at the end.
(Prompt 538) Message recorded on (date)
(prompt 248) at (time)
(prompt 249) for (mailbox number)
(prompt 418) has not been received.
Turn unnecessary prompts off. If at (248) and for (249) in the above are
turned off, the caller will hear:
(Prompt 538) Message recorded on (date)
(prompt 248) (time)
(prompt 249) (mailbox number)
(prompt 418) has not been received.
Chapter 6 lists the table of the linked prompts with other modifiable prompts.
Conditions
Only the System prompt (English) is available to the System Manager and
the Message Manager (see Multi-Lingual Service).
S.A.
S.M.
Subscriber Service Prompt Mode (page 5-9)
M.M.
Recording Company Messages (page 6-12)
Class of Service Setting Prompt Mode (page 4-30)

Custom Service Prompt Mode (page 4-51)
Modified Prompt List (MPLT) (page 7-13)
Features
3-59
Chapter 4
System Administrators Guide
This chapter explains the System Administrators function and
provides step-by-step instructions for system setup tasks
such as setting up mailboxes, setting system parameters and
running reports.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Contents
System Administrators Function .......................
Using the Interface ...............................................
4.2.1 Keyboard Operation ......................................
4.2.2 Programming Guidance ................................
Startup System......................................................
4.3.1 Quick Setup...................................................
Programming Menu Structure Diagram ...........
Programming the System Parameters................
4.5.1 Setting up Mailboxes .....................................
4.5.1.1 Creating and Editing Mailboxes .......
4.5.1.2 Deleting a Mailbox ...........................
4.5.1.3 Resetting a Mailbox Password .........
4.5.1.4 Listing Mailboxes .............................
4.5.2 Setting COS (Class of Service) Parameters ..
4.5.2.1 Class of Service Setting ....................
4.5.2.2 Special Feature Authorization ..........
4.5.3 Port Service ...................................................
4.5.3.1 Port Assignment ...............................
4.5.4 Service Settings .............................................
4.5.4.1 Automated Attendant Parameters .....
4.5.4.2 Custom Service .................................
4.5.5 System Parameter Settings ............................
4.5.5.1 System Group Assignment ...............
4.5.5.2 Day Service ......................................
4.5.5.3 Holiday Setting .................................
4.5.5.4 Daylight Saving Time .......................
4.5.5.5 Prompt Setting ..................................
4.5.5.6 Other Parameters ..............................
4.5.6 Hardware Settings .........................................
4.5.6.1 RS-232C Parameters ........................
4.5.6.2 Port Setting .......................................
4.5.6.3 PBX Interface Parameters ................
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-8
4-16
4-18
4-19
4-19
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-32
4-37
4-37
4-40
4-40
4-50
4-53
4-53
4-57
4-58
4-61
4-62
4-63
4-76
4-76
4-77
4-78
4.1
System Administrators Function

As System Administrator of the VPS, you primarily take care of the operational
characteristics of the entire system. You can set up system parameters, administrate
the parameters, or diagnose the system using an interactive screen-based program.
System administration can be done by selecting one of the following options from
the System Administration Top Menu screen below.
System Administration Top Menu
1. Program
2. System Reports
3. Utility Command
4. System Reset / Clear
5. Quick Setup
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS RETURNKEY
Notes:
5. Quick Setup in the above screen does not appear in the ASCII
TERMINAL mode.
You may exit and return to the previous screen by pressing [ ].
In this Chapter 4, if you want to clear the programming value of any
parameter, press the Back Space key. (Some settings cannot be
cleared as pertaining to the specification.)
4-2
1.
Program
If you need to program the system parameters, see Programming the System
Parameters in this Chapter.
2.
System Reports
If you need to monitor the VPS operation status, see System Reports in Chapter
7.
3.
Utility Command
If you need to turn on/off the call progressing mode of the VPS, or to make a
backup copy of system data, see Utility Commands in Chapter 7.
4.1
System Administrators Function
4.
System Reset/Clear
If you need to reprogram the system, see Initializing the System in Chapter 7.
5.
Quick Setup
If you are programming the system for the first time, we recommend you to employ
the Quick Setup first.
It provides you with a quick way of mailbox creation, incoming call service
assignment for all ports, time setting and so on. See page 4-8.
Especially, if you have a Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system with D-PITS
Voice Mail Integration, the Quick Setup will be completed at the same time you
start up the system (see page 4-6). Make sure the following conditions are
satisfied:
The rotary switch is set to 2 or 3 before turning on the power switch of the
system. See page 2-6.
The VPS is connected to extension port of your PBX. See page 2-12.
The port has to be assigned as Voice Mail port beforehand.
When prompted by instructions on the programming screen, set the rotary switch
to 0.
4-3
4.2
4.2.1
Using the Interface

Keyboard Operation
System Administration can be done using the VT100 or Compatible Terminals, or
other RS-232C Terminals (ASCII Terminals).
Screen display and keyboard operation may differ depending on the data terminal
you use.
VT100 or Compatible Terminals

You can choose an option either by:
moving the cursor to the desired option, then press [RETURN].
or
entering the corresponding key number directly, then press [RETURN].
Key
Functions
Moves the cursor to the previous line
Moves the cursor to the next line
Moves the cursor to the right
Moves the cursor to the left
[1] [9]
[RETURN]
[ ]
Directly moves the cursor to the specified number

Selects reversed item
Exits the current screen and returns to the previous step in the
menu
Other RS-232C Terminals (ASCII Terminals)

You can choose an option by entering the corresponding key number directly, then
press [RETURN].
Key
[1] [9], then [RETURN]
[ ]
4-4
Functions
Selects item from the menu on the screen
Exits the current screen and returns to the previous step in the
menu
4.2
4.2.2
Using the Interface

Programming Guidance
On top of each screen display in this manual, you will find a programming guidance
indicated by the arrow in the example below. This helps you locate the desired
programming screen quickly.
(Example)
System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 1
Program Port Service Port1 Day Mode Menu
Company Greeting No. (1-32) ----------------------------------Incoming Call Service ----------------------------------------------Incoming Call Service Prompt ----------------------------------Delayed Answer Time (0-15 sec) -------------------------------
:
:
:
:
. .
Auto. Attn.
User 1
0
System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 1 means the following steps:

1. Press [1] in the System Administration Top Menu.
You will see the next menu.
2. Press [3] and [RETURN].
Port 1 Day Mode Menu will be displayed on the terminal.
4-5
4.3
Startup System
To start the VPS operation, system installation and line
connections must be done beforehand. See Chapter 2.
Status of the
Power Indicator
Turn on the POWER switch of the VPS.
System Setup is started and the display shows:

CARD TEST . . .
SYSTEM SETUP . . .
1. .
2. .
3. .
When System Setup is completed successfully, the display

shows:
(In D-PITS Integration mode)
Active COs : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DPITS Interface Connection is Established
** ON LINE MODE **
>
(In non-D-PITS Integration mode)

Active COs : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
** ON LINE MODE **
>
If System Setup is not completed successfully

(In D-PITS Integration mode)
Active COs : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DPITS Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
>
Note:
4-6
Active COs in the above screens means Active Ports.
4.3
Startup System
Note:
This message is shown on the terminal when D-PITS

communication between the VPS and a Panasonic KX-TD
series telephone system is not made.
In this case, turn off the VPS and start it again after
confirming the line connections and the required
programming.
(In non-D-PITS Integration mode)
** OFF LINE MODE **
>
Press [RETURN].
Please Select Your Terminal Type.

1. ASCII TERMINAL
2. VT100
Please Enter the Number :=
Press [1] or [2] to specify the RS-232C terminal type.

1
2
3
4
5
:
:
:
:
:
Program
System Reports
Utility Command
System Reset/Clear
Quick Setup
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS RETURN-KEY
Note:
5: Quick Setup in the above screen does not appear in the

ASCII TERMINAL mode.
4-7
4.3.1 Quick Setup

Quick Setup provides a quick way of system setup. You must initially set the
following programming items to start the VPS operation.
1. PBX Type
2. Extension numbers of VPS ports
3. Extension numbers for mailboxes
4. Creating Mailboxes
5. Port Service Setting
6. Password Setting
7. Date and Time Setting
8. Activating the Quick Setup
Depending on your PBX type, some steps can be skipped as shown below.
PBX Type
Required Procedures
KX-T308/T616
1 2
KX-T1232/T96/T336, non-Panasonic system
KX-TD816/1232
Starting the Quick Setup

At the System Administration Top Menu, type 5 and press [RETURN]. (Only
available in the VT100 mode)
System Administration Top Menu 5
Quick Setup Utility for connection to Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems
This utility provides a quick way of programing the Voice Processing System
to operate in a standard automated attendant or voice mail configuration when
connected to a Panasonic KX-T series telephone system. The system will prompt
you to enter, modify or confirm settings based upon which PBX type you select.
By entering the appropriate information in the following screens, the system
sets PBX integration parameters, identifies the extension numbers connected
to it, creates default mailboxes, sets its ports to handle callers with
automated attendant or voice mail service, sets system passwords and sets
the time and date. Finally, it confirms that you want to activate the system
based on the information you entered, modified or confirmed.
To proceed, press Enter. To exit and cancel Quick Setup now, press \ .
Note:
4-8
Utility Command QSET is also available for starting the Quick Setup.
See page 7-14.
4.3.1 Quick Setup

Step 1. PBX type
After pressing [RETURN] (Enter), the screen shows:
Quick Setup PBX type
Please select your PBX type.
1. KX-T308
2. KX-T616
3. KX-T1232
4. KX-T96
5. KX-T336
6. KX-TD816
7. KX-TD1232
8. OTHERS
Select your PBX type, and you may go to Step 2, 3 or 4 depending on your selection
as shown below.
1. KX-T308 2. KX-T616
3. KX-T1232 4. KX-T96 5. KX-T336
6. KX-TD816 7. KX-TD1232
Note:
Go to Step 2.
Go to Step 3.
Go to Step 4.
8. Others
D-PITS Voice Mail Integration will be activated automatically by

selecting 6. KX-TD816 or 7. KX-TD1232. However, if D-PITS
Voice Mail Integration is not supported with your KX-TD series
telephone system, you have to program the integration mode to None
or Inband before the Quick Setup (see page 4-81). After selecting
your PBX type here, you will go to Step 3.
Step 2. Extension numbers of VPS ports

Quick Setup Enter extension number of VPS Port
Please enter extension number of VPS.
1:
4:
7:
10:
2:
5:
8:
11:
3:
6:
9:
12:
Please enter extension numbers.

(2 digits) : =
S: Next Screen
4-9
4.3.1 Quick Setup

Enter extension numbers of VPS ports with 2-digit numeric characters.
By this programming, the VPS performance with the KX-T308 or KX-T616 is
improved as the VPS can discriminate between VPS extensions and non-VPS
extensions.
Type S to go to the next screen.
Note:
Max.8 of VPS port 1-12 is available at a time.

Refer to 2.2.3 Extension Connection (page 2-14).
Step 3. Extension numbers for mailboxes

Quick Setup Enter Extensions for Mailboxes
What extensions need a mailbox on this system?
1:
6:
11:
16:
21:
26:
31:
36:
41:
46:
51:
56:
61:
2:
7:
12:
17:
22:
27:
32:
37:
42:
47:
52:
57:
62:
3:
8:
13:
18:
23:
28:
33:
38:
43:
48:
53:
58:
63:
4:
9:
14:
19:
24:
29:
34:
39:
44:
49:
54:
59:
64:
5:
10:
15:
20:
25:
30:
35:
40:
45:
50:
55:
60:
Please enter extension numbers.

: =
P: Previous menu, N: Next menu, S: Next Screen
Enter extension numbers of persons who need a personal mailbox (Subscriber

mailbox) with 2 to 5 digits. For example, to enter the extension number 101, enter
101 and press [RETURN]. Also you can enter the extensions from No. 101 to
No. 110 by entering 101-110 and [RETURN].
The VPS will create the mailboxes that have the same numbers as the extension
numbers (see Step 4).
Notes:
4-10
The VPS accepts extension numbers with different lengths within

2 to 5-digit range.
Up to 1022 extension numbers can be entered.
4.3.1 Quick Setup

Step 4. Creating mailboxes
Quick Setup Mailbox Editing
Extension and mailbox list
Assigned 64
EXTN.

210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
(Last Name)

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
MBX
201
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
OWNER

P: Previous menu,
Vacant 958
N: Next menu,
Page 1/4
MAKE (Make/Delete)
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
S: Next Screen
1.
To create or discard the mailboxes

In the MAKE (Make/Delete) field, type M (Make) to create the mailbox or type
D (Delete) to discard the mailbox. If there are more than 1022 mailboxes, the
first 1022 of them are displayed with Make and the rest of them are displayed
with Delete. The screen shows Assigned 1022, Vacant 0.
If you want to change the status of a mailbox from Delete to Make, first change
the status of a mailbox from Make to Delete. The screen shows Assigned
1021, Vacant 1.
Then you can change the status of a mailbox from Delete to Make.
2.
Owners last name

Up to 16 alphabetic characters can be used for an owners last name.
Notes:
Mailbox numbers displayed on this screen

Panasonic KX-TD Series Telephone System with D-PITS
Voice Mail Integration
The same numbers as the extension numbers of your KX-TD series
telephone system which are automatically transmitted to the VPS
Auto Configuration.
4-11
4.3.1 Quick Setup

Other Telephone System
The same numbers as the extension numbers entered in Step 3.
The length of mailbox numbers
If both 3-digit and 4-digit extension numbers exist at a time, the VPS
will unify all mailbox numbers to 4-digit length by putting 0 at
the end of all 3-digit numbers.
(Example)
Extension Numbers
201
202
203
2000
2001
2002
Mailbox Numbers
201(0) *
202(0) *
203(0) *
2000
2001
2002
* The VPS puts (0) at the end of 3-digit numbers.

If you need to program the mailbox parameters other than the extension number and
owners last name, see Creating and Editing Mailboxes on page 4-19.
Step 5. Port service setting

Quick Setup Port Service Setting
All ports are currently setup to handle callers with standard automated
attendant operation, day and night mode, using the Custom Service
feature (Custom 1). You can change the operation to standard voice mail
(Custom 2) or leave it as automated attendant. If necessary, Custom 1
and Custom 2 can be modified under the menu Program -> Service
Setting -> Custom Service.
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Day Mode
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Night
Auto.
Auto.
Auto.
Auto.
Auto.
Auto.
Auto.
Auto.
Auto.
Auto.
Auto.
Auto.
Mode
Attend.
Attend.
Attend.
Attend.
Attend.
Attend.
Attend.
Attend.
Attend.
Attend.
Attend.
Attend.
A: Auto. Attend., V: Voice Mail, S: Next Screen

Auto. Attend. (using Custom 1), Voice Mail (using Custom 2)
4-12
4.3.1 Quick Setup

Incoming call services for all ports (Day/Night) can be defined for each port by this
settings on the screen.
PORT 1 (Day) ---- : Auto. Attend. (using Custom 1) indicates that incoming call service for Port
1 (Day) is set to Custom 1 and callers to this port will receive Automated Attendant service.
You can change Auto. Attend. to Voice Mail. In this case, Custom service
No. will be changed from 1 to 2 automatically.
The default values of the ports depend on the position of the rotary switch you used
when starting up the system (see page 4-6):
Position 0 or 2 ----- Auto. Attend. (using Custom 1)
Position 3 ----------- Voice Mail (using Custom 2)
If you want to select other incoming call services, see Port Assignment on page
4-37.
Note:
Max.8 of VPS ports 1-12 is available at a time.

Refer to 2.2.3 Extension Connection (page 2-13).
Step 6. Password setting

Quick Setup Password Setting
System Administrator Password
(Maximum 8 characters)
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION : =
System Reset/Clear Password
(Maximum 8 characters)
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION : =
You can assign the System Administrator password and System Reset/Clear
password in this screen, if necessary.
You can go to the next screen without assigning the password by pressing
[RETURN].
4-13
4.3.1 Quick Setup

Step 7. Date and time setting
Quick Setup Time Setting
Current time is 3:04, PM
Enter new time (HH:MM, AM/PM) : =
Current date is SAT JAN11994
Enter new date (MMDDYY) : =
Enter the current month, day and year.

Note:
If you have a Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system with DPITS Integration
Date and Time are synchronized between the PBX and the VPS
automatically.
You can go to the next screen by pressing [RETURN].
Step 8. Activating the Quick Setup

Quick Setup Setup
To set up the mailbox and restart, select Yes.

To cancel and exit, select No.
1: Yes
To activate the Quick Setup, press 1.

To cancel the Quick Setup, press 2.
4-14
2: No
4.3.1 Quick Setup

The VPS begins to change system programming data.
Quick Setup Setup
To set up the mailbox and restart, select Yes.

To cancel and exit, select No.
1: Yes
2: No
Setup 101
Then CARD TEST ..., SYSTEM SETUP ... and 1 ... 2 ... 3 ... appears
on the screen one by one as shown below.
CARD TEST ...
SYSTEM SETUP ...
1 ... 2 ... 3 ...
When the Quick Setup is finished, the screen shows:

** ON LINE MODE **
>
Press [RETURN].
Please Select Your Terminal Type.
1.
ASCII TERMINAL
2.
VT100
Please Enter the Number : =
4-15
4.4
1. Program
Programming Menu Structure

Diagram
1. Mailbox
Setting
1. Enter/Edit
2. Delete
3. Password Reset
4. Mailbox Listing
1. Mailbox No.
Entry
2. Class of
Service
COS No. (1-64)

Entry
1. Class of Service
Setting
2. Authorization
Setting
3. Port
Service
Port No. (1-12)

Entry
1. Day Mode
1. Port 1
.
.
.
12. Port 12
2. Night Mode
1. Port 1
.
.
.
12. Port 12
4. Service
Setting
1. Automated
Attendant
3. Alternate
Extension
4-16
1. Device 1
2. Device 2
3. Device 3
1. Department
Dialing
2. Operators
Parameter
2. Custom Service
1. Mailbox
Setting
2. Notification
Setting
1. Day Mode
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
2. Night Mode
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Enter Extension
2. Delete Extension
3. Extension Listing
Custom Service No. (1-100) Entry
4.4
Programming Menu Structure

Diagram
5. System
Parameter
Setting
1. System Group
Assignment
1. Mailbox
Group
1. Enter
2. Delete
3. Listing
2. Extension
Group
1. Enter
2. Delete
3. Listing
2. Day Service
3. Holiday Setting
1. Enter
2. Delete
3. Listing
4. Daylight Saving
Time
5. Prompt Setting
6. Others
6. Hardware
Setting
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Extension Numbering Plan 1-16

Dialing Parameter
Call Hold
Intercom Paging Parameters
Fax Management
Disconnect Parameter
1. RS-232C
2. Port Setting
Port No. (1-12)

Entry
1. Port 1
.
.
.
12. Port 12
3. PBX Interface
Parameter
1. Dialing
Parameter
2. Inband
Signaling
3. Digit
1. Inter-digit
Timeout
2. Input/Output
4-17
4.5
Programming the System

Parameters
For the most effective utilization of the storage capacity and ports of the system,
you can set up system parameters via the RS-232C port.
Note:
In this chapter, parameters displayed on the screen show default values

with VT100 or compatible terminals.
Program Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Class of Service
3. Port Service
4. Service Setting
5. System Parameter Setting
6. Hardware Settings
Before starting the system parameters setup

Use the Worksheets provided to record the information you will need to set up
system parameters. Just fill in the blanks with the information requested. Once
you have finished filling out the worksheets, you can use them as quick reference
cards to aid you in setting parameters while programming.
4-18
4.5.1 Setting up Mailboxes

You must coordinate the operation of the mailbox. You can create/delete mailboxes,
reset the passwords of the Subscribers mailboxes, install extension numbers, name
of owners and the Class of Service numbers.
The System Manager can also carry out these operations by telephone at the request
of Subscribers. See Chapter 5.
System Administration Top Menu 1 1
Program Mailbox Setting Menu
1. Enter/Edit
2. Delete
3. Password Reset
4. Mailbox Listing
4.5.1.1 Creating and Editing Mailboxes

You can create up to 1022 Subscriber mailboxes or edit existing ones by entering
a mailbox number.
Program Mailbox Setting Enter/Edit Menu
1. Enter/Edit
2. Delete
3. Password Reset
4. Mailbox Listing
Enter the Mailbox Number (3 digits) : =

Note:
Quick Setup
If you have already executed Quick Setup, mailboxes are already
created (see page 4-8).
4-19

Parameter
Mailbox Number
Value Range
(default)
25 digits
(None)
Description/Function
Reference
Specifies the mailbox number for Subscribers.

The mailbox number length is defined by the
Quick Setup (see Step 4) or Initializing the
System in Chapter 7. Mailbox numbers cannot
begin with zero. Therefore, if the mailbox number
length has been defined as three digits, the valid
range of mailbox number is 100 through 997 (998
and 999 are reserved for the Message Manager and
the System Manager). Once a mailbox number
length has been defined, it cannot be changed in
Mailbox Setting screen.
Creating
mailboxes
p.4-11
Initializing
the System
p.7-25
System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No.

Program Mailbox Setting Enter Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
Editing Mailboxes
You can edit the parameters of each mailbox based on the needs of the Subscriber.
System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No. 1
Program Mailbox Setting Enter
MAILBOX No. [XXX]
The Extension of the Owner ---------------------------------- :
The Spelling of the Owner First Name ------------------ :
Last Name ------------------ :
Mailbox Class of Service No. (1-62) ---------------------- :
Covering Extension ----------------------------------------------- :
Interview Mailbox -------------------------------------------------- :
All Calls Transfer to Mailbox ---------------------------------- :
4-20
. . .
. . .
. . .
1
. . .
. . .
No
. .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. .

Value Range
(default)
The Extension
of the Owner
25 digits
(None)
Used to transfer calls from the system to a

Subscribers mailbox. Any valid extension
number including an extension group list number
can be assigned.
[Note]
If an extension group list number is assigned, all
group members can share the same information in
that mailbox.
Owner
Name
Up to 16
alphabetic
characters
(None)
Both first and last names are printed on the

Mailbox Assignments report.
Parameter
First
Last
Class of Service
Number
Covering
Extension
Interview
Mailbox No.
COS No.162
(1)
25 digits
(None)
25 digits
(None)
The Dialing by Name feature uses the last name.
Reference
Extension
Group
p.4-55
Dialing by
Name p.3-20
Mailbox
Assignments
p.7-17
Used to define a set of services available to the

Subscriber.
[Notes]
Before assigning a Class of Service (COS)
number, parameters for each COS number
should be defined.
COS No. 63 is fixed to the Message Manager
and No. 64 is fixed to the System Manager.
These numbers cannot be assigned in this field.
Class of
Service
p.3-12
Specifies the extension to which the caller, who

was unable to reach the Subscribers extension
via Automated Attendant service, will be transferred by callers choice.
Covering Extension is one of Incomplete Call
Handling service options which can be activated
or deactivated using telephone by the Subscriber.
[Notes]
An extension group list number and Logical
Extension number cannot be assigned as a
Covering Extension.
The Subscriber can also specify the Covering
Extension number using telephone.
Covering
Extension
p.3-13
Used to permit the mailbox owner to have his

own interview mailbox by assigning any vacant
mailbox number.
Interview
Service
p.3-31
Setting
COS
Parameters
p.4-27
Incomplete
Call
Handling
Service
p.3-29
Extension
Group
p.4-55
Mailbox
p.3-33
4-21

Value Range
(default)
Parameter
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
All Calls
Transfer to
Mailbox
If set to Yes, all calls (via the Automated
Attendant) coming to the extension of this mailbox owner are automatically forwarded to this
mailbox without ringing the extension, and callers
can leave a message in it.
[Note]
When this feature is activated, the extension of
this mailbox owner does not necessarily exist as a
phone extension of your PBX.
Reference
Logical
Extension
p.3-33
Notification Setting
You can set parameters for the Message Waiting Notification Device feature.
Up to three different destinations (Device 1, 2, 3) per mailbox can be specified.
Notes:
Class of Service programming determines whether or not the

Subscriber can utilize this feature.
For managers, only the Message Manager (COS No. 63) need to
program Notification Setting parameters.
System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No. 2

Program Mailbox Setting Enter
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
Enter the Notification Device Number (1-3) : =

4-22

Device 1
System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No. 2 Device No. (13)
Program Mailbox Setting Notification Setting Menu
Mailbox No.[xxx] - Device 1 Parameters
Number to Dial ----------------------------------------------------- :
:
Type ------------------------------------------------------------------- :
Use Device ---------------------------------------------------------- :
Number of Retries (0-4 times) -------------------------------- :
Busy Delay (2-120 min.) ---------------------------------------- :
No Answer Delay (2-120 min.) ------------------------------- :
Schedule
Day
MON :
TUE :
WED :
THU :
FRI :
SAT :
SUN :
Time frame 1
Start Time
End Time
8:00, AM 11:00, AM
8:00, AM 11:00, AM
8:00, AM 11:00, AM
8:00, AM 11:00, AM
: All Day
Parameter
Number to Dial
Value Range
(default)
901234567
. . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone
Scheduled
0
3
30
Time frame 2
Start Time
End Time
1:00, PM
5:00, PM
1:00, PM
5:00, PM
1:00, PM
5:00, PM
1:00, PM
5:00, PM
Space : No Use
Up to 32 digits of Assigns the telephone or beeper number of

Device 1.
19, 0, , #
P, T, M, X
P : Pause
(None)
T : Dial Tone Detection
M : Dial Mode
X : Callback Number Entry Code
19, 0, , #: Dial Codes
[Notes]
The callback number entry code X must
be included in the number to be dialed, if
Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode is
activated by COS and Type is set to
Beeper.
Please insert proper number of pauses
before callback number entry code X.
Reference
Callback
Number
Entry
p.3-7
M.W.N.Device
p.3-38
Type
p.4-24
Beeper
Callback
No. Entry
Mode
p.4-33
4-23

Value Range
(default)
Type
1. Telephone
2. Beeper
(Telephone)
Specifies the device to be notified.
Use Device
1. Not Use
2. Continuously
3. Scheduled
(Continuously)
Specifies the usage of Device 1.

1. Not Use
Device 1 is deactivated.
2. Continuously
Device 1 is always active and receives
notification calls whenever a message is
recorded in the mailbox.
3. Scheduled
Device 1 is active during the scheduled
time.
Parameter
Note:
The Subscriber can also specify the above three parameters using a
telephone.
Number of
Retries
04 times
(0)
Specifies the number of times that a notification

call to Device 1 should be attempted after a
busy or no answer condition.
Busy Delay
2120 min.
(3)
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS

is to wait after a busy condition before trying to
make a notification call to Device 1 again.
No Answer
Delay
2120 min.
(30)
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS

is to wait after a no answer condition before
trying to make a notification call to Device 1
again.
Time frame 1,2 112: hour

MON :
0059: minute
TUE :
AM/PM: a.m./p.m.
WED :
: All Day
THU :
Space: No Use
FRI :
SAT :
SUN :
Device 2, 3
4-24
Specifies a weekly schedule for Message

Waiting Notification.
[Note]
This parameter is valid only when Use Device
is set to Scheduled.
Same as Device 1
Reference
M.W.N.Device
p.3-38

4.5.1.2 Deleting a Mailbox
When a Subscriber no longer needs a mailbox, he should ask you to delete it.
Program Mailbox Setting Delete
1. Enter/Edit
2. Delete
3. Password Reset
4. Mailbox Listing
Enter the Mailbox Number : = XXX

Are you sure ? ( Y / N ) : =
When a mailbox is deleted, the VPS will erase all messages in the mailbox, remove
the mailbox from all group distribution lists, delete personal group distribution lists
assigned to the mailbox, erase the Subscribers name and cancel external delivery
messages. While deleting a mailbox, the on-line service of the system must be
stopped. See Off-line Set on page 7-2.
4.5.1.3 Resetting a Mailbox Password

If a Subscriber has forgotten his mailbox password, he can ask either you or the
System Manager to delete his mailbox password so that the Subscriber can use a
new one.
Program Mailbox Setting Password Reset
1. Enter/Edit
2. Delete
3. Password Reset
4. Mailbox Listing
Enter the Mailbox Number : = XXX

Are you sure ? ( Y / N ) : =
4-25

4.5.1.4 Listing Mailboxes
You can display a list of all mailbox numbers registered in the system on the
terminal.
Program Mailbox Setting Mailbox Listing
1:
6:
11:
16:
21:
26:
31:
36:
41:
46:
51:
56:
201
206
211
216
221
226
231
236
241
246
251
256
61: 261
2:
7:
12:
17:
22:
27:
32:
37:
42:
47:
52:
57:
202
207
212
217
222
227
232
237
242
247
252
257
62: 262
3:
8:
13:
18:
23:
28:
33:
38:
43:
48:
53:
58:
203
208
213
218
223
228
233
238
243
248
253
258
63: 263
P: Previous
4-26
4:
9:
14:
19:
24:
29:
34:
39:
44:
49:
54:
59:
204
209
214
219
224
229
234
239
244
249
254
259
64: 264
N: Next
5:
10:
15:
20:
25:
30:
35:
40:
45:
50:
55:
60:
205
210
215
220
225
230
235
240
245
250
255
260
4.5.2 Setting COS (Class of Service)

Parameters
Used to define a set of services available to Subscribers. A maximum of 64 (1
64) different classes of service can be established. You can assign a class of service
number per each mailbox. More than one Subscriber can share the same Class of
Service. All members who have the same COS number are allowed to use the same
call services.
Notes:
COS Nos. 162 have the same default values.

COS No. 63 is fixed to the Message Manager and No. 64 is fixed
to the System Manager.
System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No. (164)

Program Class of Service Menu
1. Class of Service Setting
2. Authorization Setting
4.5.2.1 Class of Service Setting

COS Nos. 162 (for Subscribers)
System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No. (162) 1
Program Class of Service Class of Service Setting Menu
CLASS OF SERVICE No. [1]
Personal Greeting Length (8-60 sec) ---------------------------------New Message Retention Time (1-30 days) -------------------------Saved Message Retention Time (1-30 days, 0: Unlimited) ----Message Length (1-6 min.) -----------------------------------------------Mailbox Capacity Maximum Messages (5-100 msgs) -----------Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time (5-100 min.) ------Message Retrieval Order --------------------------------------------------Message Scanning with Information -----------------------------------Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting ----------------------Use Call Waiting on Busy -------------------------------------------------Message Cancel for Live Call screening -----------------------------Direct Mailbox Access ------------------------------------------------------Intercom Paging Group (1-8) --------------------------------------------Prompt Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
16
5
5
3
10
10
LIFO
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
1
USER 1
4-27
4.5.2 Setting COS (Class of Service)

Parameters
COS Nos. 162
Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Personal
Greeting Length
860 sec in 4
seconds
increments
(16)
Defines the available length of the Personal

Greeting message which can be recorded by the
Subscriber.
This parameter applies to:
Personal greeting on No-answer
Personal greeting on Busy
Personal greeting for After Hours
Personal
Greetings
p.3-48
New Message
Retention Time
130 days
(5)
Defines the number of days a new message

(= unplayed message) can remain in the mailbox.
The days are counted from the next day of
recording.
Mailbox
Capacity
p.3-35
Saved Message
Retention Time
130 days
0: Unlimited
(5)
Message Length
16 min.
(3)
Defines the maximum length of one message that

callers can leave in the mailbox.
Mailbox Capacity
Maximum
Messages
5100 msgs
(10)
Specifies the maximum number of messages

(including both new and saved) which can be held
in one mailbox at a time. When you send a
message using the Group Distribution List, the
VPS will ignore this setting and send the message
anytime.
Mailbox Capacity
Maximum
Message Time
5100 min.
(10)
Specifies the total amount of time for messages

(both new and saved) allowable in one mailbox.
Message
Retrieval Order
1. LIFO
2. FIFO
(LIFO)
Specifies message retrieval order.

1. LIFO: Messages are played back from the
newest to the oldest.
2. FIFO: Messages are played back from the
oldest to the newest.
Receive
Message
p.3-50
Message
Scanning with
Information
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to Yes, the VPS appends the message

senders name and the recording date and time to
the message during message scan.
Message
Scan
p.3-37
4-28
Reference
Defines the number of days a saved message

(already played message) can remain in the
mailbox. The days are counted from the next day
of the first message playback. If 0: Unlimited is
selected, the saved messages remain in the
mailbox until they are erased by the Subscriber.
4.5.2
Parameter
Play System
Prompt after
Personal Greeting
Setting COS (Class of Service)

Parameters
Value Range
(default)
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Reference
If set to Yes, the VPS broadcasts the following

guidance for message recording to the caller after
the personal greeting.
Play System
Prompt
After
Personal
Greeting
p.3-49
To end recording, hang up or press [1] for

more features.
To pause and restart recording, press [2].
Use Call Waiting
on Busy
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to Yes, the VPS signals the busy

extension that another call is waiting.
Call
Waiting
Sequence
p.4-82
Message Cancel
for Live Call
Screening
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
With the Live Call Screening feature, the

Subscriber can monitor a messages being recorded
in his own mailbox and can talk to the caller, if
he wants to.
In this case, the VPS continues to record the
conversation unless it was deactivated by the PBX
beforehand.
If set to Yes, the VPS will delete the recording.
However, the Subscriber can hold the messages in
his mailbox, if the following condition is satisfied:
The PBX allows the VPS to continue
recording after starting the conversation.
If set to No, the VPS will save the recording
automatically.
[Note]
Live Call Screening feature is available if D-PITS
Voice Mail Integration with a Panasonic KX-TD
series telephone system is activated.
Live Call
Screening
p.3-32
If set to Yes, the Subscriber enters the

Subscriber service directly by simply calling a
VPS extension from his own extension. There is
no need to dial Subscriber service access code (
+ mailbox number). However, password entry is
required if it was specified beforehand.
[Note]
This feature is available if D-PITS Voice Mail
Integration with a Panasonic KX-TD series
telephone system is activated.
Direct
Mailbox
Access
p.3-21
Direct Mailbox
Access
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
PBX Type
p.4-79
Integration
Mode
p.4-81
PBX Type
p.4-79
Integration
Mode
p.4-81
4-29
4.5.2

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Intercom Paging
Group
18
(1)
Prompt Mode
1. SYSTEM
2. USER 1
3. USER 2
(USER 1)
Reference
Specifies the intercom paging group number
available to the Subscriber.
[Note]
This feature is available if D-PITS Voice Mail
Integration with a Panasonic KX-TD series
telephone system is activated.
Incomplete
Call
Handling
Service
p.3-29
Specifies the language of voice prompts that the

VPS broadcasts to the Subscriber during a
Message Waiting Notification call and Subscriber
service.
[Note]
If User 1 or User 2 is specified as Prompt Mode
but not recorded by the Message Manager, the
VPS automatically broadcasts the factory recorded
System prompts (English) to the Subscriber.
By default, both User 1 and User 2 prompts are
not recorded.
Subscriber
Service
p.3-56
Intercom
Paging
Parameter
p.4-71
Voice
Prompts
p.3-58
Recording
User
Prompts
p.6-15
COS Nos. 63, 64 (for Managers)

System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No. (63, 64) 1
Program Class of Service Class of Service Setting Menu
(for Message Manager)
Personal Greeting Length (8-60 sec) --------------------------------New Message Retention Time (1-30 days) -----------------------Saved Message Retention Time (1-30 days, 0: Unlimited) --Message Length (1-6 min.) ---------------------------------------------Mailbox Capacity Maximum Messages (5-100 msgs) ----------Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time (5-100 min.) -----Message Retrieval Order ------------------------------------------------Message Scanning with Information ---------------------------------Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting --------------------Use Call Waiting on Busy -----------------------------------------------Message Cancel for Live Call screening ---------------------------Direct Mailbox Access ----------------------------------------------------Intercom Paging Group (1-8) -------------------------------------------Prompt Mode -----------------------------------------------------------------
4-30
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
30
30
6
100
100
LIFO
No
4.5.2

Parameters
COS Nos. 63, 64

Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Defines the number of days a new message (=
unplayed message) can remain in the mailbox.
The days are counted from the next day of
message recording.
Reference
New Message
Retention Time
130 days
(30)
Saved Message
Retention Time
130 days
0: Unlimited
(30)
Defines the number of days a saved message

(already played message) can remain in the
mailbox. The days are counted from the next day
of the first message playback. If 0: unlimited is
selected, the saved messages remain in the
mailbox until they are erased by the mailbox
owner.
Message Length
16 min.
(6)
Defines the maximum length of one message that

callers can leave in the mailbox.
Mailbox Capacity
Maximum
Messages
5100 msgs
(100)
Specifies the maximum number of messages

(including both new and saved) which can be held
in one mailbox at a time.
Mailbox Capacity
Maximum
Message Time
5100 min.
(100)
Specifies the total amount of time for messages

(both new and saved) allowable in one mailbox.
Message
Retrieval Order
1. LIFO
2. FIFO
(LIFO)
Specifies message retrieval order.

1. LIFO: Messages are played back from the
newest to the oldest.
2. FIFO: Messages are played back from the
oldest to the newest.
Receive
Message
p.3-50
Message
Scanning with
Information
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to Yes, the VPS appends the message

senders name and the recording date and time to
the message during message scan.
Message
Scan
p.3-37
Note:
Mailbox
Capacity
p.3-35
Parameters other than those listed above are not assignable for COS
Nos. 63 and 64.
4-31
4.5.2

Parameters
4.5.2.2 Special Feature Authorization

Allows the Subscriber to utilize the following special features on a COS basis.
Auto Forwarding
All these features are prohibited when a new mailbox is created. You must authorize
the necessary features.
Notes:
For managers, Message Notification for the Message Manager can

only be activated or deactivated by this programming.
Other parameters are not assignable.
If a special feature authorization is set to No, sub-parameters are
not assignable.
COS Nos. 162 (for Subscribers)

Program Class of Service Authorization Setting Menu
Authorization of Message Notification ------------------------Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode ---------------MWL Notification for Unreceived Message --Device Notification for Unreceived Message Authorization of External Message Delivery ---------------Prompt Mode -------------------------------------------Authorization of Auto Forwarding ------------------------------Mailbox Number ---------------------------------------Delay Time ----------------------------------------------Forwarding Mode ---------------------------------------
4-32
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
No
- - - - - - No
- - No
- - - - - - -
4.5.2
Parameter
Authorization of
Message
Notification
Beeper
Callback No.
Entry Mode

Parameters
Value Range
(default)
Reference
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to Yes, Subscribers can utilize the

Message Waiting Notification feature.
[Note]
If you took the Quick Setup step to create
mailboxes, this parameter in COS No. 1 has been
already set to Yes.
M.W.N.
p.3-38, 3-41
1. Select
2. Without
3. Before
4. After
5. Disable
(None)
Allows or prohibits the Subscriber to utilize the

Callback Number Entry feature.
Select: After message recording, the VPS will
ask the caller whether the caller wants
to enter his callback number or not.
Without: Without message recording, the VPS
will ask the caller to enter his callback
number.
Before: Before message recording, the VPS will
ask the caller to enter his callback
number.
After:
After message recording, the VPS will
number.
Disable: The VPS will not ask the caller to enter
his callback number.
[Notes]
To utilize this feature, the beeper number must
include the callback number entry code X.
See Notification Setting on page 4-22.
When Disable is selected or the caller does
not enter his callback number, System Callback
No. will be displayed on the beepers display.
Callback
Number
Entry
p.3-7
Notification
Setting
p.4-22
Number to
Dial
p.4-23
Type
p.4-24
Max. Digits
for
Callback
No./
Callback
No. Entry
Interdigit
Time-Out
p.4-67
System
Callback
No.
p.4-68
MWL
Notification for
Unreceived
Message
1. Yes
2. No
(None)
Lets the VPS turn on the message waiting lamp

again, if unplayed messages are still left in the
mailbox after the Subscriber access.
M.W.N.Lamp
p.3-41
Device
Notification for
Unreceived
Message
1. Yes
2. No
(None)
Lets the VPS call devices, if unplayed messages

are still left in the mailbox after the Subscribers
access.
M.W.N.Device
p.3-38
Type
p.4-24
4-33
4.5.2
Parameter
Authorization of
External Message
Delivery
Prompt Mode
Authorization of
Auto Forwarding
Mailbox
Number
Delay Time
Forwarding
Mode
4-34

Parameters
Value Range
(default)
Reference
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Allows the Subscriber to utilize the External

Message Delivery feature.
E.M.D.
Service
p.3-22
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(None)
Specifies in which language the voice prompts of

external messages are played.
MultiLingual
Service
p.3-42
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Forwards messages to another mailbox if they

have not been listened to for a specific length of
time.
25 digits
(None)
(Hr.) (Min)
00 : 05
|
99 : 59
(None)
1. Copy
2. Move
(None)
E.M.D.
Parameters
p.4-68
Specifies the mailbox number where unlistened

messages will be forwarded.
[Note]
A mailbox group list number cannot be assigned
to this parameter.
Specifies the length of time in both hours and
minutes the VPS is to wait before forwarding the
unlistened messages.
If new messages are not received by the
Subscriber before this time expires, the VPS
forwards them to the destination mailbox.
The maximum delay time is 99 hours, 59 minutes
(more than four days).
[Note]
The delay time must be shorter than the New
Message Retention Time. Otherwise, messages
will be deleted before being forwarded.
Specifies whether or not the forwarded messages
should be retained in the original mailbox.
If set to Copy, a copy of the message is
retained in the original mailbox after the message
has been forwarded to another mailbox.
If set to Move, only the mailbox to which the
message was forwarded has the message.
Auto
Forwarding
p.3-3
New
Message
Retention
Time
p.4-28
4.5.2

Parameters
COS No. 63 (for Message Manager)

COS No. 63 is fixed to the Message Manager and only Authorization of Message
Notification can be activated or deactivated by the programming.
External Message Delivery and Auto Forwarding are not assignable.
Program Class of Service Authorization Setting Menu
(for Message Manager)
Authorization of Message Notification ------------------------Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode ---------------MWL Notification for Unreceived Message --Device Notification for Unreceived Message Authorization of External Message Delivery ---------------Prompt Mode -------------------------------------------Authorization of Auto Forwarding ------------------------------Mailbox Number ---------------------------------------Delay Time ----------------------------------------------Forwarding Mode ---------------------------------------
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Disable
No
No
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
COS No. 63
Parameter
Authorization of
Message
Notification
Beeper
Callback No.
Entry Mode
Value Range
(default)
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to Yes, the Message Manager can utilize

the Message Waiting Notification feature.
1. Select
2. Without
3. Before
4. After
5. Disable
(Disable)
Allows or prohibits the Message Manager to utilize

the Callback Number Entry feature.
Select: After message recording, the VPS will
ask the caller whether the caller wants to
enter his callback number or not.
Without: Without message recording, the VPS will
number.
Before: Before message recording, the VPS will
number.
Reference
M.W.N.
p.3-38, 3-41
Notification
Setting
p.4-22
Callback
Number
Entry
p.3-7
Number to
Dial
p.4-23
Type
p.4-24
4-35
4.5.2

Parameters
COS No. 63
Parameter
Value Range
(default)
After:
Reference
After message recording, the VPS will

number.
Disable: The VPS will not ask the caller to enter
his callback number.
[Notes]
To utilize this feature, callback number entry
code X should be included in the Message
Managers beeper number. See Notification
Setting no page 4-22.
When Disable is selected or the caller does not
enter his callback number, System Callback No.
will be displayed on the beepers display.
Max.
Digits for
Callback
No./
Callback
No. Entry
Interdigit
Time-Out
p.4-67
System
Callback
No.
p.4-68
MWL
Notification for
Unreceived
Message
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Lets the VPS turn on the message waiting lamp

again, if unplayed messages are still left in the
mailbox after the Message Managers access.
M.W.N.Lamp
p.3-41
Device
Notification for
Unreceived
Message
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Lets the VPS call devices, if unplayed messages

are still left in the mailbox after the Message
Managers access.
M.W.N.Device
p.3-38
Type
p.4-24
COS No. 64 (for System Manager)

COS No. 64 is fixed to the System Manager and all Authorization settings are not
assignable.
4-36
4.5.3 Port Service

Each VPS port has Day and Night mode. One of four incoming call services
can be assigned to each VPS port: Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview
service and Custom service.
The Port Assignment menu also lets you specify company greeting number, prompt
mode and delayed answer time.
Program Port Service Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Class of Service
3. Port Service
4. Service Setting
5. System Parameter Setting
6. Hardware Settings
Enter the Port Number (1-12) =
Current Card Configuration
SLOT1:PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 PORT4
SLOT3:
Note:
You can assign parameters for all 12 ports. However, the location
of currently valid ports (Max.8) is displayed under "Current Card
Configuration" on the screen above.
4.5.3.1 Port Assignment

System Administration Top Menu 1 3 Port No. (1-12)
Program Port Service Menu
1. Day Mode
2. Night Mode
Company Greeting No., Incoming Call Service, Prompt, Delayed Answer Time
4-37
4.5.3 Port Service

Port 1 Day Mode
System Administration Top Menu 1 3 Port No. (1) 1
Program Port Service Day Mode Menu
Port Number [1]
Parameter
Company
Greeting No.
Value Range
(default)
132
(None)
:
:
:
:
. .
Auto. Attn.
User 1
0
Specifies which Company Greeting greets the
callers to this port.
Reference
Company
Greetings
p.3-12
Recording
Company
Greetings
p.6-12
Incoming Call
Service
1. Voice
Mail
2. Auto.
Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
(Auto. Attn. )
Specifies one of four incoming call services.

[Notes]
When you specify the Interview service, one of
Subscribers Interview mailbox numbers should
also be specified.
When you specify the Custom service, one of
100 (1100) Custom service numbers should also
be specified.
A.A.
Service
p.3-4
Custom
Service
p.3-13
Interview
Service
p.3-31
V.M.
Service
p.3-56
Incoming Call
Service Prompt
4-38
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
Specifies the language of voice prompts which

provide the operation guidance of the VPS to the
caller to this port.
[Notes]
This parameter is not valid if incoming call
service is set to Interview or Custom.
If Selective is specified, you will need to
select a prompt available for rotary callers.
See Prompt for Rotary Callers below.
MultiLingual
Service
p.3-42
Voice
Prompts
p.3-58
Prompt
Setting
p.4-62
4.5.3 Port Service

Parameter
Prompt for
Rotary Callers
Delayed Answer
Time
Value Range
(default)
Reference
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies in which language rotary callers hear

the voice prompts when they cannot enter any
digit to select a Prompt Selection Number while
Multi-Lingual selection menu message is being
played.
None
015 sec
(0)
Specifies whether the VPS answers incoming calls

immediately (0) or in a delayed timing (115 sec).
None
Note:Callers are generally accustomed to their calls being answered within 10

seconds and most callers abandon the call in under 45 seconds if no reply is
obtained. This unit will answer incoming calls in under 10 seconds if required.
(Delayed Answer Time)
Port 1 Night Mode

System Administration Top Menu 1 3 Port No.(1) 2
Program Port Service Night Mode Menu
Port Number [1]
:
:
:
:
. .
Auto. Attn.
User 1
0
Descriptions are same as Port 1 Day Mode.
Port 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Day Mode

Same as Port 1 Day Mode
Port 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Night Mode

Same as Port 1 Day Mode
4-39
4.5.4 Service Settings

Program Service Set Menu
1. Automated Attendant
2. Custom Service Settings
4.5.4.1 Automated Attendant Parameters

The Automated Attendant service in the call service has three main functions:
Department or Speed Dialing; Operators Parameters; Alternate Extension.
Program Service Set Auto. Attn. Menu
1. Department Dialing
2. Operators Parameters
3. Alternate Extension
4.5.4.1.1 Department Dialing

Department Dialing is a speed dialing feature which allows the caller to reach his
desired extension by simply dialing one digit (1 through 9).
Program Service Set Auto. Attn. Department Dialing Menu
Department
Department
Department
Department
Department
Department
Department
Department
Department
4-40
Dialing
Dialing
Dialing
Dialing
Dialing
Dialing
Dialing
Dialing
Dialing
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Department
Dialing No. 19
25 digits
(None)
Specifies any valid extension number.
[Note]
The department dialing menu can be recorded by
the Message Manager.
Reference
Department
Dialing
p.3-19
Recording
Department
Dialing
Menu
Messages
p.6-13
4.5.4.1.2 Operators Parameters

Specifies the operators (Operator 1, 2, 3) extensions, mailboxes and the treatment
of operator-seeking calls.
Operators parameters can be set for both Day and Night mode individually.
Program Service Set Auto. Attn. Operator Menu
1. Day Mode
2. Night Mode
System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 1

Program Service Set Auto. Attn. Operator Day Mode Menu
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
4-41

Operator 1 Day Mode
Activates or deactivates the Operator service, specifies Operator 1s extension and
the treatment of calls transferred to Operator 1s extension. When Operator service
is activated, operator-seeking calls are first transferred to Operator 1s extension.
System Administration Top Menu 1 4 1 2 1 1
Program Service Set Auto. Attn. Operator Day Mode Operator 1 Menu
Operator Service -----------------------------------------------------Operators Extension -----------------------------------------------Operators Mailbox No. --------------------------------------------Operator No-answer Time (10-60 sec) -----------------------Busy Coverage Mode ----------------------------------------------No-answer Coverage Mode --------------------------------------Message Repeat Cycle ---------------------------------------------
Parameter
Operator Service
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Enable
0
998
30
Hold
Caller Select
3
Value Range
(default)
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
Activates or deactivates the Operator service.

[Note]
If the Operator service is deactivated, operatorseeking calls are transferred to the General Delivery
Mailbox.
Reference
M.W.N.Lamp
p.3-41
Operator
Service
p.3-46
Extension
Operators
Extension
25 digits
(0)
Numbering
Specifies Operator 1s extension number.
Plan
[Note]
p.4-63
The default setting (0) is not applicable to the
Operators
Message Waiting Notification-Lamp feature. For
Extensions
the Operator 1 to have this feature, assign an
p.6-10
extension number which comes under the Extension
Numbering Plan.
Operators
Mailbox No.
25 digits
(998)
Managing
The caller to Operator 1s extension may be
the G.D.M.
prompted to leave a message in this mailbox
p.6-5
depending on the settings of Busy Coverage Mode
or No-answer Coverage Mode.
4-42

Parameter
Operator Noanswer Time
Value Range
(default)
1060 sec
(30)
Reference
If a call to Operator 1, 2 or 3 is not answered

within this parameter, the VPS will offer the
caller other options defined by No-answer
Coverage Mode.
[Note]
This timer applies to Operators 1, 2 and 3.
No-Answer
Coverage
Mode
p.3-46
Busy Coverage
Mode
1. Hold
2. No-answer
Coverage
3. Call
Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
Specifies how to treat calls when Operator 1 is

busy.
1. Hold
The VPS calls Operator 1 again while putting
the caller on hold.
2. No-answer Coverage
The VPS offers an option defined by Noanswer Coverage Mode to the caller.
3. Call Waiting
The VPS signals Operator 1 on busy that
another call is waiting using the Call Waiting
feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message
The VPS disconnects the call after playing
Thank you for calling.
Busy
Coverage
Mode
p.3-7
No-answer
Coverage Mode
1. Caller
Select
2. Leave
Message
3. Disconnect
Message
4. Next
Operator
(Caller Select)
Specifies how to treat calls when Operator 1 does

not answer it within the time length defined by
Operator No-answer Time.
1. Caller Select
The VPS offers the following two options to
the caller.
(a) Leave a message
2. Leave Message
The VPS prompts the caller to leave a message
in Operator 1s mailbox.
4. Next Operator
The VPS transfers the call to Operator 2.
No-Answer
Coverage
Mode
p.3-46
Operator
No-answer
Time
p.4-43
4-43

Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Message Repeat
Cycle
13 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times the VPS plays the

option selection message to the caller, when
Caller Select is specified as No-answer
Coverage Mode.
[Note]
This parameter applies to Operators 1, 2 and 3.
Note:
Reference
Interaction of Extension Call Forwarding with Operator Call

Coverage Settings.
Extension call forwarding to the VPS may override the operator
call coverage settings depending on the timing parameters of the
PBX and VPS. Even if the operator call coverage parameters are
set to forward to the next operator on busy/no answer, the call
may go to the VPS if the Operator has set the call forwarding to
the VPS on his extension.
Operator 2 Day Mode

Operator-seeking calls come in on Operator 2 when Operator 1 is busy or
unanswered and Operator 1s parameters are set as follows.
Busy Coverage Mode No-answer Coverage
No-answer Coverage Mode Next Operator
Operators Extension -----------------------------------------------Operators Mailbox No. --------------------------------------------Busy Coverage Mode ----------------------------------------------No Answer Coverage Mode -------------------------------------Operators Service is Enable
4-44
:
:
:
:
- - - - Hold
Caller Select

Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Reference
Operators
Extension
25 digits
(None)

Any valid extension number can be assigned.
Operator
Service
p.3-46
Operators
Mailbox No.
25 digits
(None)
Specifies Operator 2s mailbox number. Any

valid mailbox number can be assigned.
The caller to Operator 2s extension may be
depending on the settings of Busy Coverage
Mode or No-answer Coverage Mode.
Busy
Coverage
Mode
p.3-7
Busy Coverage
Mode
1. Hold
2. No-answer
Coverage
3. Call
Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
Specifies how to treat calls when Operator 2

is busy.
1. Hold
the caller on hold.
3. Call Waiting
feature of the PBX.
No-answer
Coverage Mode
1. Caller
Select
2. Leave
Message
3. Disconnect
Message
4. Next
Operator
(Caller Select)

1. Caller Select
the caller.
(a) Leave a message
2. Leave Message
4. Next Operator
The VPS transfers the call to Operator 3.
No-Answer
Coverage
Mode
p.3-46
No-Answer
Coverage
Mode
p.3-46
Operator
No-answer
Time
p.4-43
4-45

Operator 3 Day Mode
Operator-seeking calls come in to Operator 3, when Operator 2 is busy or there is
no answer and Operator 2s parameters are set as follows.
Busy Coverage Mode No-answer Coverage
No-answer Coverage Mode Next Operator
Operators Extension -----------------------------------------------Operators Mailbox No. --------------------------------------------Busy Coverage Mode ----------------------------------------------No-answer Coverage Mode ---------------------------------------
:
:
:
:
- - - - Hold
Caller Select
Operators Service is Enable
Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Reference
Operators
Extension
25 digits
(None)

Any valid extension number can be assigned.
Operator
Service
p.3-46
Operators
Mailbox No.
25 digits
(None)
Specifies Operator 3s mailbox number. Any

valid mailbox number can be assigned.
The caller to operator 3s extension may be
depending on the settings of Busy Coverage
Mode or No-answer Coverage Mode.
Busy
Coverage
Mode
p.3-7
Busy Coverage
Mode
4-46
1. Hold
2. No-answer
Coverage
3. Call
Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
Specifies how to treat calls when Operator 3 is

busy.
1. Hold
the caller on hold.
3. Call Waiting
feature of the PBX.
No-Answer
Coverage
Mode
p.3-46

Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Reference
No-answer
Coverage Mode
1. Caller
Select
2. Leave
Message
3. Disconnect
Message
(Caller Select)

1. Caller Select
the caller.
(a) Leave a message
2. Leave Message
No-Answer
Coverage
Mode
p.3-46
Notes:
Operator
No-answer
Time
p.4-43
An Operator-seeking call is always transferred to Operator 1 first.

It will be transferred to Operator 2 and then Operator 3 depending
on System Programming.
Next Operator cannot be set in No-answer Coverage Mode of
Operator 3.
Operator 1 Night Mode

Same as Operator 1 Day Mode


4-47

4.5.4.1.3 Alternate Extension Assignment
Used to assign extensions which should be transferred differently from normal
extension transfer sequences. Calls to the extensions in this group will be
transferred following the sequence defined by Alternate Extension Transfer
Sequence (see page 4-82).
Program Service Set Auto. Attn. Alternate Extn. Menu
1. Enter Extension
2. Delete Extension
3. Extension Listing
Alternate Extension Group Enter

You can put 32 extensions together in a group to use the alternate transfer sequence.
Program Service Set Auto. Attn. Alternate Extn. Enter Extension
1:
5:
9:
13:
17:
21:
25:
2:
6:
10:
14:
18:
22:
26:
3:
7:
11:
15:
19:
23:
27:
4:
8:
12:
16:
20:
24:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
Enter the Extension Number : =
4-48

Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Alternate
Extension (132)
25 digits
(None)
Reference
Specifies an extension which requires different

transfer sequence than normal extension transfer
sequence.
Alternate
Extension
Group p.3-3
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
p.4-82
Alternate Extension Delete

You can delete extension numbers from the alternate extension group.
Program Service Set Auto. Attn. Alternate Extn. Delete Extension
1:
5:
9:
13:
17:
21:
25:
2:
6:
10:
14:
18:
22:
26:
3:
7:
11:
15:
19:
23:
27:
4:
8:
12:
16:
20:
24:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
Enter the Number You Want to Delete : =
Alternate Extension Listing

You can list up all extensions registered in the alternate extension group.
Program Service Set Auto. Attn. Alternate Extn. Extension Listing
1:
5:
9:
13:
17:
21:
25:
29:
2:
6:
10:
14:
18:
22:
26:
30:
3:
7:
11:
15:
19:
23:
27:
31:
4:
8:
12:
16:
20:
24:
28:
32:
4-49

4.5.4.2 Custom Service
Custom service is one of four incoming call services.
By assigning a function to each key, you can provide a customized key-operation
service to callers.
You can set a maximum of 100 custom services.
System Administration Top Menu 1 4 2 Custom Service No. (1100)
Description ------------------------------------------------------ : . . . . . . . . . . . . .
: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prompt Mode (1: Sys 2: User 1 3: User 2) ------ : System
Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3) ---------------------------------- : 3 times
Wait for Second Digit (1-5 seconds) ------------------ : 1 seconds
Keypad Assignment
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
:d
0: c
#:
Please choose one of the following functions or services.
c. Operator
j. Department Dialing
d. Exit
k. Dial by Name
e. Previous Menu
l. Repeat Menu
f. Custom Service
m. Main Menu
g. Voice Mail Service
n. FAX Transfer
Note:
Parameter
Description
4-50
Custom Service Report (CREP)

After programming a Custom service, you can confirm the keypad
assignments, message recording status and the tree-structure of a
Custom service by displaying Custom service report on the terminal.
See page 7-11.
In this report, you can also confirm the number of times a certain
Custom service has been accessed by callers.
Value Range
(default)
Up to 32
alphanumeric
characters
(None)
The information typed in this field is for your
reference only.
Reference
Custom
Service
p.3-13

Parameter
Prompt Mode
Value Range
(default)
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Reference
Specifies the language of a custom service menu

message that the caller to this Custom service will
hear as a guidance.
[Note]
This parameter overrides Incoming Call Service
Prompt.
MultiLingual
Service
p.3-42
Incoming
Call Service
Prompt
p.4-38
Menu Repeat
Cycle
13 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times custom service menu

messages are repeated to the caller.
[Note]
Custom 1 on the top of the programming screen
(see the previous page) is highlighted, if menu
message for Custom 1 was recorded by the
Message Manager beforehand. This is available in
the VT100 mode only.
Recording
Custom
Service
Menu
Messages
p.6-14
Call Transfer
Anytime
Extn./Mbx/
No
(Extn.)
Specifies where the call is transferred during the

custom service top menu.
The Extn. setting (enter E) enables the caller
to be transferred directly to his desired party by
dialing the extension number.
The Mbx setting (enter M) enables the caller
to leave messages in the mailbox by entering the
mailbox number of the person to whom caller
wishes to leave messages.
The No setting (enter N) deactivates call
transfer.
Port service
setting
p.4-12
Wait for Second

Digit
No DTMF Input
Operation
15 sec
(1)
af
(c)
*See Keypad
Assignment
on the next
page for
details.
Used to resolve the problem that the first digit of

the extension or mailbox number is the same as
one of the custom service menu choices. The VPS
will wait for a second digit for this amount of
time. If this timer expires, the VPS assumes that
the caller wants to choose the menu and not to
transfer a call. This parameter is used only if
Call Transfer Anytime is set to Extn. or
Mbx.
Specifies how to treat the caller who does not
respond to the menu message. This occurs when
the caller is using a rotary phone. The factory
setting is c. Operator, that is, the caller is
automatically connected to the operator
immediately after the playback of menu message
has finished.
Rotary
Telephone
Service
p.3-52
4-51

Parameter
Keypad
Assignment
0 9, , #
4-52
Value Range
(default)
an
You can assign any of the 14 services listed below
( : d, 0: c
(a n) to 0 through 9,
and # keys on the
Others: None) telephone keypad. Callers are then able to access
these services by pressing the corresponding keys
on their telephones.
(a) Transfer to Mailbox
Allows the caller to leave messages in a specific
mailbox. Enter a followed by a mailbox number.
(b) Transfer to Extension
Transfers the caller to a specific extension. Enter
b followed by an extension number.
(c) Operator
Connects the caller to the operator.
(d) Exit
Plays a final guidance message and disconnects.
The message must be recorded by the Message
Manager.
(e) Previous Menu
Allows the caller to access previous Custom
service menu, if programmed.
(f) Custom Service
Allows the caller to access another Custom
service, if programmed.
(g) Voice Mail Service
Allows the caller to access the Voice Mail service.
(h) Call Transfer Service
Allows the caller to access the Call Transfer
service.
(i) Subscriber Service
Allows the caller to access the Subscriber service.
(Available only when calls are from Subscribers)
(j) Department Dialing
Transfers the caller to the department dialing menu.
(k) Dial by Name
Lets the caller transfer to an extension by dialing
the first three or four letters of the extension
owners last name.
(l) Repeat Menu
Repeats the Custom service menu message once.
(m) Main Menu
Lets the caller return directly to the top Custom
service menu.
(n) FAX Transfer
Enables the caller to send a fax message to the
appropriate extension, that is, a fax machine.
Reference
A.A.
Service
p.3-4
Custom
Service
p.3-13
Department
Dialing
p.3-19
Dialing by
Name
p.3-20
Fax
Management
p.3-24
Operator
Service
p.3-46
Voice Mail
Service
p.3-56
4.5.5 System Parameter Settings

Program System Parameter Menu
1. System Group Assignment
2. Day Service
3. Holiday Setting
4. Daylight Saving Time
5. Prompt Setting
6. Others
4.5.5.1 System Group Assignment

Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Menu
1. Mailbox Group
2. Extension Group
4.5.5.1.1 Mailbox Group

A Subscriber may sometimes want to send a message simultaneously to several
mailboxes. These mailboxes may be put together into a list, known as a mailbox
group list. The VPS can have up to 20 system mailbox group lists. Each mailbox
group list can have up to 20 destination mailbox numbers.
You can add, delete and review members in specified lists.
Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Mailbox Group Enter
1. Enter
2. Delete
3. Group Listing
Enter the Mailbox Group List Number (3 digit) : =
4-53

Mailbox Group Enter
System Administration Top Menu 1 5 1 1 1 Group List No.
Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Mailbox Enter
MAILBOX GROUP LIST No. [XXX]
Mailbox Group Name -------------------1:
6:
11:
16:
2:
7:
12:
17:
3:
8:
13:
18:
:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:
9:
14:
19:
5:
10:
15:
20:
Enter the Mailbox Number
Value Range
(default)
Parameter
Reference
Mailbox Group
List No.
25 digits
(None)
Specifies any vacant mailbox number.

The Subscriber can transfer or deliver messages
to all members of this group by simply specifying
the Group List No.
Group
Distribution
List,
System
p.3-25
Group Name
Up to 16
characters
Enter the name for your reference. Press

[RETURN] to skip this setting.
Recording
Voice
Labels for
Mailbox
Lists p.6-15
Member
(120)
25 digits
(None)
Specifies mailbox numbers belonging to this

group.
None
Mailbox Group Delete

You can specify mailbox numbers to be deleted from the list.
4-54

Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Mailbox Delete
MAILBOX GROUP LIST No. [XXX]
Mailbox Group Name --------------------- : VOICE MAIL GROUP
1:
6:
11:
16:
2:
7:
12:
17:
3:
8:
13:
18:
4:
9:
14:
19:
5:
10:
15:
20:
Enter the Number You Want to Delete
Mailbox Group Listing

This displays all Mailbox Group List numbers.
Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Mailbox Group Listing
1: 12345
2: 11111
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
Mbx Group Name 1 11:

Mbx Group Name 2 12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
4.5.5.1.2 Extension Group

You can put several extensions together into a list. The VPS can have up to 20
system extension group lists. Each group can have up to 20 extensions.
You can add, delete and review members in specified lists.
The members in a list can share the same mailbox and can also be notified by
message waiting notification lamp at the same time, if authorized.
4-55

Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Extension Group Enter
1. Enter
2. Delete
3. Group Listing
Enter the Extension Group List Number (25 digits): =
Extension Group Enter

Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Extension Enter
EXTENSION GROUP LIST No. [XXX]
Extension Group Name ------------------ : EXTENSION GROUP
1:
6:
11:
16:
2:
7:
12:
17:
3:
8:
13:
18:
4:
9:
14:
19:
5:
10:
15:
20:
Enter the Extension Number
Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Extension Group
List No.
25 digits
(None)
Specifies any vacant extension number.
[Note]
Extension Group List No. can be assigned as The
Extension of the Owner of a mailbox so that all
group members can share the information in the
same mailbox. In this case, each group member
cannot have another mailbox.
Group Name
Up to 16
characters
For your reference.
Member
(120)
25 digits
(None)
Specifies extension numbers belonging to this

group.
[Note]
If a mailbox is owned by an extension group, each
member cannot have another mailbox.
4-56
Reference
Extension
Group
p.3-22
The
Extension
of the
Owner
p.4-21

Extension Group Delete
You can specify extensions to be deleted from the list.
Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Extension Delete
EXTENSION GROUP No. [XXX]
Extension Group Name ------------------ : EXTENSION GROUP
1:
6:
11:
16:
2:
7:
12:
17:
3:
8:
13:
18:
4:
9:
14:
19:
5:
10:
15:
20:
Enter the Number You Want to Delete
Extension Group Listing

This displays all Extension Group List numbers.
Program System Parameter System Group Assignment Extension Group Listing
1: 12345
Extn. Group Name 1
11:
2: 11111
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
Extn. Group Name 2
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
4.5.5.2 Day Service

Day service is a timer function that provides the appropriate way of handling
incoming calls for a specified time of day.
The following items can be programmed differently between day mode and night
mode.
Port Assignment (See page 4-37) / Operators Parameters (See page 4-41)
4-57

Program System Parameter Day Service
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
SUN
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Start Time
9:00, AM
9:00, AM
9:00, AM
9:00, AM
9:00, AM
9:00, AM
9:00, AM
D: Day Mode
Parameter
Value Range
(default)
MON (Start/End) 112: hour

0059: minute
|
SUN (Start/End) AM/PM:a.m./p.m.
D: Day Mode
N: Night Mode
MONSUN
(9:00 AM
|
5:00 PM)
End Time
5:00, PM
5:00, PM
5:00, PM
5:00, PM
5:00, PM
5:00, PM
5:00, PM
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
N: Night Mode
Specifies Start and End time of the Day
service.
Day Mode: 24 hours Day mode
Night Mode: 24 hours Night mode
Reference
Day Service
p.3-19
4.5.5.3 Holiday Setting

You can program a special service mode for up to 20 holidays. The VPS will
provide the specified incoming call service and company greetings according to the
day service setting of the holiday. If a day is set as a holiday, the starting and ending
time specified in the Day service is ignored.
Program System Parameter Holiday Setting Menu
1. Holiday Setting Enter
2. Holiday Setting Delete
3. Holiday Listing
4-58

Holiday Setting Enter
Program System Parameter Holiday Setting Enter Menu
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Enter the Holiday Number (1-20) : =
System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 1 Holiday No. (120)

Program System Parameter Holiday Setting Enter Holiday 1
Holiday Number [1]
Name of Holiday ---------------------------------------------Date -------------------------------------------------------------Retain Holiday ------------------------------------------------Service --------------------------------------------------------Company Greeting Number (1-32) --------------------Port Affected ---------------------------------------------------
Parameter
Name of
Holiday
Value Range
(default)
Up to 16
characters
(None)
:
:
:
:
:
:
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
MM/DD
No
Auto. Attn.
. .
1-12
Reference
Holiday
Service
p.3-26
For your reference.
Date
MM : Month
DD : Day
(None)
Specifies the date of holiday.
Retain Holiday
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Used to keep the Holiday service setting for future

use. If set to Yes, the same setting will be
activated automatically on the same day every year.
If set to No, the setting will be canceled
automatically after the holiday is over.
4-59

Parameter
Service
Company
Greeting Number
Port Affected
Value Range
(default)
Reference
1. Voice
Mail
2. Auto.
Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
(Auto. Attn.)
Specifies one of four incoming call services for

the holiday.
[Notes]
When you specify the Interview service, one of
Subscribers mailbox numbers should also be
specified.
When you specify the Custom service, one of
Custom service numbers (1100) should also be
specified.
132
(None)
Specifies a company greeting number (132) as a

holiday greeting.
Company
Greetings
p.3-12
Port No.
(1-12)
Specifies the port number on which you want to

activate the Holiday service setting. At least one
port must be specified. The unspecified port(s)
provide(s) the usual incoming call service.
Port
Service
p.3-49
Holiday Setting Delete

You can cancel the Holiday service setting by specifying a holiday number (120).
Program System Parameter Holiday Setting Delete Menu
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Enter the Holiday Number (1-20) : =
4-60
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name

Holiday Setting Listing
Used to display all the specified holiday names and dates.
Program System Parameter Holiday Setting Holiday Listing
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
4.5.5.4 Daylight Saving Time

Used to adjust the internal clock for the starting date and ending date of the daylight
saving time.
Program System Parameter Daylight Saving Time Menu
Start Date ( 1 hour forward) (MM/DD) ------------------------ : MM/DD
End Date (1 hour back) (MM/DD) ------------------------------ : MM/DD
Parameter
Start Date/
End Date
Value Range
(default)
MM : Month
DD : Day
(None)
Reference
Specifies the starting and ending dates of daylight

saving time. The VPS advances one hour on the
starting date of daylight saving time, and restores
the time on the ending date. Both the starting
date and the ending date must be set and the same
date cannot be set in both settings.
Daylight
Saving
Time
Assignment
p.3-19
4-61

4.5.5.5 Prompt Setting
This setting is required when using Multi-Lingual service.
Program System Parameter Prompt Setting Menu
System Prompt Selection Number (1-9) ---------------------- : .
User 1 Prompt Selection Number (1-9) ----------------------- : .
User 2 Prompt Selection Number (1-9) ----------------------- : .
Position of AM/PM in Time Stamp --------------------------- : After
Parameter
System Prompt
Selection
Number
Value Range
(default)
19
(None)
User 1 Prompt
Selection
Number
User 2 Prompt
Selection
Number
Pressing one of these numbers from the language
selection menu enables the caller or the receiver of
an external delivery message to select a language
of voice prompts.
This setting is required when either one or both of
the following parameters are set to Selective.
Port Assignment Incoming Call Service
Prompt
Authorization of External Message
Delivery Prompt Mode
Example:
For service in English, press [7].
For service in Spanish, press [8].
For service in Chinese, press [9].
This message can be recorded by the Message
Manager.
[Note]
Prompt selection numbers and the first digit of the
mailbox numbers should be different from each
other.
4-62
Reference
MultiLingual
Service
p.3-42
Voice
Prompts
p.3-58
Prompt
Mode
p.4-34
Incoming
Call
Service
Prompt
p.4-38
Recording
Selection
Menus
p.6-16

Parameter
Position of
AM/PM in
Time Stamp
Value Range
(default)
1. Before
2. After
3. None
(After)
This parameter setting is available only for User
prompts.
Specifies the time notation.
1. Before
The VPS announces AM/PM before the time
(e.g., A.M. 3:42).
2. After
The VPS announces AM/PM after the time
(e.g., 3:42 A.M.).
3. None
The VPS does not announce AM/PM (e.g.,
3:42).
Reference
MultiLingual
Service
p.3-42
Message
Scan
p.3-37
4.5.5.6 Other Parameters

Program System Parameter Others Menu
1. Extension Numbering Plan
2. Dialing Parameter
3. Message Waiting Notification
4. External Message Delivery
5. Call Hold
6. Rotary Telephone Service
7. Intercom Paging Parameter
8. FAX Management
9. Disconnect Parameter
4.5.5.6.1 Extension Numbering Plan

Used to specify the extension numbers of your PBX so that the VPS can recognize
the dialed extension number as a valid one.
4-63

Program System Parameter Others Extension Numbering Plan Menu
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Numbering
Parameter
Numbering Plan
116
Value Range
(default)
25 digits
consisting of
09, X
(2XX, 3XX)
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
Plan
1 --------------------------------------------------2 --------------------------------------------------3 --------------------------------------------------4 --------------------------------------------------5 --------------------------------------------------6 --------------------------------------------------7 --------------------------------------------------8 --------------------------------------------------9 --------------------------------------------------10 ------------------------------------------------11 ------------------------------------------------12 ------------------------------------------------13 ------------------------------------------------14 ------------------------------------------------15 ------------------------------------------------16 -------------------------------------------------
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2XX
3XX
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Reference
Specifies the first one or two digits of the

extension number of your PBX.
Up to 16 entries can be registered in the list.
Each entry contains 25 digits of numeric
characters 09 and X which matches any digit.
Extension numbers cannot begin with 0.
Extension
Numbering
Plan
p.3-22
1XX: Indicates any three-digit extension

number starting with 1.
(b) If valid extension numbers of your PBX are
400 through 450 and 3300 through 3399,
specify the numbers as follows:
33XX: Indicates any four-digit extension
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Examples:
(a) If valid extension numbers of your PBX are
101 through 164 and 201 through 264, specify
the numbers as follows:
4-64
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4.5.5.6.2 Dialing Parameters
Program System Parameter Others Dialing Parameter Menu
Number of Digits to Access Outside Line (0-8 digits) --Call Transfer No-answer Time (10-60 sec) ----------------Outgoing Call No-answer Time (10-90 sec) ---------------Pause Time -----------------------------------------------------------Outgoing Call Setup Sequence ----------------------------------
Parameter
Number of Digit
to Access
Outside Line
:
:
:
:
:
1
20
30
2
T . . . . . . . . . .
Value Range
(default)
Reference
08 digits
(1)
Specifies the number of digits required to access

an outside line.
Outgoing
Call Setup
Sequence
p.4-66
Example:
If the PBX requires callers to dial 9 in order to Port Usage
Report
access an outside line, this parameter should be
p.7-20
set to 1 digit. This causes the system to be
aware that, when dialing the number 91234567
for example, outgoing call setup sequence is done
after the initial 9 is dialed. The full sequence is
therefore: 9 [outgoing call setup sequence] 123
4567.
For periodic port usage reports, the VPS can
discriminate between local and long distance calls
and can report outgoing calls and calling times
for billing purpose.
Call Transfer
No-answer Time
1060 sec
(20)
Specifies the amount of time that the VPS should Call Transfer
wait before receiving the transferred call if there Status
p.3-10
is no answer at the destination extension.
Outgoing Call
No-answer Time
1090 sec
(30)
Specifies the amount of time that the VPS should

wait before concluding that the outgoing call will
not be answered.
Pause Time
19 sec
(2)
Specifies the pause duration which is used at the

time of entering telephone numbers in the VPS.
It is a pause time between dialed digits.
E.M.D.
Service
p.3-22
M.W.N.Device
p.3-38
4-65

Parameter
Outgoing Call
Setup Sequence
Value Range
(default)
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
09, , #,
F, R, S,
T, W
(T)
Reference
Specifies the sequence of codes used by the VPS

to make a call to an outside line. You can set up
to 12 digits. The default value is T, which
means that the VPS dials the outside phone
numbers after detecting dial tone.
E.M.D.
Service
p.3-22
M.W.N.Device
p.3-38
Example:
9W = [9] 1-second wait dial outside phone
number.
9 is the CO line access number.
F : Hook Flash
R : Ring Back Tone Detection
S : Silence Detection
W :Wait for 1 second
19, 0, , # : Dial Codes
4.5.5.6.3 Message Waiting Notification

The following parameters are used to control the handling of message notification
calls.
Program System Parameter Others Message Waiting Notification Menu
Outgoing Call Ports -------------------------------------------------Message Waiting Lamp Ports -----------------------------------Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message ---------------Max. Digits for Callback No. (1-48 digits) ------------------Callback No. Entry Interdigit Time-out (1-10 sec) -------System Callback No. ------------------------------------------------
4-66
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1-12
1-12
No
20
5
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .

Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Reference
Outgoing Call
Ports
Port No.
(1-12)
Number to
Specifies the port numbers used for the Message
Dial
Waiting Notification-Device feature. The VPS
p.4-23
makes outgoing calls using a port specified in this
field. At least one port must be specified.
Message
Waiting Lamp
Ports
Port No.
(1-12)
Specifies the port numbers used for the Message

Waiting Notification-Lamp feature.
The VPS turns on the message waiting lamp of
the extension using a port specified in this field.
At least one port must be specified.
Message
Waiting Lamp
for Every
Message
Max. Digits for

Callback No.
Callback No.
Entry Interdigit
Time-Out
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
148 digits
(20)
110 sec
(5)
M.W.N.Lamp
p.3-41
If set to Yes, the VPS will turn on the message

waiting lamp of the extension every time a new
message is recorded in the mailbox even if the
message waiting lamp has not been turned off
from a previous message.
If set to No, the VPS will turn on the message
waiting lamp for only the first message. It will
not notify subsequent messages until the
Subscriber has accessed the VPS to receive the
message.
This setting is useful if the first attempt has
unsuccessful for some reason.
Specifies the maximum number of digits the
caller can enter as a callback number. This
number will be displayed on beepers if Beeper
Callback No. Entry Mode is activated.
Sets the maximum time allowed between each
digit on Beeper Callback No. Entry. If the caller
does not enter any digits within this length of
time following the last digit entry, the VPS
considers it as the end of entry and does not
accept additional entry.
Callback
Number
Entry
p.3-7
Number to
Dial
p.4-23
Type
p.4-24
Beeper
Callback No.
Entry Mode
p.4-33
4-67

Parameter
System
Callback
No.
Value Range
(default)
Up to 32
digits
(None)
Specifies a telephone number displayed on

Subscribers beepers as a callback number when
Type is set to Beeper.
[Note]
If Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode is activated,
the callback number entered by the caller will be
displayed on the destination beeper instead of this
system callback number.
Reference
Callback
Number
Entry
p.3-7
Number to
Dial
p.4-23
Type
p.4-24
Beeper
Callback No.
Entry Mode
p.4-33
4.5.5.6.4 External Message Delivery Parameters

Used to control the handling of External Message Delivery calls.
Program System Parameter Others External Message Delivery Menu
Retry Times (0-4 times) -----------------------------------------------------Busy Delay (2-60 min.) ------------------------------------------------------No-answer Delay (2-120 min.) --------------------------------------------Outgoing Call Ports -----------------------------------------------------------Message Length (1-6 min.) -------------------------------------------------Max. Message for Mailboxes (1-100 msgs) --------------------------System External Message Delivery Duration Time (1-9 min.) --Companys Telephone No. ---------------------------------------------------
Parameter
Value Range
(default)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
3
60
1-12
3
3
3
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
Retry Times
04 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times that an external

message delivery call should be attempted when
the destination is busy or if there is no answer.
Busy Delay
260 min.
(3)
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS is

to wait after a busy condition before trying to
deliver the message again.
4-68
Reference
E.M.D.
Service
p.3-22

Parameter
No-answer
Delay
Value Range
(default)
2-120 min.
(60)
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS is

to wait after a no answer condition before trying
to deliver the message again.
Outgoing Call
Ports
Port No.
(1-12)
Specifies the port numbers used for the External

Message Delivery feature.
Message Length
16 min.
(3)
Specifies the allowable length of external delivery

messages that the Subscriber can record in his own
mailbox.
Max. Messages
for Mailboxes
1100
messages
(3)
Specifies the maximum number of external

delivery messages which can be held in one
mailbox at a time.
System External
Message
Delivery
Duration Time
19 min.
(3)
Specifies the maximum telephone connect time

allowable for an external message delivery call.
Used to prevent excessive telephone charges.
This time starts when the destination of the
external delivery message answers the call. The
VPS terminates the call (after playing a prompt)
when the specified length of time is exceeded.
Companys
Telephone No.
Up to
32 digits
This telephone number is announced in the

callback message to the recipient as the telephone
number he should call to retrieve the senders
message. The VPS plays the callback message
to recipients if the person answering the call was
unable to enter the correct password and could not
receive the message.
Reference
E.M.D.
Service
p.3-22
4-69

4.5.5.6.5 Call Hold Parameters
Programming System Parameter Others Call Hold Menu
Call Hold Mode ------------------------------------------------------Call Queuing Announcement Mode ---------------------------Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 sec) ---------Redialing Cancel Timing -------------------------------------------
Parameter
Call Hold Mode
Call Queuing
Announcement
Mode
Value Range
(default)
:
:
:
:
Enable
Enable
2
30
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
If set to Enable, the caller can hold the call or

take an Incomplete Call Handling service option.
For example, leaving a message when the called
extension is busy.
While on hold, the VPS asks the caller repeatedly
whether he wishes to continue the hold or take an
Incomplete Call Handling service option.
If set to Disable, the VPS offers callers
Incomplete Call Handling service immediately.
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
If set to Enable, callers on hold are informed of

their current position in the call hold queue.
Example:
Sorry, two other people are waiting to
connect.
Call Retrieval
Announcement
Timing
130 sec
(2)
Specifies how long the VPS should wait before

asking the caller whether he wishes to keep
holding or retrieve the call to take an Incomplete
Call Handling service.
Example:
To cancel holding, press [2] now.
Otherwise, I'll try your party again.
Redialing
Cancel Timing
4-70
1. 15 sec
2. 30 sec
3. 45 sec
4. 60 sec
(30)
Specifies how long the VPS should wait before

asking the caller whether to redial.
Example:
To continue holding, press [1].
Otherwise, press [2].
Reference
Hold
p.3-26
Incomplete
Call
Handling
Service
p.3-29

4.5.5.6.6 Rotary Telephone Service
Used to define the treatment of callers who are calling from a rotary telephone
(unable to input DTMF signals) or callers who cannot properly respond to the
guidance of the VPS in the Voice Mail service.
Program System Parameter Others Rotary Telephone Service Menu
Rotary Telephone Call Coverage Day Mode --------------- : G.D.M.
Rotary Telephone Call Coverage Night Mode -------------- : G.D.M.
Parameter
Value Range
(default)
1. G.D.M.
Rotary
Telephone Call 2. OPERATOR
EXTENSION
Coverage
(G.D.M.)
(Day), (Night)
Reference
Defines how the VPS treats callers who are calling Operator
Service
from a rotary telephone or callers who are
p.3-46
unfamiliar with the VPS operation.
Rotary
[Note]
Telephone
G.D.M. = General Delivery Mailbox
Service
p.3-52
4.5.5.6.7 Intercom Paging Parameter

Intercom Paging is a PBX feature which makes it possible to page a callers desired
party through built-in speakers of proprietary telephones.
To utilize this feature, the Intercom Paging feature must be available on your PBX
and the following parameters are properly programmed to meet the requirements
of your PBX.
Note:
This feature is available if D-PITS Voice Mail Integration with a

Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system is activated.
4-71

Program System Parameter Others Intercom Paging Parameter Menu
Intercom Paging Sequence --------------------------------------Release for Intercom Paging ------------------------------------No-answer Time for Intercom Paging (1-30 sec) --------Announcement Repeat Cycle (1-3 times) -------------------Intercom Paging Retry (1-10 times) --------------------------Paging Code for Group 1 ----------------------------------------Paging Code for Group 2 ----------------------------------------Paging Code for Group 3 ----------------------------------------Paging Code for Group 4 ----------------------------------------Paging Code for Group 5 ----------------------------------------Paging Code for Group 6 ----------------------------------------Paging Code for Group 7 ----------------------------------------Paging Code for Group 8 -----------------------------------------
Parameter
Intercom
Paging
Sequence
Value Range
(default)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
. .
. .
5
1
2
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Reference
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
09, , # and
special codes
(None)
Specifies the intercom paging sequence required by Incomplete

Call
your PBX.
Handling
Use up to 12 of the following eight letters and
Service
p.3-29
twelve dial codes.
Release for
Intercom
Paging
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
09, , # and
special codes
(None)
Specifies the intercom paging release code required

by your PBX. Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
can be set using the same letters and dial codes as
the Intercom Paging sequence.
No-answer
Time for
Intercom
Paging
130 sec
(5)
Specifies the length of time in seconds that the

VPS should wait before terminating the Intercom
Paging because there is no answer.
The VPS goes back to the caller if the paged party
does not respond before this timer expires.
4-72
D : Disconnecting
F : Hook Flash
W: Wait for 1 second
X : Pager Dialing
A : Answer
19, 0, , # : Dial Codes
Intercom
Paging
P.3-30

Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Announcement
Repeat Cycle
13 times
(1)
Reference
Specifies the number of times that the intercom
paging announcement should be repeated.
Example:
There is a call for <mailbox owners name>.
Intercom
Paging Retry
Paging Code
for Group 18
110 times
(2)
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
0-9 and
for
each group
(None)
Specifies the paging retry times when the paged

destination is busy or if there is no answer.
Specifies the intercom paging access code required
by the PBX.
[Note]
Intercom paging group number available for each
Subscriber is determined on a COS-by-COS basis.
Intercom
Paging
Group
p.4-30
4.5.5.6.8 Fax Management

Transfers incoming fax calls to a fax extension.
Up to two fax extensions can be specified as the destinations of automatic fax
transfer so that one serves as a backup for the other.
If the main fax extension is not available to receive a fax call, the VPS will transfer
it to the alternate fax extension.
Program System Parameter Others Fax Management Menu
Automatic Transfer of Incoming Fax Call -------------------Main Fax Extension No. ------------------------------------------Alternate Fax Extension No. ------------------------------------Fax No-answer Time (5-60 sec) -------------------------------Fax Manager Mailbox No. ----------------------------------------Fax No-answer Coverage Mode -------------------------------Fax Notification Mode ----------------------------------------------
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Disable
. . .
. . .
10
. . .
No
No
4-73

Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Automatic
Transfer of
Incoming Fax
Call
1: Disable
2: Enable
(Disable)
Activates or deactivates the automatic transfer of

Fax Management service.
Main Fax
Extension No.
25 digits
(None)
Specifies a fax extension number which serves as

the main fax.
Alternate Fax
Extension No.
25 digits
(None)
Specifies a fax extension number which serves as

the backup for the main fax extension.
When the main fax extension is busy or if there is
no answer within Fax No-answer Time, the VPS
will transfer a fax call to this extension.
Fax No-answer
Time
560 sec
(10)
Specifies the length of time in seconds the VPS is

to wait before taking another action if there is no
answer.
[Note]
This timer applies to the fax call which has been
transferred to the main fax or alternate fax
extension.
Fax Manager
Mailbox No.
25 digits
(None)
Specifies the mailbox number of the Fax Manager

to which the VPS will notify status of fax calls
depending on Fax No-answer Coverage Mode
and Fax Notification Mode settings.
Fax No-answer
Coverage Mode
1. No
2. Mbx
3. Extn.
(No)
If set to Mbx, the VPS will leave the number of

unanswered fax calls in the Fax Managers
mailbox.
Example:
The FAX transfer situation is as follows.
One attempt was no answer.
If set to Extn., the VPS will call the Fax
Managers extension to inform the number of
unanswered fax calls.
The VPS will also leave the number of
unanswered fax calls in the Fax Managers
mailbox.
If set to No, the VPS does not take any action
on unanswered fax calls.
4-74
Reference
Fax
Management
p.3-24

Parameter
Fax Notification
Mode
Value Range
(default)
1. No
2. Mbx
3. Extn.
(No)
Reference
If set to Mbx, the VPS will leave the number of

successfully-received fax calls in the Fax
Managers mailbox.
Fax
Management
p.3-24
Example:
You have one FAX message.
If set to Extn., after a fax extension receives a
fax call successfully, the VPS automatically calls
the Fax Managers extension and plays a voice
prompt, such as, You have one FAX message.
The VPS will also leave the number of received
fax calls in the Fax Managers mailbox.
If set to No, the VPS does not take any action
on successfully-received fax calls.
4.5.5.6.9 Disconnect Parameter

Programming System Parameter Others Disconnect Parameter Menu
Maximum Silence Time (5-60 sec) ----------------------------- : 10
Parameter
Maximum
Silence Time
Value Range
(default)
560 sec
(10)
If silence continues for more than a specified
period of time, the VPS disconnects the call.
Reference
Record
Message
p.3-51
4-75
4.5.6 Hardware Settings

For system administration (system setup, mailbox setup, and system diagnosis), a
RS-232C terminal must be connected to the serial interface of the VPS.
Program Hardware Menu
1. RS-232C
2. Port Setting
3. PBX Interface Parameters
4.5.6.1 RS-232C Parameters

Program Hardware RS-232C Menu
Baud Rate -------------------------------------------------------------Word Bit Length -----------------------------------------------------Parity --------------------------------------------------------------------Stop Bit Length -------------------------------------------------------
Parameter
Value Range
(default)
:
:
:
:
9600
8
None
1
Reference
1. 300 b.p.s
2. 600 b.p.s
3. 1200 b.p.s
4. 2400 b.p.s
5. 4800 b.p.s
6. 9600 b.p.s
7. 19200 b.p.s
(9600)
Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred Data

Terminal or
(bits per second).
Printer
Word Bit
Length
1. 7 bits
2. 8 bits
(8)
Defines the number of bits in each byte or

character.
Parity
1. None
2. Odd
3. Even
(None)
Specifies the kind of parity used for error

detection.
Baud Rate
4-76
Connection
p.2-22

Parameter
Stop Bit Length
Value Range
(default)
Reference
Specifies the number of bits used to signify the
end of the byte.
1. 1 bit
2. 2 bits
(1)
Data
Terminal or
Printer
Connection
p.2-22
4.5.6.2 Port Setting

The VPS must be connected to a PBX telephone line port before system start up.
Program Hardware Menu
1. RS-232C
2. Port Setting
3. PBX Interface Parameters
Enter the Port Number (1-12) =
Current Card Configuration
SLOT3:
Note:
You can assign parameters for all 12 ports. However, the location
of currently valid ports (Max.8) is displayed under "Current Card
Configuration" on the screen above.
Port Setting Menu

System Administration Top Menu 1 6 2 Port No. (1-12)
Program Hardware Port Setting Menu
Port Number [1]
Flash Time -------------------------------------------------------------CPC Signal ------------------------------------------------------------Disconnect Time -----------------------------------------------------Dial Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------
:
:
:
:
100
6.5
2
DTMF
1:100 msec 2:300 msec 3:600 msec 4:900 msec
4-77

Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Reference
PBX Type
p.4-79
Flash Time
1. 100 msec
2. 300 msec
3. 600 msec
4. 900 msec
(100)
Specifies the length of time that the hookswitch

must be pressed before the PBX recognizes it as a
flash hook signal. See the manuals of PBX to
determine the correct value.
[NOTE]
You can select only 1. 100 msec.
CPC Signal
1. None
2. 6.5 msec
3. 150 msec
4. 300 msec
5. 450 msec
6. 600 msec
(6.5)
Specifies the minimum time required to detect a

break in the CPC (Calling Party Control) signal
from the PBX. The VPS detects that the line has
been disconnected when there is a break of the
CPC signal.
Disconnect
Time
18 sec
(2)
Dial Mode
1. DTMF
2. Pulse 10 pps
3. Pulse 20 pps
(DTMF)
Note:
Specifies the amount of time that the line is

temporarily unavailable to access after a call has
ended.
Specifies dial mode for DTMF or Pulse.
If you specify Pulse, pulse speed (10/20 pps) must
be selected.
[NOTE]
You can not select 3. Pulse 20 pps.
The Flash means the register recall in this manual.
4.5.6.3 PBX Interface Parameters

Three types of parameters are used to program the VPS for optimal signaling and
performance with your PBX.
Program Hardware PBX Interface Menu
1. Dialing Parameters
2. Inband Signaling
3. Digit Translation Table
4-78

4.5.6.3.1 Dialing Parameters
These parameters tell the VPS how to initiate and control call transfers, how to set
up outgoing calls and how to control message waiting lamps on extensions. The
easiest way to verify the correct code sequences for non-Panasonic KX-T series
telephone systems is to manually execute the sequences from a single line telephone
(SLT) with your PBX.
Program Hardware PBX Interface Dialing Parameters Menu
PBX Type --------------------------------------------------------------Integration Mode -----------------------------------------------------Operator Transfer Sequence ------------------------------------Extension Transfer Sequence -----------------------------------Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence ---------------------Reconnect Sequence on Busy ----------------------------------Reconnect Sequence on No-answer --------------------------Reconnect Sequence on Refuse Call ------------------------Light-On Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp ---------Light-Off Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp ---------Call Waiting Sequence --------------------------------------------Release for Call Waiting -------------------------------------------
Parameter
PBX Type
Value Range
(default)
1. Other Manufactures
2. KX-T Series
1. T308
2. T616
3. T1232
4. T96
5. T336
6. TD816
7. TD1232
(Other)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Other
None
FX . . . . . . .
FX . . . . . . .
FX . . . . . . .
FWW . . . . . .
FWW . . . . . .
FWW . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
Specifies a type of PBX which is connected to the
VPS. In the case of a Panasonic KX-T series
telephone system, the model number should also
be specified.
[Note]
After selecting the PBX Type, the rest of the
Dialing Parameters are set automatically to each
PBX default values. Refer to the table on next
page.
Reference
Quick
Setup
p.4-8
4-79

* When your KX-TD series telephone system is in D-PITS Integration mode
PBX Type
Other
Manufactures
KX-T series
T308
T616
None
None
None
Integration
Mode
Inband
T1232
T96
T336
None
None
None
TD816
None
Inband
Inband
Inband
Inband
TD1232
None
D-PITS
Inband
D-PITS
Operator
Transfer
Sequence
FX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FX
FTX
FX
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FX
FTX
FX
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FTX
FX
FTX
FX
Reconnect
Sequence on
Busy
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
Reconnect
Sequence on
No-Answer
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refuse Call
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
Light-On
Sequence for
Message
Waiting
Lamp
None
N/A
N/A
T701X#
T#91X
T 9X
T701X
T701X
Light-Off
Sequence for
Message
Waiting
Lamp
None
N/A
N/A
T702X#
T#90X
T#9X
T700X
T700X
Call Waiting
Sequence
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Release
Sequence for
Call Waiting
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A : Not available
4-80
: Not needed

Parameter
Integration
Mode
Value Range
(default)
1. None
2. Inband
3. D-PITS
(None)
Specifies methods of integrating VPS with your
PBX.
1. None
Both PBX and VPS work independently. No
information is provided concerning the status
of the other system.
2. Inband
The PBX sends DTMF tone codes to the VPS
which indicate the state of the call (busy,
answered, disconnected, etc.). The Inband
integration enables the VPS to recognize the
call transfer status faster. The PBX codes that
indicate the status of calls must be defined. If
you have set the PBX type to a KX-T series
telephone system, these codes will automatically
default to proper codes.
This is available when the VPS works with one
of the following Panasonic KX-T series
telephone systems:
T 1232, T96, T336, TD816, TD1232
3. D-PITS
The VPS communicates with the PBX via
D-PITS interface. This is available when the
VPS works with one of the following Panasonic
KX-TD series telephone systems:
TD816, TD1232.
Reference
D-PITS
p.3-21
Inband
p3-26
PBX
Integration
p.3-47
Inband
Signaling
Parameters
p.4-83
To program the 10 parameters on the next page, use Special Commands and
Dial Codes listed below. Up to 12 digits can be set for each parameter.
D : Disconnecting
F : Hook Flash
W : Wait for 1 second
X : Extension Dialing
A : Answer
19, 0, , # : Dial Codes
4-81

Parameter
Operator Transfer
Sequence
Value Range
(default)
Reference
(FX)
Used to transfer calls to the operators extension.
A.A.Service
p.3-4
Operator
Service
p.3-46
Extension
Transfer Sequence
(FX)
Used to transfer calls to any extension other than

the operators.
Alternate
Extension
Transfer Sequence
(FX)
Used to transfer calls to the extension in Alternate

Extension Group.
Alternate
Extension
Group p.3-3
Reconnect
Sequence on Busy
(FWW)
If the extension that a caller wants is busy, this

sequence allows the VPS to reconnect with the
caller.
Incomplete
Call
Handling
Service
p.3-29
Reconnect
Sequence on Noanswer
(FWW)
If the extension that a caller wants does not

answer, this sequence allows the VPS to reconnect
with the caller.
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refuse Call
(FWW)
This sequence is carried out by the VPS to

retrieve the call on hold after the extension in the
Call Screening mode has refused to take the call.
Light-On
Sequence for
Message Waiting
Lamp
(None)
This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must

perform to turn on the message waiting lamp on
an extension.
Light-Off
Sequence for
Message Waiting
Lamp
(None)
This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must

perform to turn off the message waiting lamp on
an extension.
Call Waiting
Sequence
(None)
This sequence is carried out by the VPS to

perform call waiting when the extension being
called is busy.
Release Sequence
for Call Waiting
(None)
This sequence is carried out by the VPS to release

call waiting.
4-82
Call Transfer
Status
p.3-10
Call Transfer
Status
p.3-10
M.W.N.Lamp
p.3-41
Use Call
Waiting on
Busy
p.4-29

4.5.6.3.2 Inband Signaling Parameters
These parameters are used if the PBX sends DTMF tones to the VPS to indicate
the state of a call (busy, answered, disconnected, etc.). The Integration mode on
page 4-81 must be set to Inband. If PBX Type is set to a KX-T series telephone
system, the Inband Signaling parameters will automatically default to the proper
codes.
Program Hardware PBX Interface Inband Signaling Menu
Ringback ---------------------------------------------------------------Busy ---------------------------------------------------------------------Reorder -----------------------------------------------------------------DND ----------------------------------------------------------------------Answer ------------------------------------------------------------------Forward to VM Ringing --------------------------------------------Forward to VM Busy -----------------------------------------------Forward to Other Extension -------------------------------------Confirmation -----------------------------------------------------------Disconnect -------------------------------------------------------------0,
Parameter
1,
Value Range
(default)
2,
3,
4,
5,
6, 7,
8,
9,
#,
A,
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 . . . . . . .
2 . . . . . . .
3 . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . .
5 . . . . . . .
6 . . . . . . .
7 . . . . . . .
8 . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . .
#9. . . . . . .
B,
C,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Reference
The following parameters can be programmed using 09, , #, and AD.

Ringback
(1)
Indicates Ringback Tone. Sent to the VPS when PBX Type

p.4-79
the extension it dialed is ringing.
Busy
(2)
Indicates Busy Tone. Sent to the VPS when the Mode

p.4-81
extension it dialed is busy.
Reorder
(3)
Indicates Reorder Tone. Sent to the VPS if it

dials an invalid extension number or if it is
inadvertently connected to another VPS.
DND
(4)
Indicates Do Not Disturb Tone. Sent to the

VPS if the dialed extension has set Do Not
Disturb feature.
Integration
4-83

Parameter
Value Range
(default)
Reference
Answer
(5)
Sent to the VPS when the called extension answers PBX Type
p.4-79
the call.
Forward to VM
Ringing
(6)
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is

forwarded to a voice mail port and that voice mail
port is available to accept the call.
Forward to VM
Busy
(7)

forwarded to a voice mail port and that voice mail
port is not available for accepting the call.
Forward to Other
Extension
(8)

forwarded to another, non-voice mail, extension.
Confirmation
(9)
Sent to the VPS when it successfully dialed a

message waiting lamp on or message waiting lamp
off code.
Disconnect
(#9)
Sent to the VPS when the other party goes onhook.
Note:
Default values in the above table are for the Panasonic KX-TD1232/
816 telephone system with Inband Signaling mode. These values vary
depending on the settings of PBX Type and Inband Integration in
PBX Interface Parameters.
KX-T series
Other
Manufactures
T308
T616
T1232
T96
T336
Ringback
N/A
N/A
N/A
A1
A1
Busy
N/A
N/A
N/A
B1
B1
Reorder
N/A
N/A
N/A
B2
B2
DND
N/A
N/A
N/A
B3
B3
Answer
N/A
N/A
N/A
A2
A2
Forward to
VM Ringing
N/A
N/A
N/A
C1
C1
Forward to
VM Busy
N/A
N/A
N/A
C2
C2
Parameter
4-84
Integration
Mode
p.4-81
TD816 TD1232

KX-T series
Other
Manufactures
T308
T616
T1232
T96
T336
Forward to
Other
Extension
N/A
N/A
N/A
C3
C3
Confirmation
N/A
N/A
N/A
D1
D1
Disconnect
N/A
N/A
N/A
#9
DD
DD
#9
#9
Parameter
TD816 TD1232
N/A : Not available
4.5.6.3.3 Digit Translation Table Parameters

Digit Translation Table is used to translate the Follow on ID signal from your PBX
to the proper codes for the VPS.
This translation table is effective for the incoming signal only.
Program Hardware PBX Interface Digit Translation Menu
1. Inter-digit Timeout
2. Input/Output
Inter Digit Timeout

Program Hardware PBX Interface Digit Translation Inter-dgt Timeout Menu
Interdigit Timeout --------------------------------------------------- : 1
1 sec
Parameter
Inter-digit
Timeout
2 sec
3 sec
seconds
4 sec
Value Range
(default)
Reference
14 sec
(1)
This parameter defines the entering interval of

incoming signals (Follow on ID). A series of
signals entered within a specified time are applied
to translation by the Digit Translation Table.
PBX Type
p.4-79
Integration
Mode
p.4-81
4-85

Digit Translation Table
Program Hardware PBX Interface Digit Translation Input / Output
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Input digit
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
---------
Output digit
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
Enter the Number : =

0,
Parameter
Table
18
Input
digit
Output
digit
4-86
1,
Value Range
(default)
Up to 8
digits
consisting of
09, , #,
AD
(None)
2,
3,
4,
5,
6, 7,
8,
9,
#,
A,
B,
C,
Reference
PBX Type
Make sure not to assign several codes to a single
incoming signal. In this case, the system will take p.4-79
Integration
the first assignment.
Mode
p.4-81
Chapter 5
System Managers Guide
This chapter explains what a System Manager is and provides
step-by-step instructions for system maintenance tasks such as
setting up mailboxes, setting COS parameters and checking
system status.
Contents
5.1 System Managers Function ................................
5.2 Accessing the System Managers Mailbox .........
5.3 Setting up Mailboxes ............................................
5.3.1 Creating and Editing a Mailbox ....................
5.3.2 Deleting a Mailbox .......................................
5.3.3 Deleting a Mailbox Password .......................
5.4 Setting COS (Class of Service) Parameters .......
5.5 Setting the System Clock .....................................
5.6 Checking System Usage (System Reports) .........
5.6.1 Obtaining System Reports ............................
5.6.2 Clearing the Reports .....................................
5.7 Delivering Messages .............................................
5.7.1 Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes
(Broadcasting Messages) ..............................
5.7.2 Delivering Messages to Specified
Mailboxes......................................................
5.7.3 Checking Mailbox Distribution ....................
5.8 Customizing the System Managers Mailbox ....
5.9 Listening to Messages...........................................
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5.1
System Managers Function

As System Manager, you perform one of the most important
jobs. You are in charge of coordinating the VPS to ensure
that it operates efficiently and effectively. You can perform
a whole range of functions using any touch-tone telephone
anywhere in the world. These include daily maintenance,
the creation and editing of mailboxes in response to requests
from Subscribers, and the deletion of unneeded mailboxes
to prevent the systems storage capacity from being exceeded. In addition to the above, you will have to set up a
special password for yourself to prevent unauthorized access to System Manager commands. You will also have
your own mailbox number, set to either 99, 999 (default
value), 9999 or 99999 (these values can be changed),
through which Subscribers will be able to contact you.
Before starting system management

Use the Worksheets provided to record the information you
will need to manage the system. Just fill in the blanks with
the information requested. Once you have finished filling
out the Worksheets, you can use them as quick reference
cards to aid you in system management.
5-2
System Manager
5.2
Accessing the System Managers

Mailbox
Every job of the System Manager gets started by accessing
the System Managers mailbox. To access that mailbox,
you will need the following information beforehand.
System Managers Mailbox Number
It has been assigned as 99, 999, 9999 or 99999.
It depends upon the mailbox number length in System
Programming.
Password of the System Managers Mailbox
The VPS requests to enter the password if it has been
assigned. You are responsible for assigning by entering
the System Managers service.
To Access the System Managers Mailbox

1 Dial an extension number which is connected to the Voice
Call VPS
Mail service. If your VPS does not have one, call any
number and press [#] [6] (Service Access Command).
You will hear:
Please enter your partys mailbox number.
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line.
To call the operator, press [0].
+ Sys. Mgr.
Mailbox No.
Password +
System Managers
Main Command Menu
2 Press
, then enter the System Managers mailbox

number (99, 999, 9999, or 99999).
Enter your password, followed by [#].
3 Enter the password followed by
. You are now in the
main command menu.

To receive the message, press [1].
To deliver a message, press [2].
To customize your mailbox, press [3].
To check the mailbox distribution, press [4].
For a system report, press [5].
For other features, press [6].
To end this call, press [ ].
System Manager
5-3
5.3
Your primary duty as System Manager will be to create
mailboxes for new VPS Subscribers and to keep the system
organized by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes.
You will also have the task of the System Administrator.
All you need to carry out such a job is the mailbox number.
5.3.1 Creating and Editing a Mailbox

One of your jobs as System Manager is to create new mailboxes for established Subscribers and edit a mailbox for
new Subscribers instead of the System Administrator. This
allows established Subscribers to expand their systems and
forms the basis for new Subscribers systems. To create a
new mailbox, you will have to answer a number of prompts.
These enable or disable certain functions related with the
Subscribers mailbox. Make sure to record each of these
decisions for each mailbox on the Worksheets provided.
System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
Mailbox
Setup
Class of
Service
Clock
Setting
Assign
& Edit
Delete
Reset
Password
Mailbox No.
XXXX
Go to
Step 6
See Setting up Mailboxes in Chapter 4 for detailed information.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Log in the main command menu.

Press 6 for Other Features.
Press 1 to set up a mailbox.
Press 1 to assign and edit the mailbox.
Enter the mailbox number.
Press 2 to accept.
Subscribers Voiced Name

To install a mailbox in the system, you must record the
Subscribers name. The VPS allows you to record the name
for a maximum of four seconds, and the name should be
spoken slowly and clearly. It should be the name by which
the Subscriber is most commonly called, because this will
be the name he and the system will use for notification of
messages or announcements.
7 The current owners name is played.

Press 1 to record a new name.
8 Record the name and press 1 .
9 Confirm the owners name and press 2 to accept it.
5-4
System Manager
5.3
Extension Number
10 The current extension number is played.
Press 1 to enter a new extension.
11 Enter the extension number.
12 Confirm the extension number and press 2 to accept it.
Initial 3 or 4 Letters of Subscribers Last Name

13 The current owners name is played.
Press 1 to enter a new owners name by spelling.
14 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the owners last name.
15 Confirm the owners name and press 2 to accept it.
Class of Service No.

16 The current Class of Service number is played.
Press 1 to change the COS number.
17 Enter the COS number (1 64).

18 Confirm the COS number and press 2 to accept it.
Interview Mailbox No.
19 The current interview mailbox number is played.
Press 1 to set a new interview mailbox number.
These numbers should be different from the owners mailbox number.
20 Enter the new interview mailbox number.

21 Confirm the interview mailbox number and press 2 to accept
it.
All Calls Transfer to Mailbox

22 The current status of all calls transferring is played.
Press 1 to change the current setting (enable or disable).
The mailbox assignment operation is finished and you will
go to the prompt of step 3.
You can continue assigning or editing other mailboxes by
repeating steps 4 22.
To return to the main command menu, press
twice.
Tip:
Step 7, 10, 13, 19

When editing an already assigned mailbox.
If you want to delete the current settings, you can press [3].
If you do not want to change the settings, you can press [2].
System Manager
5-5
5.3
5.3.2. Deleting a Mailbox

Occasionally, a Subscriber may ask you to delete his mailbox because it is no longer needed. This is one of your
tasks as System Manager. All you need to carry out the
request is the mailbox number.
See Deleting a Mailbox in Chapter 4.
System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
Mailbox
Setup
Class of
Service
Clock
Setting
Assign
& Edit
Delete
Reset
Password
Mailbox No.
XXXX
Delete
Keep
If the mailbox that you wish to delete is being used, the action is canceled with the prompt Sorry, cannot delete the
mailbox now.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tip:

Press 1 to set up a mailbox menu.
Press 2 to delete the mailbox.
Step 6
You can keep the mailbox by pressing [2].
5.3.3 Deleting a Mailbox Password

If a Subscriber does happen to forget it, you can erase the
current password. This will allow the Subscriber to set a
new one. See Resetting a Mailbox Password in Chapter
4.
System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
Mailbox
Setup
Class of
Service
Clock
Setting
Assign
& Edit
Delete
Reset
Password
Mailbox No.
XXXX
Delete
Keep
Tip:
5-6
System Manager
1
2
3
4
5
6

Press 1 for the Setup Mailbox Menu.
Press 3 to reset the password.
Press 1 to delete the password.
Step 6
You can keep the password by pressing [2].
5.4

Parameters
Each Class of Service defines a set of services available for
Subscribers. A maximum of 64 Class of Service can be established. You can set each Class of Service from a telephone. For the details of individual description, see
Setting Class of Service Parameters in Chapter 4. COS
No. 63 and No. 64 have been assigned to the Message Manager and the System Manager respectively.
System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
Mailbox
Setup
Class of
Service
Clock
Setting
1
2
3
4
Go to
Step 4

Press 2 to set the Class of Service.
Enter the COS number (1 64).
Message Notification Status *2
Auto Forwarding Status *1, *2
Note:
*1
*2
*1, *2
: Do not set in the COS No. 63 (Message Manager)

: Do not set in the COS No. 64 (System Manager)
Personal Greeting Length

5 The current setting is played.
Press 1 to change the setting.
6 Enter the personal greeting length (8 60 seconds).

The value is automatically raised to a unit by four second
increment.
7 Confirm your entry and press 2 to accept it.
New Message Retention Time

9 Enter the retention time (up to 30 days).
Saved Message Retention Time

Press 1 to change the setting (up to 30 days/0: Unlimited).
12 Enter the retention time.

System Manager
5-7
5.4

Parameters
Message Length
15 Enter the message length (1 6 minutes).
Number of Messages
18 Enter the number of messages (5 100).

Total Message Time
21 Enter total message time (5 100 minutes).

Message Retrieval Order
Press 1 to change the current setting (LIFO or FIFO).
Message Scanning with Information

Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting Status

After a mailbox is entered, the system can be set to play the
system prompts after the personal greeting.

Call Waiting on Busy Status

5-8
System Manager
5.4

Parameters
Message Cancel for Live Call Screening Status

Direct Mailbox Access Status

Intercom Paging Group Number

Press 1 to change the current number.
36 Enter the group number (1 8).

Subscriber Service Prompt Mode
Press 1 3 to change the desired mode.
Tip:
Step
1
2
3
4
38
System Prompt
User 1 Prompt
User 2 Prompt
Accept the current prompt mode
Message Notification Status

Press 1 to change the setting (enable or disable).
If the Message Notification Status is enabled, go to step 41 45.
41 Press 1 5 to choose the desired Beeper Callback No.

Entry Mode or press 6 to accept it.
Tip:
Step 41
You can set the way of pager access.
Caller Select Mode
1
Without Message Mode
2
Before Message Recording Mode
3
After Message Recording Mode
4
Disable All Entry Mode (Caller cannot access pager)
5
System Manager
5-9
5.4

Parameters
6
Accept
42 The current setting of MWL Notification for Unreceived

Message is played.
43 Confirm your entry and press 2 to accept.
44 The current setting of Device Notification for Unreceived
Message is played.
45 Confirm your entry and press 2 to accept.

If the External Message Delivery Status is enabled, you can set the
prompt mode for receiving external delivery messages.
47 Press 1 4 to choose the desired mode or press 5 to

accept it.
Tip:
Step 47
System Prompt
1
User 1 Prompt
2
User 2 Prompt
3
Selective Prompt
4
Accept
5
Auto Forwarding Status

Press 1 to change or 2 to accept.
If Auto Forwarding is enabled, go to step 49 55.
49
50
51
52
Press 1 to change the mailbox number.

Confirm your entry and press 2 to accept it.
Press 1 to change delay time.
53
54
The delay time is the amount of time after which the message will
be automatically forwarded. For example, 1 hour and 15 minutes
is 115#, 30 minutes is 30#.
Confirm your entry and press 2 to accept it.
Press 1 to change the current forwarding mode (copy or
move).
5-10
System Manager
5.5

You can set the clock of the VPS from your own telephone.
It is important to set the exact time as Message Waiting Notification, External Message Delivery, redialing and rescheduling of External Message Delivery or automatic message deletion are scheduled according to this setting.
The System Administrator or the Message Manager can also
set the clock.
The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate
when daylight saving time begins and when it ends. See
Daylight Saving Time in Chapter 4.
System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
Mailbox
Setup
Class of
Service
Clock
Setting
Go to
Step 4
Tip:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Press 3 to set the time and date.
Press 1 to change the current time.
Enter the current time and press
.
Press 1 for AM or 2 for PM.
Press 2 to accept the time.
Press 1 to change the current date.
Enter the current month and press
.
Enter the day and press
.
Enter the last two digits of the year and press
Press 2 to accept the date.
Step 3
You cannot access the clock setting menu if the System
Administrator or the Message Manager is editing the time.
Step 5
If you press [0] for help here:
For example, to enter 5 oclock, press [5] and [#] or to enter
5:15, press [5], [1], [5] and [#].
Step 9
If you press [0] for help with this setting:
For example, to enter January, press [1] and [#].
System Manager
5-11
5.6
Checking System Usage (System

Reports)
You can output eight types of System Reports to help monitor the VPS operating status. The reports can be sent via the
RS-232C port either to a printer or a terminal. The following eight report options are available.
The System Administrator is also able to output system reports. Details of each report are described System Reports
in Chapter 7.
5.6.1 Obtaining System Reports

1
2
3
4
System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
Press 1 to obtain the report.

To obtain the Mailbox Usage Report, go to the next step.
5 Enter the mailbox number.
System
Report

Press 5 for the System Report Menu.
Press 1 8 to obtain the desired report.
To get the information about mailboxes from No. 200 to No. 209,
enter 20#. If a [#] is entered for each digit of mailbox numbers
(e.g., [#] [#] [#] for 3-digit mailbox numbers), then all reports will
be printed and you will return to the System Report Menu.
6 Press 1 to specify the mailbox range, and enter the mailbox
Obtain
Report
number or press 2 to obtain all mailbox usage counts.

This mailbox number is the upper limit of the mailbox range. The
mailbox number entered in step 5 is the lower limit of the range.
Tip:
5-12
System Manager
Step 3
1
Disk Usage Report
2
Port Usage Report
3
4
Mailbox Parameter Report
5
Call Account Report
6
Class of Service Parameter Report
7
Fax Call Report
8
Mailbox Parameter Report is displayed as Mailbox
Assignments. Also, Class of Service Parameter Report is
displayed as COS Assignments in Chapter 7.
5.6
Checking System Usage (System

Reports)
5.6.2 Clearing the Reports

You can clear the counts of the following reports.
Port Usage Report
Disk Usage Report
Fax Call Report
1-3 Same as Obtaining System Reports.

System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
System
Report
2
1
5
2
Clear
Report
Here, press 2 to clear the Disk Usage Reports, 3 to clear the

Port Usage Reports, 4 to clear the Mailbox Usage Reports,
or 8 to clear the Fax Call Report.
4 Press 2 to clear the reports.
To clear the Mailbox Usage Reports, go to the next step.
5 Enter the mailbox number.
If [#] is entered, all Mailbox Usage Reports are cleared.
6 Press 1 to specify the mailbox range, and enter the mailbox
number.
Press 2 to clear all Mailbox Usage Reports.
System Manager
5-13
5.7
Delivering Messages
Two ways of message delivery are available. You can also
check whether each message has been delivered successfully.
5.7.1 Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes (Broadcasting Messages)

You can deliver an identical message to all VPS Subscribers
at the same time. This procedure is referred to as Broadcasting Messages, and the message to be broadcast is recorded in the System Managers mailbox. This feature is
useful for informing all Subscribers about current VPS status such as remaining hard disk capacity, requesting that unnecessary messages be erased, etc.
System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
Deliver
Message
Record
Broadcast
Message
Deliver
Message
1
2
3
4
5
Go to
Step 4

Press 2 to deliver a message.
Press 1 to record a broadcast message.
Record a broadcast message and press 1 .
Press 2 to accept.
5.7.2 Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes

You can also deliver messages to more than one Subscribers mailboxes by specifying them.
You can designate messages as private, urgent and their delivery date and time.
System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
Deliver
Message
Record
Broadcast
Message
Deliver
Message
Go to
Step 4
5-14
System Manager
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Enter the mailbox number of the intended recipient.
Press 2 to accept the number if it is correct.
Press 1 to record a message.
State your message at the tone and press 1 .
Press 2 to accept.
Press 1 to specify the delivery time and the private status.
Press 1 to specify the delivery time.
Enter the time and
.
5.7
Delivering Messages
13 Enter the date (the day of the month) and
.
14 Press 2 to accept.
15 Press 1 to set this message to a private message. Otherwise,
press 2 .
Tip:
Step 4
You can enter by name if you press [#] [1] first.
You can use a System Group Distribution List by specifying its
number.
Step 5
You can add mailbox numbers by pressing [2], review the
mailing list by pressing [3] and cancel message transfer by
pressing [ ].
Step 9
You can end message delivery and return to the main command
menu by pressing [2].
5.7.3 Checking Mailbox Distribution

You can check whether or not messages have been delivered
to recipients.
System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
Check
Mailbox
Distribution
1
2
3
4

Press 4 to check distribution status.
Press 3 to cancel the message or delete verification.
Press 1 to delete verification of this message, or 2 to cancel
message delivery.
Go to
Step 3
Tip:
Step 3
You can listen to the message by pressing [1].
You can check the previous message by pressing [1] twice.
You can check the next message by pressing [2].
System Manager
5-15
5.8
Customizing the System Managers

Mailbox
In order to ensure system security, you can establish a password consisting of up to eight numeric characters. Anyone
requesting access to the System Managers service will then
be required to enter this password before proceeding.
System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
Then you will hear the current setting.

3 Press 1 to change the mailbox password.
4 Enter the password and
.
Customize
Mailbox
Go to
Step 3
Tip:
5-16
1 Log in the main command menu.

2 Press 3 to customize your mailbox.
System Manager
Step 4
If you do not need the password, you can press [#].
However, it is recommended to set the password to protect your
mailbox.
5.9
Listening to Messages
Subscribers may call you to ask you to create new mailboxes, to delete unneeded ones, to delete the password as
they have forgotten theirs, to change the COS number, to
authorize a special feature, etc. You can receive these messages left in the System Managers mailbox in the following
manner.
System Managers
Main Command Menu
1
Receive
Message
Go to
Step 3
Tip:

2 The VPS plays the number of new messages. Press 1 to
listen to the messages.
3 The VPS plays the message along with the information on who
is the sender and when it was recorded. Press 0 to show the
whole menu (for Help).
Step 3
You do not have to listen to the whole menu if you do not wish
to.
You can end your call by pressing [#] [9].
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Repeat this message

Play the previous message
Play the next message
Erase this message
Reply
Rewind
Fast forward
Transfer
Message scan
System Manager
5-17
Chapter 6
Message Managers Guide
This chapter explains the Message Managers function
and provides step-by-step instructions for message
management tasks such as routing messages
in the General Delivery Mailbox.
Contents
6.1 Message Managers Function ................................ 6-2
6.2 Accessing the Message Managers Mailbox .......... 6-3
6.3 Managing the General Delivery Mailbox .............. 6-5
6.3.1 Listening to Messages ...................................... 6-5
6.3.2 Transferring Messages ..................................... 6-6
6.4 Setting up Message Waiting Notification .............. 6-7
6.4.1 Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status ............ 6-7
6.4.2 Setting Notification by Calling Status ............. 6-7
6.4.2.1 Setting Device Status .................................. 6-7
6.4.2.2 Assigning Notification Numbers ................ 6-8
6.5 Customizing the Message Managers
Mailbox .............................................................. 6-10
6.5.1 Message Managers Password ......................... 6-10
6.5.2 Operators Extensions ...................................... 6-10
6.6 Setting the System Clock ........................................ 6-11
6.7 Recording Company Messages .............................. 6-12
6.7.1 Recording Company Greetings ....................... 6-12
6.7.2 Recording Company Name ............................. 6-12
6.7.3 Recording Department Dialing
Menu Messages .......................................... 6-13
6.7.4 Recording Custom Service Menu Messages ... 6-14
6.7.5 Recording Voice Labels for Mailbox Lists ..... 6-15
6.7.6 Recording User Prompts .................................. 6-15
6.7.7 Recording Selection Menus ............................. 6-16
List of Modifiable Prompts ........................................... 6-18
6.1
Message Managers Function

As Message Manager, you take care of the General Delivery
Mailbox, recording company greetings, and voice prompts
by accessing your mailbox with number 98, 998 (default
value), 9998 or 99998 (these values can be changed). You
will also be responsible for answering and attending to calls
that have been transferred by the VPS.
You will also transfer messages recorded in the General Delivery Mailbox to their destination mailboxes. When someone is calling from a rotary telephone, the VPS may guide
him to the General Delivery Mailbox and allow him to leave
his message there. You will then transfer the message from
the General Delivery Mailbox to the mailbox of the intended party, depending upon the contents of the message.
The VPS can have up to 32 company greetings for both
business and non-business hour greetings. Depending on
the companys working hours, you will record these greetings and select which one is to be delivered to each port of
the VPS.
As Message Manager, you can also modify prerecorded
prompts from the Automated Attendant and Voice Mail service. You can record your own prompts from your telephone at any time simply by specifying the prompt number
and stating the new one into your telephone.
Before starting message management

Use the Worksheets provided to record the information you
will need to do your tasks throughout the system. Just fill in
the blanks with the information requested. Once you have
finished filling out the Worksheets, you can use them as
quick reference cards to aid you in message management.
6-2
Message Manager
6.2
Accessing the Message Managers

Mailbox
You can gain access to Message Managers service by entering your mailbox. To enter that mailbox, you will need
the following information beforehand.
Telephone Number Directly Connected to the Voice Mail
Service
If your VPS does not have one, call any number and
press [#] [6] (Service Access Command).
Message Managers Mailbox Number
It has been assigned as 98, 998, 9998, or 99998.
It depends upon the mailbox number length in System
Programming.
Password of the Message Managers Mailbox
The VPS requests you to enter the password if it has been
assigned. You are responsible for assigning it by
entering the Message Managers service.
To access the message managers mailbox

1 Dial an extension number which is connected to the Voice
Mail service.
Call VPS

If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line.
+ Msg. Mgr.
Mailbox No.
Password +
2 Press
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
, then enter the Message Managers mailbox

number (98, 998, 9998, or 99998).
3 Enter the password followed by
. You will hear the
main command menu.
Message Manager
6-3
6.2
Accessing the Message Managers

Mailbox
To transfer general delivery mailbox messages, press
[1].
To set up message waiting notification, press [2].
To customize your mailbox, press [3].
To set the clock, press [4].
To modify message, press [5].
To end this call, press [ ].
6-4
Message Manager
6.3
Managing the General Delivery

Mailbox
One of your duties as Message Manager will be to check the
General Delivery Mailbox for messages and forward them
to the appropriate mailbox. This can be done at any time
with your telephone. You can listen to the messages in the
General Delivery Mailbox and transfer the message to a
Subscribers mailbox or delete the message.
6.3.1 Listening to Messages

By accessing the Message Managers mailbox, you can
monitor the status of the General Delivery Mailbox and listen to messages stored in it. After listening to a message,
you can transfer it to the mailbox of the intended recipient
and erase it.
Message Managers
Main Command Menu

2 The VPS plays the number of messages. Press 1 to listen
to the messages.
Receive
Message
3 The VPS plays the number of messages, and then play the
message with the message information. Press 0 to listen
to the whole menu (for Help).
You can end your call by pressing
9 .
Go to
Step 3
Tip:
Step 3
You do not have to listen to the whole menu if you do not wish
to.
Repeat this message
1
1 1 Play the previous message
2
Erase this message
3
Reply
4
Rewind
5
Fast forward
6
Transfer
7
Message scan
8
Message Manager
6-5
6.3
Managing the General Delivery

Mailbox
6.3.2 Transferring Messages

You can transfer messages left in the General Delivery
Mailbox to the mailboxes of intended subscribers, appending additional voice comments if necessary. Once a message has been transferred, the original can be deleted from
the General Delivery Mailbox.

2 Press 1 to transfer messages from the general delivery
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
Transfer
from G.D.M
Repeat Next
Erase Reply Transfer Help

Mailbox No.
XXXX
Change
Accept
Repeat
information
Transfer
Transfer
w/o Comment w. Comment
Cancel
Add
mailbox
Review
list
4
5
6
7
8
mailbox.
The VPS plays the first (next/last) message. Press 7 to
transfer the message.
Enter the destination mailbox number.
Press 2 to accept the number.
Press 2 to transfer with comment.
Record your comment and press 1 .
Press 2 to accept.
Go to
Step 7
Tip:
6-6
Message Manager
Step 6
You can transfer without comment by pressing [1], add mailbox
number by pressing [3], review mailing list by pressing [4], or
cancel message transfer by pressing [5].
6.4
Setting up Message Waiting

Notification
You can have the VPS notify that unplayed messages are
waiting in your mailbox. You do not need to regularly
check your mailbox.
This feature has been authorized at the factory.
Two types of message waiting notification are available: notification by message waiting lamp and notification by calling. They can be enabled or disabled respectively.
6.4.1 Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status

The VPS illuminates the message waiting lamp on your telephone when a new message is recorded in your mailbox.
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
Status.
Setting
M.W.N.
1
Change
M.W.Lamp
Status

2 Press 2 to set Message Waiting Notification.
3 Press 1 to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification
4 Press
Change
Way of
Notification
Assign
Tel No.
1 to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification

status, or 2 to accept it.
Go to
Step 4
6.4.2 Setting Notification by Calling Status

The VPS calls the preset telephone or beeper when a new
message is recorded in your mailbox. Set the following
three parameters as appropriate.
6.4.2.1 Setting Device Status

For each device, the notification is enabled, disabled or enabled on the preset schedule.
If you want to enable it on the schedule, contact your System Administrator as you are not allowed to set the schedule
yourself.
Message Manager
6-7
6.4

Notification
1-2
3
4
5
Message Manager's
Main Command Menu
1
Setting
M.W.N.
Change
M.W.Lamp
Status
Change
Device
Status
Assign
Tel No.
Same as the Message Waiting Lamp Status.

Press 2 to change the way of notification.
Enter the device number.
Press 1 3 to select the status.
Device No.
1
Schedule
2
Continuously
3
Not Used
Tip:
Step
1
2
3
3Schedule (enabled on the schedule)

Continuously (enabled whole day)
Not Used (disabled whole day)
6.4.2.2 Assigning Notification Numbers

You can set up to three telephone or beeper numbers where
you wish to receive notification. You can use the keys 0
to 9, a tone/pulse switch, and the beeper callback number
display entry code X.
If you add the Beeper Callback No. Entry Code at the end of
a beeper number, the notification is made in a little different
way. The VPS asks the caller to enter the number to which
he wishes to be called and displays it on the LCD of your
beeper. The timing of the callback number entry is either
before, after or without recording message. It depends on
System Programming.
It is also possible to have the caller select whether or not
enter the number.
You must have your System Manager authorize the use of
the Beeper Callback No. Entry Code.
1-2 Same as the Message Waiting Lamp Status.

3 Press 3 to assign the telephone number.
6-8
Message Manager
6.4

Notification
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
Setting
M.W.N.
Change
M.W.Lamp
Status
Change
Device
Status
Assign
Tel No.
4 Press 1 to change the first telephone number, 2 to
5
6
7
8
change the second telephone number or 3 to change the

third telephone number.
Press 1 to set the telephone number.
Enter the telephone number.
Press 2 to accept.
Select 1 to be notified by telephone or 2 by a beeper.
Go to
Step 4
Tip:
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
Change the telephone number
Accept
Review
Add more digits
Insert a pause
Set dial mode
Insert a wait for dial tone
Insert a beeper display command
Message Manager
6-9
6.5
Customizing the Message

Managers Mailbox
As Message Manager, you can customize your mailbox by
specifying the password and the extension numbers of the
operators 1, 2 and 3.
6.5.1 Message Managers Password

You can specify your password from your telephone at any
time to protect the General Delivery Mailbox and company
greetings. The password can have up to 8 numeric characters and must be entered to execute the message management operation.
6.5.2 Operators Extensions

A caller who would like to have the help of the operator is
transferred to the extension specified by you. You can then
specify the extension which the caller will connect to when
he enters [0], the operator key.
Up to three operators (Operator 1, 2, 3) can be specified for
both Day and Night modes respectively.
It is usual to set your extension as Operator 1.
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
Customize
Mailbox

2 Press 3 to customize your mailbox.
3 The VPS plays the current password setting. Press 1 to
4
5
6
Go to
Step 3
7
8
9
Tip:
6-10
Message Manager
change the password.

Enter the password and
.
The VPS repeats what you entered. Press 2 to accept.
The VPS plays the current operators extension setting.
Press 1 to change the operators extension.
If the operators extension is unassigned, you will go to step
7.
Enter the extension.
The VPS will repeat the extension you just entered. Press
2 to accept.
Repeat the steps 6 to 8 to assign the extension for the day
mode and night mode of each operator.
Step 3, 6
You can accept the current settings by pressing [2].
6.6

The System Administrator or the System Manager sets the
present date and time of the VPS from his own telephone,
but also you, the Message Manager, can set them if the system clock is not being accessed by the System Manager or
the System Administrator. It is important to set the exact
time since Message Waiting Notification, External Message
Delivery, redialing and rescheduling of External Message
Delivery or automatic message deletion are scheduled according to this setting.
The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate
when daylight saving time begins and when it ends. See
Daylight Saving Time in Chapter 4.
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
Clock
Setting
Go to
Step 3
Tip:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Press 4 to set the time and date.
Press 1 to change the current setting.
Enter the current time and
.
Enter 1 for AM or 2 for PM.
Press 2 to accept.
Press 1 to change current setting.
Enter the month and press
.
Enter the day and press
.
Enter the last two digits of the year and press
Press 2 to accept.
Step 2
You cannot access the clock setting menu if the System
Administrator or the System Manager is editing the time.
Step 4
If you press [0] for help here:
For example, to enter 5 oclock, press [5] and [#] or to enter
5:15, press [5], [1], [5] and [#].
Step 8
If you press [0] for help with this setting:
For example, to enter January, press [1] and [#].
Message Manager
6-11
6.7
Recording Company Messages

You are responsible for recording messages or greetings
which are to be recorded by each user respectively.
6.7.1 Recording Company Greetings

You can record up to 32 company greetings and erase them
as appropriate. The Company Greeting is assigned port-byport and on a Day/Night basis by the System Administrator.
1
2
3
4
5
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
5
Modify
Message
Record
Company
Greetings
Go to
Step 4
7
8
9
Tip:

Press 5 to modify messages.
Press 1 to record company greetings.
Enter the company greeting number (1 32).
The VPS plays the current greeting. Press 1 to change the
greeting. If you have not recorded the company greeting, go
to step 7.
Press 1 to record the greeting.
If you press [2], the current company greeting is erased.
Record the company greeting and press 1 .
Press 2 to accept.
You can record other company greetings by repeating steps
3 to 8.
Step 4
If you have not recorded the greeting for this number, you can
directly record a greeting.
Step 7
You have up to 6 minutes for recording.
Step 8
You can review the recording by pressing [1], record a new one
by pressing [3], add recording by pressing [4], or erase and exit
by pressing [ ].
6.7.2 Recording Company Name

You will record the company name that the external delivery message receiver will hear when he forgets the external
message delivery password. The VPS provides a callback
message including the company name.
6-12
Message Manager
6.7

1
2
3
4
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
5
Modify
Message
Record
Company
Name

Press 2 to record company name.
The VPS plays the current company name.
Press 1 to change the name.
If you have not recorded a company name, go to step 6.
5 Press 1 to record the name.
6 Record the company name and press 1 .
Go to
Step 4
Tip:
Step 5
You can erase the company name by pressing [2].
Step 6
Step 8
by pressing [ ].
6.7.3 Recording Department Dialing Menu Messages

Rather than dial long, complicated numbers, it is possible to
reach an extension by entering one digit. Due to the fact
that there are only nine digits (19) to choose from, the
caller is limited to nine department dialing numbers. The
VPS allows you to record or erase the department dialing
menu message that provides the voiced names of departments to which the caller will be transferred by department
dialing.

2 Press 5 to modify messages.
3 Press 3 to change the Department Dialing Programming
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
menu.
Modify
Message
Record
Department
Dialing Menu
Go to
Step 4
4 The VPS plays the current Department Dialing Menu.

7
Press 1 to record the Department Dialing Menu.

If you have not recorded a menu, go to step 6.
5 Press 1 to record.
6 Record the menu and press 1 .
Message Manager
6-13
6.7

Tip:
Step 5
You can erase the department dialing menu by pressing [2].
Step 6
Step 7
by pressing [ ].
6.7.4 Recording Custom Service Menu Messages

The VPS accommodates up to 100 custom services.
You will either record the menu or delete it if appropriate.
1
2
3
4
5
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
5
Modify
Message
Record
Custom
Menu
6
7
8
9
Go to
Step 4
Tip:
6-14
Message Manager

Press 4 to record a custom menu.
Enter the custom number (1 100).
The VPS plays the current menu. Press 1 to change the
menu.
If you have not recorded a menu for this number, go to
step 7.
Press 1 to record menu.
Record the menu and press 1 .
Press 2 to accept.
You can record other menus by repeating steps 4 to 8.
Step 4
You can record the final guidance message for Exit by
pressing [0].
Step 6
You can erase the menu by pressing [2].
Step 7
Step 8
by pressing [ ].
6.7
6.7.5 Recording Voice Labels for Mailbox Lists

Up to 20 mailbox distribution group lists can be created by
the System Administrator. You can either record or erase
the name of each list.
1
2
3
4
5
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
5
Modify
Message
Mailbox
List
Go to
Step 4
6
7
8
9
Tip:

Press 5 to record labels for the mailbox lists.
Enter the mailbox list number to be labeled.
The VPS plays the current label. Press 1 to change the
label.
If you have not recorded a voice label for this mailbox list,
go to step 7.
Press 1 to record the label.
Record the label and press 1 .
Press 2 to accept.
You can record other mailbox list labels by repeating steps
4 to 8.
Step 6
You can erase the label by pressing [2].
Step 7
Step 8
by pressing [ ].
6.7.6 Recording User Prompts

To support the Multi-Lingual service in your VPS, you have
to record the User 1 Prompt or the User 2 Prompt.
Once the recorded prompts have been saved in the personal
computer with the command SAVE via RS-232C, it is
possible to restore them with the command LOAD in the
VPS at any time (see Utility Commands in Chapter 7).
Note:
The list of modifiable prompts and prompt numbers appear

at the end of this chapter.

2 Press 5 to modify messages.
Message Manager
6-15
6.7

3 Press 6 to modify user prompts.
4 Press 1 to change user prompt 1, or 2 to change user
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
5
6
7
5
Modify
Message
Modify
User
Prompt
Go to
Step 4
9
10
11
12
Tip:
prompt 2.
Press 1 to change the prompt that you are specifying.
Enter the prompt number.
Press 1 to change the prompt.
If you press [2], you will be back to step 6.
The VPS plays the current recording. Press 1 to change
the prompt.
If you press [2], the current recording is kept.
Press 1 to record a new prompt.
If you press [2], the current prompt is erased.
State a prompt and press 1 .
Press 2 to accept.
You can record other user prompts by repeating steps 6 to
11.
Step 5
By pressing [2], you can record the prompt in a row without
reviewing the current recording. You will go to step 9.
Step 6
For the numbers of the modifiable prompts, see at the end of
this chapter.
Step 7, 9
By pressing [3], you can turn off the specified prompt.
Step 10
Step 12
by pressing [ ].
6.7.7 Recording Selection Menus

Before using the Multi-Lingual service, it is necessary for
you to record the selection menu of the languages that the
VPS supports.
Listening to this selection menu, the caller can choose one
he wishes to use in the subsequent operation.
[Example]
You will record:
To use our voice message service in English, press [8], in
Spanish, press [9].
6-16
Message Manager
6.7

1
2
3
4
Message Managers
Main Command Menu
1
5
Modify
Message
7
Change
Selection
Menu
Go to
Step 4
Tip:

Press 7 to change the selection menu.
The VPS plays the current selection menu.
Press 1 to change the menu.
If you have not recorded the selection menu, go to step 6.
5 Press 1 to record the menu.
If you press [2], the current menu is erased.
6 Record the menu and press 1 .
Step 6
Step 7
by pressing [ ].
Message Manager
6-17
List of Modifiable Prompts

The table below shows the modifiable prompts. Record them as the User 1 or the User 2
prompts. Some of the modifiable prompts are listed along with the linked prompt number. In
order to make certain sentences in one voice, record the related prompts together (see Voice
Prompts in Chapter 3).
Prompt
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
6-18
Modifiable Prompt
ZERO
ONE
TWO
THREE
FOUR
FIVE
SIX
SEVEN
EIGHT
NINE
TEN
ELEVEN
TWELVE
THIRTEEN
FOURTEEN
FIFTEEN
SIXTEEN
SEVENTEEN
EIGHTEEN
NINETEEN
TWENTY
TWENTY ONE
TWENTY TWO
TWENTY THREE
TWENTY FOUR
TWENTY FIVE
TWENTY SIX
TWENTY SEVEN
TWENTY EIGHT
TWENTY NINE
THIRTY
THIRTY ONE
THIRTY TWO
Message Manager
Prompt
No.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Modifiable Prompt
THIRTY THREE
THIRTY FOUR
THIRTY FIVE
THIRTY SIX
THIRTY SEVEN
THIRTY EIGHT
THIRTY NINE
FORTY
FORTY ONE
FORTY TWO
FORTY THREE
FORTY FOUR
FORTY FIVE
FORTY SIX
FORTY SEVEN
FORTY EIGHT
FORTY NINE
FIFTY
FIFTY ONE
FIFTY TWO
FIFTY THREE
FIFTY FOUR
FIFTY FIVE
FIFTY SIX
FIFTY SEVEN
FIFTY EIGHT
FIFTY NINE
SIXTY
SIXTY ONE
SIXTY TWO
SIXTY THREE
SIXTY FOUR
SIXTY FIVE

Prompt
No.
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
Modifiable Prompt
SIXTY SIX
SIXTY SEVEN
SIXTY EIGHT
SIXTY NINE
SEVENTY
SEVENTY ONE
SEVENTY TWO
SEVENTY THREE
SEVENTY FOUR
SEVENTY FIVE
SEVENTY SIX
SEVENTY SEVEN
SEVENTY EIGHT
SEVENTY NINE
EIGHTY
EIGHTY ONE
EIGHTY TWO
EIGHTY THREE
EIGHTY FOUR
EIGHTY FIVE
EIGHTY SIX
EIGHTY SEVEN
EIGHTY EIGHT
EIGHTY NINE
NINETY
NINETY ONE
NINETY TWO
NINETY THREE
NINETY FOUR
NINETY FIVE
NINETY SIX
NINETY SEVEN
NINETY EIGHT
NINETY NINE
HUNDRED
MORE THAN HUNDRED
Prompt
No.
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
Modifiable Prompt
AM
PM
O'CLOCK
ONE
TWO
THREE
FOUR
FIVE
SIX
SEVEN
EIGHT
NINE
TEN
ELEVEN
TWELVE
ONE
TWO
THREE
FOUR
FIVE
SIX
SEVEN
EIGHT
NINE
TEN
ELEVEN
TWELVE
ONE
TWO
THREE
FOUR
FIVE
SIX
SEVEN
EIGHT
NINE
(AM HOUR)
(AM HOUR)
(AM HOUR)
(AM HOUR)
(AM HOUR)
(AM HOUR)
(AM HOUR)
(AM HOUR)
(AM HOUR)
(AM HOUR)
(AM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(PM HOUR)
(AM HOUR)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
Message Manager
6-19

Prompt
No.
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
6-20
Modifiable Prompt
TEN
ELEVEN
TWELVE
THIRTEEN
FOURTEEN
FIFTEEN
SIXTEEN
SEVENTEEN
EIGHTEEN
NINETEEN
TWENTY
TWENTY ONE
TWENTY TWO
TWENTY THREE
TWENTY FOUR
TWENTY FIVE
TWENTY SIX
TWENTY SEVEN
TWENTY EIGHT
TWENTY NINE
THIRTY
THIRTY ONE
THIRTY TWO
THIRTY THREE
THIRTY FOUR
THIRTY FIVE
THIRTY SIX
THIRTY SEVEN
THIRTY EIGHT
THIRTY NINE
FORTY
FORTY ONE
FORTY TWO
FORTY THREE
FORTY FOUR
FORTY FIVE
Message Manager
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
Prompt
No.
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
Modifiable Prompt
FORTY SIX
FORTY SEVEN
FORTY EIGHT
FORTY NINE
FIFTY
FIFTY ONE
FIFTY TWO
FIFTY THREE
FIFTY FOUR
FIFTY FIVE
FIFTY SIX
FIFTY SEVEN
FIFTY EIGHT
FIFTY NINE
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
MONDAY
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY
SUNDAY
FIRST
SECOND
THIRD
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)
(MINUTE)

Prompt
No.
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
Modifiable Prompt
Linked to Prompt No(s).
FOURTH
FIFTH
SIXTH
SEVENTH
EIGHTH
NINTH
TENTH
ELEVENTH
TWELFTH
THIRTEENTH
FOURTEENTH
FIFTEENTH
SIXTEENTH
SEVENTEENTH
EIGHTEENTH
NINETEENTH
TWENTIETH
TWENTY FIRST
TWENTY SECOND
TWENTY THIRD
TWENTY FOURTH
TWENTY FIFTH
TWENTY SIXTH
TWENTY SEVENTH
TWENTY EIGHTH
TWENTY NINTH
THIRTIETH
THIRTY FIRST
STAR ( )
HASH (#)
PAUSE
TONE DIALING MODE
PULSE DIALING MODE
DIAL TONE
CALLBACK NUMBER
Mailbox
Message Manager
6-21

Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompt
247
and
[536], [537], [247]

[547], [247]
248
at
[314],
[415],
[417],
[417],
[449],
[538],
[552],
[590],
[538],
[248]
[416],
[248],
[248],
[450],
[248]
[553],
[248]
[248],
249
for
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
Sorry
Thank you
Messages
[258], [252]
days
minutes
seconds
[492], [255]
Enter your password, followed by # [256], [302]
257
258
Incorrect entry
You have (number)
259
260
261
262
263
264
new messages
[258], [259]
You have one new message
You have one message
There are no messages
Sorry, this function is not available [263], [264]
Please inform system manager
[263], [264]
265
266
267
268
269
Cannot be retrieved
Thank you for calling
Message Manager
Please leave a message at the tone
To end recording, press 1
[248]
[249], [418]
[249], [419]
[248]
[248]
[249], [418]
[417], [248], [249], [418]

[417], [248], [249], [419]
[538], [248], [249], [418]
[258], [259]
[258], [252]
[258], [608]
[587], [588], [264]
6-22
Message Manager
[269], [270]
[391], [269], [270]

Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompt
270
To pause and restart recording,

press 2
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
Record greeting at the tone

Record the question at the tone
Record the prompt at the tone
Record menu at the tone
Record company name at the tone
Record label at the tone
Sorry, there is no space for recording in this mailbox
To end recording, hang up or press [278], [270]
1 for more features
To end recording, hang up
To cancel your message, press ,
if you have a touch tone phone
Recording accepted
To review, press 1
[281], [282], [283], [284], [285]
278
279
280
281
[269], [270]
[278], [270]
[391], [269], [270]
[281], [287], [283], [285]

[281], [282], [283]
282
To accept, press 2
[281],
[305],
[328],
[281],
[453],
[328],
[328],
[328],
[328],
[328],
[282],
[282]
[282]
[282],
[282],
[282],
[282],
[282],
[282],
[282],
[283], [284], [285]
[283]
[442]
[479]
[482]
[442], [581], [582], [583], [584]
[442], [581], [582], [583], [584], [585]
[601]
283
To erase and try again, press 3
[281], [282], [283], [284], [285]

[281], [287], [283], [285]
[281], [282], [283]
284
285
To add, press 4
To erase and exit, press
[281], [282], [283], [284], [285]
286
287
288
Sorry, I cannot add any more

To accept the prompt, press 2
Record the recipient's name at the
tone
[281], [282], [283], [284], [285]

[281], [287], [283], [285]
[281], [287], [283], [285]
Message Manager
6-23

Prompt
No.
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
6-24
Modifiable Prompt
Sorry, no space for recording
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the
person's last name
For 'Q', press 7
For 'Z', press 9
Sorry, this name cannot be found
Sorry, there are no more matching
names
To call this person, press 1
To change to the next person, press
2
To try again, press
Extension (extension number)
Sorry, this mailbox is in use
There were (number of failure)
unsuccessful attempts to enter this
mailbox
Password entry failure
Check the password
Enter the 4 digits password
To skip setting the password, press
#
Password not assigned
This is the general delivery mailbox
To set delivery time or make this
message private, press 1
To enter your callback number,
press 1
Otherwise, press 2
Message Manager
[292], [295]
[293], [294], [295]
[293], [294], [295]
[293], [294], [295]
[292], [295]
[298], [299]
[298], [299]
[301], [302]
[301], [302]
[256], [302]
[305], [282]
[306], [307]
[306],
[313],
[359],
[381],
[385],
[389],
[433],
[350],
[307]
[307]
[328], [307]
[307]
[307]
[328], [307]
[307]
[307]

Prompt
No.
308
309
To set delivery time, press 1

For immediate delivery, press 2
Enter the time, followed by #
310
For help, press 0
311
312
Enter 1 for AM, or 2 for PM

Enter the day of the month, followed by #
To make this message private,
press 1
This message will be delivered on
(day)
Good morning
Welcome to the Voice Processing
System
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
Modifiable Prompt
Good afternoon
Good evening
Please enter your party's mailbox
number
To enter by name, press # and 1
[309], [310]
[309], [461], [310]
[309], [310]
[309], [461], [310]
[343], [539], [540], [541], [542], [310]
[313], [307]
[314], [248]
[315], [316]
[315], [316]
[317], [316]
[318], [316]
[317], [316]
[318], [316]
[319], [320]
[319], [320], [322]
[319],
[319],
[386],
[386],
[596],
[597],
[320]
[320], [322]
[320]
[320], [387]
[320]
[320]
If you are using a rotary telephone, [321], [322]

stay on the line
To call the operator, press 0
[321], [322]
[319], [320], [322]
323
324
325
326
327
To accept, press 1
For the next name, press 2
To repeat this name, press 3
To enter a new name or mailbox,
press
The mailbox number entry failure
Check the mailbox number
[323], [324], [325], [326]

[323], [324], [325], [326]
[323], [324], [325], [326]
[323], [324], [325], [326]
Message Manager
6-25

Prompt
No.
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
Modifiable Prompt
To change, press 1
[328],
[359],
[389],
[328],
[328],
[328],
[328],
[328],
[328],
[282]
[328],
[328],
[282],
[282],
[282],
[282],
[592]
[282],
[307]
[307]
[479]
[482]
[442], [581], [582], [583], [584]
[442], [581], [582], [583], [584], [585]
[601]
There was one unsuccessful attempt

to enter this mailbox
Record your name at the tone
Record the group name at the tone
Record Owners name at the tone
For example, to enter 5 o'clock
press five and #, or to enter 5:15
press 5, 1, 5 and #
[334], [335]
This message is from (name)
[334], [335]
of (company name)
Delivering message to (name)
Company name (name)
Hello, this is the voice processing
system
[339], [340], [341]
I have a message for (name)
[339], [340], [341], [351]
340
To receive the message, press 1
[339],
[339],
[340],
[340],
341
To hold this call, press 2
[339], [340], [341]

[339], [340], [341], [351]
342
343
To retrieve the call, press 2

To repeat this message, press 1
6-26
Message Manager
[340],
[340],
[572],
[572],
[341]
[341], [351]
[573], [574], [575], [576], [345]
[573], [574], [575], [345]
[343], [344], [345]

[343], [344], [346], [347], [345]
[343], [539], [540], [541], [542], [310]
[343], [543], [539], [540], [541], [346], [347], [542], [544]

Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompt
344
To reply, press 2
[343], [344], [345]

[343], [344], [346], [347], [345]
345
To end this call, press
[343],
[343],
[350],
[340],
[340],
[344],
[344],
[345]
[572],
[572],
[345]
[346], [347], [345]
[573], [574], [575], [576], [345]
[573], [574], [575], [345]
346
To rewind, press 5
[343], [344], [346], [347], [345]

[343], [543], [539], [540], [541], [346], [347], [542], [544]
347
To fast forward, press 6
[343], [344], [346], [347], [345]

[343], [543], [539], [540], [541], [346], [347], [542], [544]
348
349
Please call (telephone number)

Extension number (extension
number)
To repeat, press 1
350
351
[350], [345]
[350], [307]
[339], [340], [341], [351]
354
355
If you want me to call back later,

press 3
Welcome to the general delivery
mailbox
I have a call for mailbox (mailbox
number)
Please wait a moment
Please enter your callback number
356
You can enter up to (number)
[355], [356], [357]

[355], [356], [357], [358]
357
digits
[355], [356], [357]

[355], [356], [357], [358]
358
[355], [356], [357], [358]

When you are finished hang up,
stay on the line to confirm or
change your number
The callback number is (telephone [359], [328], [307]
number)
Please hold while I page your party
Sorry, this pager is not available
I have a call for (name)
352
353
359
360
361
362
[370], [354]
[355], [356], [357]
[355], [356], [357], [358]
Message Manager
6-27

Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompt
363
385
386
Sorry, no one is available to

answer the call
To leave a message, press 1
To reach the covering extension,
press 2
To page your party, press 3
To notify your party's beeper, press
4
To enter another extension, press
Sorry, this number is not assigned
Calling the operator
Call transferred from the voice
processing system
Sorry, this line is busy
Sorry, Operator is not available to
answer the call
Please call back later
You have a call
You have a call from (name)
To answer the call, press 1
Otherwise, press 2 and hang up
This call is for (name)
from (name)
This call is from (name)
To cancel holding, press 2 now
Otherwise, I'll try your party again
To continue holding, press 1
To enter another extension, press 2
(number) other people are waiting
to connect
One other person is waiting to
connect
If you would like to hold, press 1
Please enter your party's extension
387
For department dialing, press
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
6-28
Message Manager
[364], [382]
[370], [354]
[377], [378]
[377], [378]
[381], [307]
[364], [382]
[385], [307]
[386], [320]
[386], [320], [387]
[386], [320], [387]

Prompt
No.
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
Modifiable Prompt
Custom service menu

The callback number is not as[389], [328], [307]
signed
Message from the system manager
State your comment at the tone
[391], [269], [270]
Beeper access disabled
To set call transfer status, press 1
To set up covering extension,
press 2
To set message reception mode,
press 3
To set incomplete handling status,
press 4
Call blocking enabled
Call screening enabled
Intercom paging enabled
Beeper access enabled
All transfer services disabled
To enable call blocking, press 1
To enable call screening, press 2
To enable intercom paging, press 3
To enable beeper access, press 4
To disable all transfer service,
press 5
Message reception mode is interview mode
Message reception mode is message recording mode
To set leaving a message status,
press 1
To set covering extension transfer
status, press 2
To set intercom paging status,
press 3
To set beeper access status, press 4
To set operator transfer status,
press 5
To set returning to top menu
automated attendant service status,
press 6
Message Manager
6-29

Prompt
No.
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
6-30
Modifiable Prompt
Leaving a message is enabled
Leaving a message is disabled
Covering extension transfer enabled
Covering extension transfer disabled
Intercom paging disabled
Operator transfer enabled
Operator transfer disabled
Returning to top menu automated
attendant service enabled
Returning to top menu automated
attendant service disabled
(number) messages to verify
One message to verify
No messages to verify
Message for (name)
received on (date)
Message sent on (date)
has not been received
has been erased, because message
retention time expired
To play the message, press 1
To check the previous message,
press 1 twice
To check the next message, press 2
To cancel this message or verification, press 3
No more messages
This is the last message
To delete distribution verification
of this message, press 1
To cancel message delivery, press 2
Verification deleted
Message delivery cancelled
The message is (message)
Sorry, this group is full
Message Manager
[415], [416], [248]

[415], [416], [248]
[417], [248], [249], [419]
[538], [248], [249], [418]
[417], [248], [249], [419]
[428], [429]
[428], [526]

Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompt
429
430
431
8 members maximum
This list member already exists
To add more members, press 1
To end, press 2
Telephone number is (telephone
number)
To delete all group members, press
1
This group has no members
To delete, press 1
To play the next, press 2
Group member deleted
Enter delivery list number 1 or 2
Delivery list number is (number)
To add new member, press 1
To delete members, press 2
To review, press 3
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448

[428], [429]
[433], [307]
[435], [436]
[435], [436]
[440], [441], [442]

[440], [441], [442]
[440],
[453],
[328],
[328],
[441],
[282],
[282],
[282],
[442]
[442]
[442], [581], [582], [583], [584]
[442], [581], [582], [583], [584], [585]
Sorry, this list is in use for delivery

If this list is edited, all the deliveries will then be cancelled.
To record a message for external
delivery, press 1
To check external delivery message
status, press 2
To set up mailing list, press 3
To send to one recipient, press 1
To send by mailing list, press 2
Sorry, you cannot deliver the
message
The maximum number of delivery
has already been reached
Sorry, there is no space for recording
Password is (number)
Message Manager
6-31

Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompt
449
External delivery message scheduled for (name)

on (date)
External delivery message will be
sent to (name)
right away
To change the setting, press 1
No one specified by this number
To change the telephone number,
press 1
To change the password, press 2
[449], [450], [248]
[455], [456], [457], [458]
467
To change the recipient's name,

press 3
To change the time and date, press
4
To change the password, press 1
To change the time and date, press
2
To deliver now, press only the hash
No external delivery message
pending
I was unable to reach (name)
External delivery message for
(name)
was erased
because message retention time
expired
To reschedule, press 1
468
To play the next schedule, press 2
[467], [468], [469], [470]

[468], [469], [470]
469
To repeat this schedule, press 3
[467], [468], [469], [470]

[468], [469], [470]
470
To play the previous schedule,

press 4
To cancel external message delivery, press 1
[467], [468], [469], [470]

[468], [469], [470]
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
471
6-32
Message Manager
[449], [450], [248]

[451], [452]
[451], [452]
[453], [282], [442]
[455], [456], [457], [458]
[455], [456], [457], [458]
[497], [456], [498], [499]
[455], [456], [457], [458]

[459], [460]
[459], [460]
[471], [460]
[309], [461], [310]
[464], [465], [466]

[464], [465], [466]
[464], [465], [466]
[467], [468], [469], [470]
[468], [469], [470]
[471], [460]

Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompt
472
473
474
475
476
477
Message to (name)
being delivered now
I'll redial only once
I'll redial (number)
more times
Covering extension is (extension
number)
Covering extension not assigned
To delete, press 3
Enter extension number
Group name not recorded
To erase, press 3
Owner's name erased
To record the question, press 1
To set the answer length, press 2
To erase the question, press 3
To change the answer length, press
1
To skip to the next question, press
2
[472], [473]
[485],
[490],
[491],
[486],
[486],
[486],
[486],
[487],
[487], [488]
[487], [488]
[487], [488]
[488]
487
To skip to the previous question,

press 3
[485],
[490],
[491],
[486],
[486],
[486],
[486],
[487],
[487], [488]
[487], [488]
[487], [488]
[488]
488
To go directly to a question, press

4
[485],
[490],
[491],
[486],
[486],
[486],
[486],
[487],
[487], [488]
[487], [488]
[487], [488]
[488]
489
Set the answer length using the

following options
For 4 seconds, press 1
To change this question, press 1
To erase this question, press 1
Answer length is (number)
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
490
491
492
[472], [473]
[475], [476]
[475], [476]
[328], [282], [479]
[328], [282], [482]
[485], [486], [487], [488]
[490], [486], [487], [488]

[491], [486], [487], [488]
[492], [255]
Message Manager
6-33

Prompt
No.
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
6-34
Modifiable Prompt
Enter question number, followed

by #
Question erased
Question number (number)
No question recorded
To change the personal greeting,
[497], [456], [498], [499]
press 1
To change the owner's name, press [497], [456], [498], [499]
3
To set the group distribution lists, [497], [456], [498], [499]
press 4
To change the message waiting
lamp status, press 1
To change the device status, press
2
To assign the telephone or beeper
numbers, press 3
Message waiting lamp notification
enabled
Message waiting lamp notification
disabled
Enter device number, 1 through 3
Device number is (number)
This device is for continuous use
This device is not be used
Telephone number is not assigned
First telephone number is (telephone number)
First telephone number is not
assigned
Second telephone number is
(telephone number)
Second telephone number is not
assigned
Third telephone number is (telephone number)
Third telephone number is not
assigned
Message Manager

Prompt
No.
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
Modifiable Prompt
To change the first telephone
number, press 1
To change the second telephone
number, press 2
To change the third telephone
number, press 3
I'll notify by telephone
I'll notify by beeper
Sorry, you cannot transfer a
private message
To change the no answer greeting,
press 1
To change the busy signal greeting, press 2
To change the after hours greeting,
press 3
No answer greeting is (message)
Busy signal greeting is (message)
After hours greeting is (message)
No answer greeting is not recorded
Busy signal greeting is not recorded
After hours greeting is not recorded
Greeting erased
20 members maximum
[428], [526]
Enter the mailbox number
Enter a group number, 1 through 4
Group number (number)
To change the group name, press 1 [530], [531]
[530], [531], [532], [533]
531
To add group members, press 2
[530], [531]
[530], [531], [532], [533]
532
533
534
To delete group members, press 3

To review this group, press 4
Message from the interview mailbox
[530], [531], [532], [533]

[530], [531], [532], [533]
Message Manager
6-35

Prompt
No.
535
Modifiable Prompt
538
Message from the message manager

Message recorded by (mailbox
number)
and transferred via (mailbox
number)
Message recorded on (date)
539
To play the next message, press 2
[343], [539], [540], [541], [542], [310]

[343], [543], [539], [540], [541], [346], [347], [542], [544]
[550], [539], [551]
540
To erase this message, press 3
[343], [539], [540], [541], [542], [310]

[343], [543], [539], [540], [541], [346], [347], [542], [544]
541
To reply, press 4
[343], [539], [540], [541], [542], [310]

[343], [543], [539], [540], [541], [346], [347], [542], [544]
542
To transfer this message, press 7
[343], [539], [540], [541], [542], [310]

[343], [543], [539], [540], [541], [346], [347], [542], [544]
543
To replay the previous message,

press 1 twice
To message scan, press 8
No previous message
All messages erased
Message transferred via (mailbox
number)
Message erased
These are the brief segments of
your Message
To replay the previous message,
press 1
To play the entire message, press
3
Message from (name)
was sent on (date)
To replay the previous message
information, press 1
To play the next message's information, press 2
To play the message, press 3
[343], [543], [539], [540], [541], [346], [347], [542], [544]
536
537
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
6-36
Message Manager
[536], [537], [247]

[536], [537], [247]
[538], [248]
[538], [248], [249], [418]
[343], [543], [539], [540], [541], [346], [347], [542], [544]
[547], [247]
[550], [539], [551]

[550], [539], [551]
[552], [553], [248]
[552], [553], [248]

Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompt
555
556
557
You can add up to (number)

more members
Sorry, you cannot reply
[555], [556]
558
559
The message sender is unknown

To call message sender, press 1
To record a message, press 2
This message is from the general
delivery mailbox
This is your message
Telephone number deleted
For notification by telephone,
press 1
For notification by beeper, press 2
Old message
New message
Message reception mode is set to
interview mode
Message reception mode is set to
message recording mode
Group name erased
This device is for scheduled use
Owner's name is (name)
Owner's name is not recorded
To deliver a message, press 2
[557], [558]
To check the mailbox distribution,

press 3
For automated attendant status,
press 4
For mailbox management, press 5
[340], [572], [573], [574], [575], [576], [345]

[340], [572], [573], [574], [575], [345]
For other features, press 6

For interview mailbox management, press 1
To set up message waiting notification, press 2
[340], [572], [573], [574], [575], [576], [345]
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
[555], [556]
[557], [558]
[557], [560]
[557], [561]
[557], [560]
[557], [561]
[340], [572], [573], [574], [575], [576], [345]

[340], [572], [573], [574], [575], [345]
[340], [572], [573], [574], [575], [576], [345]

[340], [572], [573], [574], [575], [345]
[340], [572], [573], [574], [575], [576], [345]
[340], [572], [573], [574], [575], [345]
Message Manager
6-37

Prompt
No.
579
580
581
Modifiable Prompt
Any digit on the telephone keypad

can be used
Enter the telephone number and
wait
To insert a pause or special command, enter the partial number and
wait for the options menu
To add more digits, press 4
[328], [282], [442], [581], [582], [583], [584]
[328], [282], [442], [581], [582], [583], [584], [585]
582
To insert a pause, press 5
[328], [282], [442], [581], [582], [583], [584]

[328], [282], [442], [581], [582], [583], [584], [585]
583
To set dial mode, press 6
[328], [282], [442], [581], [582], [583], [584]

[328], [282], [442], [581], [582], [583], [584], [585]
584
To insert a wait for dial tone,

press 7
To insert a beeper display command, press 8
You can not add any more digits
Sorry, I cannot call this number
Only extension call is available
For external message delivery,
press 3
External delivery message scheduled on (date)
To add, press 2
To use for scheduling, press 1
To use for continuously, press 2
To use not at all, press 3
To transfer, press 1
[328], [282], [442], [581], [582], [583], [584]

[328], [282], [442], [581], [582], [583], [584], [585]
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
[328], [282], [442], [581], [582], [583], [584], [585]
[587], [588], [264]

[587], [588], [264]
[590], [248]
[328], [591]
[593], [594], [595]

[593], [604], [594], [595]
To add new mailbox number, press [593], [594], [595]

3
[593], [604], [594], [595]
To review the mailing list, press 4 [593], [594], [595]
[593], [604], [594], [595]
596
597
6-38
Enter your party's mailbox number

Enter the destination mailbox
number
Message Manager
[596], [320]
[597], [320]

Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompt
598
To cancel , press
To continue, press 1
Mailbox number already specified
This is your mailbox
To repeat, press 3
Sorry, maximum of 20 destinations
exceeded
To record a message, press 1
To add new mailbox number, press
2
To review the mailing list, press 3
To transfer with comment, press 2
To cancel mailing list review,
press any key
External delivery message will be
sent right away
You have one FAX message
FAX messages
The FAX transfer situation is as
follows
Transferred one time
Transferred (number)
times
One attempt was successful
One attempt was busy
One attempt was no answer
(number) attempts were successful
(number) attempts were busy
(number) attempts were no answer
Selection menu
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
[328], [282], [601]
[593], [604], [594], [595]
[258], [608]
[611], [612]
[611], [612]
Message Manager
6-39

[Linked Prompts List]
Subscriber Service
[258] You have (number)
[259] new messages
[298] There were (number of failure)

[299] unsuccessful attempts to enter this mailbox
Receive Message
[536] Message recorded by

(mailbox number)
[537] and transferred via
(mailbox number)
[247] and (mailbox number)
[547] Message transferred via (mailbox

number)
[247] and (mailbox number)
[538] Message recorded on (date)

[248] at (time)

[252] Messages
Message Scan
[552] Message from (name)
[553] was sent on (date)
[248] at (time)
Message Delivery
[314] This message will be delivered on
(day)
[248] at (time)
Personal Group Distribution List
[555] You can add up to (number)
[556] more members
Check Mailbox Distribution
[415] Message for (name)
[416] received on (date)
[248] at (time)
6-40
Message Manager
[417] Message sent on (date)

[248] at (time)

Check Mailbox Distribution
[417] Message sent on (date)
[248] at (time)
[249] for (mailbox number)
[419] has been erased, because message
retention time expired
[249] for (mailbox number)

[418] has not been received
[449]
[450]
[248]
[451]
[452]

[334] This message is from (name)
External delivery message
[335] of (company name)
scheduled for (name)
[464] External delivery message for (name)
on (date)
[465] was erased
at (time)
External delivery message will be [466] because message retention time
expired
sent to (name)
right away
[475] I'll redial (number)
[476] more times
[472] Message to (name)

[473] being delivered now

[355] Please enter your callback
number
[356] You can enter up to (number)
[357] digits
[355] Please enter your callback number

[356] You can enter up to (number)
[357] digits
[358] When you are finished hang up, stay
on the line to confirm or change your
number
[377] This call is for (name)

[378] from (name)
Interview Mailbox Management
[492] Answer length is (number)
[255] seconds
Fax Management
[608] FAX messages
[611] Transferred (number)

[612] times
Message Manager
6-41
Chapter 7
Maintenance
This chapter explains for the System Administrator about the
Utility Commands, System Report, and how to initialize
the system so that the VPS can be used effectively.
In addition, a troubleshooting guide appears at the end of
this chapter.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Contents
Utility Commands ..........................................................
7.1.1 Off-line Set (OFLN) .............................................
7.1.2 On-line Set (ONLN) .............................................
7.1.3 Set Password (PASS) ...........................................
7.1.4 Set Time (TIME) ..................................................
7.1.5 Print Reports at Specified Time (PSET) ..............
7.1.6 Error Log Display (ELOG) ..................................
7.1.7 Saving the System Data to the
Backup Device (SAVE) ...................................
7.1.8 Loading the Saved Data to the VPS (LOAD) ......
7.1.9 Print All of the VPS Parameters (GPRN) ............
7.1.10 Program Version Display (VERS) .......................
7.1.11 Custom Service Report (CREP) ...........................
7.1.12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear
(CCLR) ............................................................
7.1.13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times (MWL) .....
7.1.14 Setting Minimum Recording Length (MRL) .......
7.1.15 Modified Prompt List (MPLT) .............................
7.1.16 Utility Command List (HELP) .............................
7.1.17 Quick Setup (QSET) ............................................
7.1.18 Circuit Condition Display (LMON) .....................
7.1.19 DTMF Information Display (PUTD)....................
System Reports ..............................................................
7.2.1 Mailbox Assignments ...........................................
7.2.2 COS (Class of Service) Assignments ...................
7.2.3 System Service Report .........................................
7.2.4 Call Account Report .............................................
7.2.5 Port Usage Report ................................................
7.2.6 Disk Usage Report................................................
7.2.7 Mailbox Usage Report..........................................
7.2.8 Fax Call Report ....................................................
Initializing the System ...................................................
Troubleshooting Guide ..................................................
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-7
7-9
7-10
7-10
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-14
7-15
7-15
7-17
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-24
7-25
7-27
7.1
Utility Commands
In the Utility Command mode, the System Administrator can access the functions
described below by entering the appropriate command at the $ prompt followed
by [RETURN].

Utility Command (Type 'HELP' for command list.)
$
OFLN ..... Sets the system to off-line mode

ONLN .... Sets the system to on-line mode
PASS ...... Sets the System Administrators password
TIME ..... Sets the system clock, date and time
PSET ...... Specifies the reports printing time
ELOG..... Displays device error log
SAVE ..... Stores a backup of the program or data on the hard disk
LOAD .... Restores a backup of the program or data to the system
GPRN ..... Displays all of the VPS parameters
VERS ..... Displays the version of hard disk, main ROM and Port card
CREP
Displays the keypad assignments, message recording status and the
tree-structure of a Custom service
CCLR ..... Clears a Custom service menu access count
MWL...... Specifies the number of times the VPS attempts to turn on the
message waiting lamp on the extensions
MRL ....... Sets the minimum recording length of a message
MPLT..... Displays the user prompt recording status
HELP ..... Displays brief instructions and a list of Utility Commands
QSET ..... Sets up your VPS roughly so that you can use it quickly
LMON ... Line Monitor
PUTD ..... Display DTMF Information
7.1.1 Off-line Set (OFLN)

Used to turn off the call progressing mode of the VPS.
Set the VPS to off-line mode before deleting a mailbox, since this operation involves the updating of a large number of related parameters.
Type OFLN, then press [RETURN].
If no VPS ports are in use, the VPS will suspend the call progressing service
immediately.
$ OFLN
** OFF LINE MODE **
or
7-2
Maintenance
7.1
Utility Commands
If any one of the VPS ports is in use, the VPS will warn you by the following message:
*** Now Line is used !! *** <WAIT>
After finishing the current operation, the VPS will go to off-line mode.
** OFF LINE MODE **
7.1.2 On-line Set (ONLN)

Used to restore the call progressing mode of the VPS.
Type ONLN, then press [RETURN].
$ ONLN
** ON LINE MODE **
The VPS resumes call progressing service.
7.1.3 Set Password (PASS)

Used to create and change the system passwords in order to ensure system security.
Valid passwords can be set using up to eight alphanumeric characters.
Type PASS, then press [RETURN].

$ PASS
1: Administrator Password 2: System Reset/Clear Password :=
Creating a New Password:
Select [1] or [2].

Maximum 8 characters
NEW PASSWORD : =
Enter the password.

VERIFICATION : =
Enter the password again for verification.
Maintenance
7-3
7.1
Utility Commands
Changing a Password:
Select [1] or [2].

OLD PASSWORD : =
The above is displayed only when changing a password using System

Reset/Clear password.
Enter the current password.

Maximum 8 characters
NEW PASSWORD : =
Enter the new password.

VERIFICATION : =
Enter the password again for verification.

Notes:
The password you entered does not appear on the screen as a

security measure.
Pressing [RETURN] instead of entering a password means the
password has been reset.
The VPS does not distinguish capital letters from small letters.
(The VPS is not case sensitive.)
7.1.4 Set Time (TIME)

Used to set the correct system date and time to ensure accurate scheduling. A
number of functions require that the system time and date be set correctly in order
to operate properly. These include message waiting notification, external message
delivery, call-retries-after initial-failure-to-connect, and automatic deletion of messages.
Type TIME, then press [RETURN].

$ TIME
Current time is 12:34, PM
Enter new time (HH:MM, AM/PM) : =
Enter the current time.

Current date is AUG-3-1994
Enter new date (MMDDYY) : =
7-4
Maintenance
7.1
3
Utility Commands
Enter the current date.
For the year, type the last two digits.
Note:
Enter the exact time and date so that the VPS will function correctly.
This command is invalid while the System Manager or the Message
Manager is accessing the time setting feature.
7.1.5 Print Reports at Specified Time (PSET)

If a printer or a data terminal is connected to the VPS via the RS-232C port, you
can issue the following system reports at the specified time everyday by entering
PSET command.
Disk Usage Report / Port Usage Report / Call Account Report
Type PSET, then press [RETURN].

$ PSET
Report Print Out Service [ Disable ]
1: Enable 2: Disable :=
Press [1] to enable this function.

or
Press [2] to disable it.
Enter The Print Out Time (HH:MM, AM/PM) :=
Enter the time to print the report.
7.1.6 Error Log Display (ELOG)

You can diagnose the VPS by getting the error log of devices such as the CPU card,
Port cards and the hard disk.
COM.
Communication error between CPU and Port cards
DATA
Process error of voice data
MEM.
Memory error
PRG.
Program error in CPU card
R/W
Read/Write error of hard disk
Maintenance
7-5
7.1
Utility Commands
Type ELOG, then press [RETURN].
$ ELOG
DEVICE
ERROR
TIME
1. CPU
MEMGET
JUL-14 14:00 PM
2. CLOCK
3. DISK
DATA R/W (xx:yyyy)
JUL-14 14:00 PM
JUL-14 14:00 PM
4. DSP*
5. DSP*
6. CPU
SCAN
FIFO
APPLICATION (x)
JUL-14 14:00 PM
JUL-14 14:00 PM
JUL-14 14:00 PM
* = Port number
Note:
Types of errors displayed on the screen and their meanings are as

follows:
Device error log indications

Indication
CPU
Meaning
MEM-GET
CPU card software memory acquisition error.

CPU card is short of memory temporarily because
of too much traffic.
CLOCK
Clock access error. Clock IC is out of order.

Check the hardware.
DISK
DATA R/W (xx:yyyy)
HDD access error. If there is a sector which

often causes errors, check the disk.
xx : IDE error code
yyyy : read/write error sector number
DSP*
SCAN
DSP-SCAN error. DSP is out of order. Check

the hardware.
DSP*
FIFO
DSP/FIFO error. During the system is handling

calls, there is wrong with DSP and FIFO memory
temporarily.
CPU
APPLICATION (x)
Application error. During the system is handling

calls, temporal application error occurs.
x: port number
* = Port number (1 12)
Error indications at system startup

Example terminal display when errors are generated
7-6
Maintenance
7.1
Utility Commands
Meaning
Indication
ROM ERROR : Sum Error!!
ROM checksum error.
DISK ERROR : Initialize Error!!
HDD initialization error.
DISK ERROR : No System!!
No system HDD present.
DISK ERROR : Program Load Error!!
Program could not be loaded from system HDD.
DISK ERROR : Program Sum Error!!
Checksum error in program loaded from system HDD.
DISK ERROR : System Data Error!!
Error loading of administrator data from system HDD.
SYSTEM ERROR : 1
Administrator data error.
SYSTEM ERROR : 2
Error loading of report data.
SYSTEM ERROR : 3
Clock error.
SYSTEM ERROR : 4
Mailbox data error.
SYSTEM ERROR : 5
Message data error (1).
SYSTEM ERROR : 6
Message data error (2).
SYSTEM ERROR : 7
Error loading of control data.
SYSTEM ERROR : 8
Error loading of voice prompt data.
SYSTEM ERROR : 9
Error loading of MWL control data.
SYSTEM ERROR : 10
Error loading of disk identify data.
SYSTEM ERROR : 11
Error writing of VBI chain data.
SYSTEM ERROR : 12
Error writing of BLK chain data.
SYSTEM ERROR : 13
Error loading of user prompt modify data.
SYSTEM ERROR : 14
Error loading of Class of Service data.
No CO line cards are active!!
No Port cards present.
COs are all Disable!!
All Port cards are malfunctioning.
DPITS Interface Connection is not Established.
Port cards are malfunctioning for DPITS because

telephone lines are disconnected or Integration with PBX
is not set to D-PITS mode.
Error and warning indications during system operation

Indication
Meaning
DISK STORAGE SPACE IS NOW EXCEEDING 80%...
80% or more of the HDD voice message save area is used.
ASCII TERMINAL program Load Error
Error loading of ASCII terminal control program.
VT100 program Load Error
Error loading of VT100 control program.
7.1.7 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device (SAVE)

All system programming data and voice prompts can be backed up in separate data
files on a data terminal connected to the RS-232C port of the VPS. You cannot
back up all of them at the same time; they must be saved individually.
The SAVE command can be executed for each data file. It may take some time to
complete SAVE for all the data. When performing this operation please wait until
the process completion indication appears.
Maintenance
7-7
7.1
Utility Commands
The memory which is required for the data terminal to be used for this feature is as
follows:
1. Program approximately 2 MBytes
2. Parameters approximately 3 MBytes
3. System Prompts approximately 23 MBytes
4. User Prompts1
depending upon the length of the
5. User Prompts2
recorded messages.
6. Custom Service Menu
7. Personal Greeting
8. Company Greeting
Type SAVE, then press [RETURN].

$ SAVE
VPS Disk Data Save (VPS PC : Xmodem)
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4: User Prompts1
5: User Prompts2
6: Custom Service Menu
7: Personal Greeting
8: Company Greeting
Select No. :=
Select item to be backed up, then press [RETURN].

To start press RETURN
Press [RETURN].
Start - - - - - Save !!
Set the data terminal to the receiving (Answer) mode (Xmodem). Then specify
the backup filename.
The specified data will be transmitted to the data terminal.
Notes:
7-8
Maintenance
The data terminal used must be equipped with communications

software that supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol.
You can cancel this command by pressing \ before entering the
receiving mode. Once you have selected the receiving mode, use
the cancel command of the communication software which you use.
(e.g., quit for the Crosstalk)
7.1
Utility Commands
7.1.8 Loading the Saved Data to the VPS (LOAD)

Used to restore the saved data to the VPS in case of disk crash or accidental erasure.
The LOAD command can be executed for each data file. It may take some time to
complete LOAD for all the data.
When performing this operation, please wait until the process completion indication appears.
Type LOAD, then press [RETURN].

$ LOAD
Disk Data Load (PC VPS : Xmodem)
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4: User Prompts1
5: User Prompts2
6: Custom Service Menu
7: Personal Greeting
8: Company Greeting
Select No.:
Select the item to be restored to the hard disk, then press [RETURN].
To start press RETURN
Press [RETURN].
Start - - - - - Load !!
Set the data terminal to the sending (Call) mode (Xmodem). Then enter the backup filename.
The backup data will be restored to the hard disk.
Notes:
You can cancel this command by pressing \ before entering the

receiving mode, and by using the cancel command in the communication software.
The data terminal used must be equipped with communications
software that supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol.
Maintenance
7-9
7.1
Utility Commands
7.1.9 Print All of the VPS Parameters (GPRN)

Prints out all VPS parameter settings (output to screen).
Type GPRN, then press [RETURN].
$ GPRN
0: All Parameters
1: Mailbox Setting
2: Class of Service Setting
3: Port Service Setting
4: Service Setting - Auto. Attn. Setting
5: Service Setting - Custom Service Setting
6: System Parameter Setting - System Group Assignment
7: System Parameter Setting - Day Service, Holiday, Daylight Saving Time
8: System Parameter Setting - Prompt Setting
9: System Parameter Setting - Others
10: Hardware Setting
11: System Reset Clear Parameter
Please select : 1
Program Mailbox Setting Mailbox Listing :
MAILBOX No. [201]
1. The Extension of the Owner [208]
2. The Spelling of the Owner First Name [
3. The Spelling of the Owner Last Name [
4. Mailbox Class of Service No. [ 1 ]
5. The Covering Extension [ ]
6. Interview Mailbox Number [ ]
7. All Calls Transfer to Mailbox [ No ]
MAILBOX No. [202]
1. The Extension of the Owner [
Note:
]
]
This command is only valid in the ASCII terminal mode.
7.1.10 Program Version Display (VERS)

The version numbers of the hard disk, main ROM and Port card are displayed on
the screen.
Type VERS, then press [RETURN].
$ VERS
V.P.S. PROGRAM VERSION
MAIN DISK :
MAIN ROM :
7-10
Maintenance
7.1
Utility Commands
7.1.11 Custom Service Report (CREP)

Used to display the keypad assignments, message recording status and the treestructure of a Custom service.
Type CREP and Custom service number (1100), then press [RETURN].
$ Crep 20
Custom [20] (User-1) (Access: 3) (Menu Msg. : None)
| < Custom Service Entry Menu
>
[1] - Xfer Mbx (201)

[2] - Xfer Extn. (202)
[3] - Custom [21] (System) (Access: 0) (Menu Msg. : None)
|
| < Voice Mail Information Eng. >
| [1] - Custom [22] (User 2) (Access: 0) (Menu Msg. : None)
|
|
|
|
|
|
| <Voice Mail Information Spanish

[1] - Operator
[2] - Dial by Name
|
|
|
|
|
|
[3] - Subscriber
[4] - Dprt Dial
[ ]- Main Menu
>
|
[ ]- Main Menu
[6]- Operator
[7] - Exit
[8] - Pre.Menu
[ ] Exit
[#] Main Menu
Custom [20]:
Indicates that Custom service No. is 20.
User1:
Indicates a type of voice prompts is User1.
Access: 3:
Indicates that a Custom service was being accessed 3 times by the callers.
Menu Msg. :None:
Indicates that the menu message for a Custom service is

None (not recorded).
[1]-Xfer Mbx (201): Indicates that the caller will be transferred to the mailbox 201 by
pressing [1].
[2]-Xfer Extn. (202): Indicates that the caller will be transferred to the extension 202 by
pressing [2].
7.1.12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear (CCLR)

Used to clear the number of times a Custom service was being accessed by the
caller.
Maintenance
7-11
7.1
Utility Commands
Type CCLR, and Custom service number (1100), then press [RETURN].
$ CCLR 20
Custom Menu <20> Accessing Counter Cleared !!
Note:
You can clear the number of access times for all Custom services at
once by entering CCLR 0.
7.1.13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times (MWL)

Used to specify the number of times the VPS will attempt to turn on the Message
Waiting Lamp of the extension.
This setting is required when your PBX is not a Panasonic KX-T series telephone
system.
$ MWL
Current Setting of M.W.L. Retry Count is 1
Enter M.W.L Retry Count (1-3) =
Note:
This setting is not valid if Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message
is set to Yes.
7.1.14 Setting Minimum Recording Length (MRL)

Used to specify the minimum recording length (03 seconds) of a message.
Messages shorter than this setting will be discarded from the mailbox.
Note:
You can set the minimum recording length only by using this
command.
Type MRL, then press [RETURN].

$ MRL
Current Setting of Minimum Recording Length is 2
Enter Minimum Recording Length (0-3) =
7-12
Enter your length.
Maintenance
7.1
Utility Commands
7.1.15 Modified Prompt List (MPLT)

Used to display the user prompt recording status: recorded, not recorded or turned
off.
Type MPLT, then press [RETURN].

both prompts
MPLT
MPLT 1 User 1 prompts

MPLT 2 User 2 prompts
Press [1] to display the User 1 prompts.

or
Press [2] to display the User 2 prompts.
or
Press nothing to display both prompts.
$ MPLT 1
***List of
, 1,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Registered User Prompt 1 No.

,OFF,
, 5, 6,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
([1],
,
,
,
,
[2], . . . , [620])***
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
*** Total Number of Registered = 3 ***
Blank:
Prompt no.:
OFF:
Note:
The prompt has not been recorded.

The prompt has been recorded.
The prompt has been turned off.
The total number of registrations shown at the bottom does not include
the prompts that have been turned off.
Maintenance
7-13
7.1
Utility Commands
7.1.16 Utility Command List (HELP)

The HELP command displays the list of all available utility commands.
Type HELP, then press [RETURN].
$ HELP
OFLN : System Off-line
ONLN : System On-line
PASS : Password setting
TIME : Time & Date setting
PSET : Report Print Out Time setting
ELOG : Device Error Log Listing
SAVE : VPS Program & Data Save (VPS PC : Xmodem)
LOAD : VPS Program & Data Load (VPS PC : Xmodem)
GPRN : Parameter Global Printing (only ASCII Terminal mode)
VERS : Program Version Check
CREP [no] : Custom Menu Information List
[no] : Custom Menu No. (1-100)
CCLR [no] : Custom Menu Access Counter Clear
[no] : Custom Menu No. (1-100/0) (0: Clear All)
MWL
: MWL Retry count Set (1-3)
MRL
: Minimum Recording Length Set (0-3)
MPLT [opt] : Registered User Prompt No. List
[opt] : 1
User Prompt 1
2
User Prompt 2
None User Prompt 1&2
QSET : Quick Setup
LMON : Line Monitor
PUTD : DTMF Information Display (Don't leave enabled after
troubleshooting.)
$
7.1.17 Quick Setup (QSET)

Used to set up your VPS very roughly when you use your VPS for the first time or
after system initialization.
Type QSET, then press [RETURN].
You will see the same menu as Starting the Quick Setup in Chapter 4.
To proceed, go to page 4-8.
7-14
Maintenance
7.1
7.1.18
Utility Commands
Circuit Condition Display (LMON)
Used to display circuit condition every 1.5 seconds on the screen. To end the display in VT100 mode, input . In case of ASCII mode, it is displayed only once.
You can see following Circuit conditions on the screen.
Ready
Incoming Call Service
Outgoing Call Service
DSP Reset Processing
PITS Connect Processing
Error/Does Not Exist
$ LMON
CO No.:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
$
7.1.19
Status
Ready
Ready
Ready
Ready
Ready
Ready
Ready
Ready
Error/Not
Error/Not
Error/Not
Error/Not
: Possible to serve
: Processing arrival service
: Processing sending service
: Processing DSP reset disposition
: Processing PITS connect disposition
: DSP Card is not loaded.
Exist
Exist
Exist
Exist
DTMF Information Display (PUTD)

Used to display DTMF tones the VPS is receiving and sending.
In addition to DTMF, the following information is displayed.
A type of Incoming Call Service (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Custom,
Interview) when the caller enters any service.
One means 4 secs while VPS is recording message etc.
Once you enter PUTD, this mode is kept until you enter PUTD again.
Default setting of this mode for all ports is OFF.
$ PUTD
Target Port :
$
Maintenance
7-15
7.1
Utility Commands
If you want to change the mode back to OFF, enter PUTD again.
$ PUTD
Target Port : 0000 0000 0000
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
Note: means enable for the port
0 means disable for the port
If you want to set the mode for only one specified port, type PUTD and the port
number.
$ PUTD 1
Target Port : 0000 0000 000
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
Port1
Sample of display is as follows.

$ PUTD
Target Port for Debug :
$
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
DTMF:#
DTMF:8
A.Attend
DTMF:#
DTMF:6
Voice Mail
DTMF:1
DTMF:0
DTMF:1
NonSub Svc
DTMF:D
DTMF:D
Thank you
Warning
1. PUTD is a command originally used for trouble shooting. Do not use in normal use.
2. While PUTD mode is ON, do not remove the RS-232 Connection because the
VPS is continuously sending data to the terminal, and it may cause data overflow.
7-16
Maintenance
7.2
System Reports
The System Administrator can provide eight types of System Reports to monitor
the VPS operating status. The reports can be sent via the RS-232C port either to a
printer or a terminal. The following eight report options are available.
System Reports System Report Menu
1. Mailbox Assignments
2. COS Assignments
3. System Service Report
4. Call Account Report
5. Port Usage Report
6. Disk Usage Report
7. Mailbox Usage Report
8. Fax Call Report
In addition, the following four reports can be cleared of all values and prepared for
use again.
System Reports System Report Clear Menu
1. Port Usage Statistics Clear
2. Disk Usage Statistics Clear
3. Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
4. Fax Call Report Clear
7.2.1 Mailbox Assignments

The Mailbox Assignments Report provides information about authorized features
for each mailbox, and current settings for mailbox parameters.
Maintenance
7-17
7.2
System Reports
*** Mailbox Assignments
MBOX Extn.
Jul-28 11:30 AM ***
Name (Fir/Lst) COS CExtn IVMBOX AlTrf MN1st MN2nd MN3rd
510
21
JONE /DELY
61
621
511
22
SCHE/
62
611
Bep
Tel
512
23
MAY /
16
63
612
Tel
Bep
520
310
JONE/
Tel
Bep
521
320
888
522 4100
CLUS/ALCC
21
523
WHIT /BLUE
32
642
4201
DAVE/
CExtn:
Covering Extension
IVMBOX:
Interview Mailbox
ALTrf:
All Calls Transfer to Mailbox
MN1st:
Message Notification Device 1
MN2nd: Message Notification Device 2
MN3rd:
Message Notification Device 3
Bep:
Tel:
Telephone
Beeper
Note:
An X in the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to
Yes.
7.2.2 COS (Class of Service) Assignments

This report provides information on all Class of Service numbers.
*** COS Assignments
Jul-29 11:30 AM ***
COS GL RtN RtS Ln CaN CaT RO SI SP CW MC DM PG Pr MN ED (pr) AF (mbox/ dl/ md)

1
16 10 10 5 10
10 L N N
1 U1 X
X U1
00:30 M
16 7
3 10
10 L
Y N
2 U1 X
X U1
00:30 M
3 10
10 F Y N
U1
00:30 M
S X

63 16 30 30 6 100 100 L N N
1 U1 X
U1
00:30 M
64 16 30 30 6 100 100 L N N
1 U1
U1
00:30 M
COS:
RtN:
Ln:
7-18
Class of Service Number

New Message Retention Time
Message Length
Maintenance
GL: Personal Greeting Length

RtS: Saved Message Retention Time
CaN: Maximum Messages
7.2
System Reports
CaT:
Maximum Message Time
RO:
Message Retrieval Order (L = LIFO, F = FIFO)
SI:
Message Scanning with Information
SP:
Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting
CW:
Use Call Waiting on Busy
MC:
Message Cancel for Live Call Screening
DM:
PG:
Intercom Paging Group
Pr:
Prompt Mode (S = System Prompts, U1 = User 1 Prompts, U2 = User 2 Prompts)
MN:
Authorization of Message Waiting Notification
ED (pr) : Authorization of External Message Delivery (Prompt Mode)
AF:
Authorization of Auto Forwarding
(mbox) = Mailbox No. (dl) = Delay Time (md) = Forwarding Mode
Note:
An X in the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is

set to Yes.
7.2.3 System Service Report

The System Service Report provides information about the usable ports of the
VPS. It also indicates the services assigned to each VPS port for Day, Night and
Holiday modes, the incoming and outgoing call services.
** System Service Report
Port
JAN-4 7:25 PM **
[Daymode]
[Nightmode]
Grt
Srv
Grt
Srv
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
10
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
11
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
12
C.S.(1)
C.S.(1)
[Holiday List]
Day
Srv
Port
Description
DEC-12
C.S.(90)
1-8
ANNIVERSARY
Maintenance
7-19
7.2
System Reports
Grt:
Company Greeting No.
V.M. : Voice Mail Service
Note:
A.A. : Automated Attendant Service

C.S. : Custom Service
I.S. :
Interview Service
An X in the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is

used.
7.2.4 Call Account Report

The VPS can maintain information on up to 84 outgoing calling sequences for accounting and billing purposes. The outgoing calling information includes the
mailbox numbers which have executed outgoing calls, the telephone numbers, call
dates and duration times. Note that when the number of outgoing calling sequences approaches 84, this information is automatically sent to the terminal.
*** Call Account
NOV-14 3:40 PM ***
MBOX:111
JAN-4
7:46
PM
00:01:32
DIAL:4312111
MBOX:116
JAN-7
2:26
PM
00:03:32
DIAL:039814809
MBOX:114
JAN-7
5:06
PM
00:02:45
DIAL:2612601
MBOX:118
JAN-8
9:07
AM
00:01:15
DIAL:4312111
MBOX:112
JAN-8
10:24
AM
00:04:51
DIAL:4312111
7.2.5 Port Usage Report

The Port Usage Report provides information about port usage and allows you to
measure traffic on the system and ports. It includes the accumulated duration
times of incoming and outgoing calling services and the total connect time for each
port.
7-20
Maintenance
7.2
System Reports
** Port Usage Report
JAN-4 7:26 PM **
FROM : :
OCT-3 9:50 AM
Port
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
ED
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MN
990
24
6
4
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
Rcv
1108
138
61
40
34
22
21
10
0
0
0
0
Connect Time
07:46:44
01:11:14
00:30:07
00:22:11
00:16:44
00:12:34
00:09:29
00:05:11
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
1036
1434
10:34:14
Total
Full-line Time 00:00:04
ED:
External Delivery
MN: Message Notification
Port Usage Statistics Clear

The Port Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
System Reports System Report Clear Port Usage Statistics Clear
May I clear a port usage report data? (Y/N) : =
Enter Y (yes) or N (no) and press [RETURN].

If you enter Y, the system will clear the data, so please wait until Port Usage Report Data Cleared!! appears.
7.2.6 Disk Usage Report

The Disk Usage Report indicates the amount of disk storage in use and availability
in minutes. It also provides the following three statistics:
Accumulated number of messages which were recorded by callers after last
clearing the disk usage.
Accumulated number of messages deleted by Subscribers.
Accumulated number of messages expired and removed by the system.
Maintenance
7-21
7.2
System Reports
*** Disk Usage Report
Drive
1
Avail
Jan-4 7:46 PM ***

Used (%)
1956min. 2min. (1)
FROM : : APR-10 9:53 AM
MSGs
New
Cpy
Del
Exp
64
Del:
Deleted
Cpy: Copy (Transfer)
Note:
Exp: Expired
All indications on the report can be reset to zero with the Disk Usage
Clear command.
Disk Usage Statistics Clear

The Disk Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
System Reports System Report Clear Disk Usage Statistics Clear
May I clear a disk usage report data ? (Y/N) : =

If you enter Y, the system will clear the data, so please wait until Disk Usage
Report Data Cleared!! appears.
7.2.7 Mailbox Usage Report

The Mailbox Usage Report provides information about the usage of a specific
mailbox. It includes the number of recorded messages, the total amount of outgoing calling time and external message delivery, message notification and group
message delivery.
Enter the Range : = 111
Note:
7-22
Maintenance
Specify the range or the mailbox number. To get the information about
mailboxes from No. 200 to No. 209, enter 20 or 200, 209 and
press [RETURN].
7.2
System Reports
*** Mailbox Usage Report
Jan-4 7:46 PM ***
MBOX:111 [ JONE BLUE ]

New
MSGs
Received MSGs
ED
MSGs
FROM ::
Apr-10 9:53 AM
MBOX Use Time
01:21:30
Feature Usage
Outcalling
(Time)
ED
MN
IM
GM
AF
11
31
20
14
22
LD
Lcl
Beep
Extn.
13
28
00:05:10
00:10:45
00:00:00
00:31:21
Rcv
Del
Exp
42
30
11
MSG Received
IM:
Interview Message
GM: Group Message
LD:
Long Distance
Lcl:
Local
Exp: Expired
Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear

The Mailbox Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
System Reports System Report Clear Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
Enter the Range : =
May I clear a mailbox usage report data ? (Y/N) : =

If you enter Y, the system will clear the data, so please wait until Mailbox Usage
Report Data Cleared!! appears.
Maintenance
7-23
7.2
System Reports
7.2.8 Fax Call Report

The Fax Call Report provides information about fax transfer status when the VPS
receives a fax signal. It includes the fax data receiving date, the port number used,
and the fax transfer status for up to 64 fax data.
*** Fax Call Report
NOV-14 3:50 PM ***
[DATE/TIME]
JAN-11
[PORT]
[FAX-1]
[FAX-2]
11:15 AM
connect
MAR-01 07:58 PM
(busy)
(no-ans.)
APR-04
(busy)
connect
10:23 AM
no-ans. :No-answer
FAX-1: Main Fax Machine
FAX-2: Alternate Fax Machine
Fax Call Statistics Clear

The Fax Call Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
System Reports System Report Clear Fax Call Statistics Clear
May I clear a fax call usage report data ? (Y/N) : =

If you enter Y, the system will clear the data, so please wait until Fax Call Report
Data Cleared!! appears.
7-24
Maintenance
7.3
Initializing the System

By initializing the system, all messages and mailboxes are cleared and the system
parameters are set to the default setting.
Go to System Administration Top Menu.

1 : Program
2 : System Reports
3 : Utility Command
4 : System Reset/Clear
5 : Quick Setup
Note:
5: Quick Setup in the above screen does not appear in the ASCII
TERMINAL mode.
Press [4] for System Initialization.

System Reset/Clear Menu
Mailbox No. Length : 3
System Managers Mailbox No.
: 999
Message Managers Mailbox No. : 998
Will you change the settings ? (Y/N) : =
Press [Y] (this moves the VPS to the off-line mode).

System Reset/Clear Menu
Mailbox No. Length : 3
System Managers Mailbox No.
: 999
Message Managers Mailbox No. : 998
Reset System Parameters : press \
Maintenance
7-25
7.3
4
Initializing the System

Press [\] to start the system resetting.
System Initializing
When system initializing ends, the following display will appear on the screen:
>
Notes:
7-26
Maintenance
The execution time for System Reset/Clear may differ each time
because of the systems capacity and its programs. Generally, it will
take at least three minutes.
To set the system clock (date and time), use the Utility Command
TIME. See page 7-4.
7.4
Troubleshooting Guide
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
The VPS does not operate.
Bad printed circuit board.

Bad connection with PBX.
Card was inserted into the
wrong slot.
Incomplete card insertion.
Change the printed circuit board.

If the phone works properly when SLT
is connected instead of the VPS,
change the Port card. If the phone still
fails to work properly, check the
connection between the VPS and PBX.
Insert the card firmly into the normal
card slot.
Insert the card firmly into the back
board.
Dialing is not registered.
A pulse phone is being used

by mistake.
Improper setting of
integration mode.
Change to a touch-tone phone.

Adjust the integration mode properly
between the VPS and your PBX.
Line disconnection occurs

while transferring an outside
call.
Outside calls cannot be
transferred.
Improper setting of the

transfer sequence.
hooking time.
Improper setting of the CPC
signal.
Adjust the transfer sequence to that of

the connected PBX and reset.
Adjust the hooking time to that of the
connected PBX and reset.
Adjust the CPC signal to that of the
connected PBX and reset.
Unable to make outside

calls.

outside call dial mode.
outside call dial procedure.
Reset the outside call dial mode (tone/

pulse) properly.
Reset the outside line access sequence
of the connected PBX.
Unable to call an extension.
Improper setting of extension

numbering plan.
Adjust the extension numbering plan

properly.
Unable to access the mail

box.

number of digits in the
mailbox number.
Readjust the number of digits in the

mailbox number.
Connected terminal (RS232C port) does not operate.
Improper connection.
parameter.
Connect the cable firmly.

Adjust the terminal parameter to the
VPS parameter. If the terminal still
fails to operate properly, set to the
desired parameter from the terminal.
Readjust the busy signal reconnection

Unable to make reconnection Improper setting of the busy
procedure to that of the connected
signal reconnection procedure.
when the line is busy.
PBX.
Unable to make a noresponse reconnection.
Improper setting of the noresponse reconnection

procedure.
Readjust the no-response reconnection

procedure to that of the connected
PBX.
Maintenance
7-27
Specifications
Port

Dialing Method
Tone/Pulse (10pps)
Flash Time
100 msec
CPC Detection
6.5/150/300/450/600 msec (programmable)
Type of Line
Loop start
Extension Numbering
2 to 5 digits (programmable)
Pause Time
1 to 9 sec (programmable)
Message Waiting Lamp
Programmable DTMF sequence, Data line of PITS

interface
Main CPU
16-bit microprocessor
Capacity of Hard Disk
32 hours
Number of Mailboxes
Max. 1024
Number of Messages
Max. 100 per mailbox (programmable)
Personal Greeting Message Length
8 to 60 sec (programmable)
Message Retention Time
1 to 30 days, or unlimited (programmable)
Maximum Message Length
1 to 6 min. (programmable)
Reports
Mailbox List, Class of Service List, System Service

Report, Call Account Report, Disk Usage Report, Port
Usage Report, Mailbox Usage Report, FAX Report
Connections Telephone Line

(max.)
Data Port
min. Loop Current: 20 mA

min. Line Voltage: 7 VDC
min. Ringing Voltage: 40 VAC
2-conductor wire 6
4-conductor wire with D-PITS interface 4
RS-232C interface port
Power Source
230-240VAC, 50 Hz
Dimensions
468 327 101 mm (18-7/16" 12-7/8" 4")
Index
A
Alternate extension ........................................ 3-3, 4-48
Auto configuration .................................................. 3-3
Auto forwarding ......................... 3-3, 3-35, 4-34, 5-10
Automated attendant service ................ 3-4, 3-31, 3-43
B
Backup, system data ............................................... 7-7
Baud rate ............................................................... 4-76
Broadcasting messages ........................................... 3-7
delivering ......................................................... 5-14
Busy coverage mode ...................................... 3-7, 3-46
C
Callback number entry ........................................... 3-7
Call blocking ........................................................ 3-11
Call queuing announcement ................................. 4-70
Call retrieval announcement ................................. 4-70
Call screening ....................................................... 3-10
Call services ............................................................ 3-9
Call transfer status ................................................ 3-10
Call transfer, all calls to a mailbox ....................... 3-33
Call waiting on busy ...................................... 4-29, 5-8
Card:
CPU ............................................................ 2-5, 7-5
Port ............................................................. 2-5, 7-5
Class of service ..................................... 3-12, 4-27, 5-7
assign number of ...................................... 4-21, 5-5
Clock ........................................... 3-54, 5-11, 6-11, 7-4
Company greeting ................................................ 3-12
assign number of ............................................. 4-38
recording .......................................................... 6-12
Company name, recording .................................... 6-12
Companys telephone number .............................. 4-69
Covering extension ...................................... 3-13, 4-21
CPC signal ................................................... 4-78, 7-25
Custom service ................ 3-13, 3-31, 3-44, 3-58, 4-50

recording menu of ........................................... 6-14
report ............................................................... 7-11
D
Data terminal ........................................................ 2-22
Day service .................................................. 3-19, 4-57
time set ............................................................ 4-58
Daylight saving time ........................... 3-19, 4-61, 5-11
Delayed answer time ............................................ 4-39
Department dialing ...................................... 3-19, 4-40
recording menu of ........................................... 6-13
Dialing by name ................................................... 3-20
Dialing parameters ................................................ 4-79
Digit translation table ........................................... 4-85
Direct mailbox access ................. 3-21, 3-51, 4-29, 5-9
Disconnect parameter ........................................... 4-75
D-PITS .................................................................. 3-21
E
Extension group .................................. 3-22, 3-41, 4-55
Extension number, assign .............................. 4-21, 5-5
Extension numbering plan ........................... 3-22, 4-63
External message delivery ........ 3-22, 4-34, 4-68, 5-10
checking of ...................................................... 3-24
External message delivery list .............................. 3-22
F
Fax management .......................................... 3-24, 4-73
Flash time ............................................................. 4-77
G
General delivery mailbox .............................. 3-34, 6-5
Group distribution list, personal ......... 3-25, 3-36, 3-38
Group distribution list, system .................... 3-25, 3-36
3-38, 4-53, 5-15
recording label of ............................................. 6-15
H
Hard disk drive ................................................ 2-6, 7-5
Hold .................................................... 3-26, 3-30, 4-70
Holiday service ................................... 3-19, 3-26, 4-58
I
Inband .......................................................... 3-26, 4-81
Inband signaling parameters ................................. 4-83
Incoming call services .......................... 3-9, 3-49, 4-38
Incomplete call handling service .......................... 3-29
Initialization, of system ........................................ 7-25
Intercom paging .................................. 3-11, 3-29, 4-71
group assignment ...................................... 4-30, 5-9
Interview mailbox .......................................... 4-21, 5-5
assign number of ............................................. 4-38
Interview service ......................................... 3-31, 3-44
L
Live call screening ................................................ 3-32
message cancel for .................................... 4-29, 5-9
Log, error ................................................................ 7-5
Logical extension .................................................. 3-33
Message length:
maximum ......................................................... 4-28
minimum ......................................................... 7-12
Message listening ........................................ 3-50, 5-17
from general delivery mailbox .......................... 6-5
Message managers mailbox ................ 3-34, 6-3, 7-25
Message reception mode ...................................... 3-37
Message recording ................................................ 3-51
Message retention time .................................. 4-28, 5-7
Message retrieval order ................................. 4-28, 5-8
Message scan ............................................... 3-37, 3-50
with information ....................................... 4-28, 5-8
Message transfer ................................... 3-38, 3-50, 6-6
Message waiting notification ....................... 3-38, 4-66
authorization of ................................ 4-33, 4-35, 5-9
notification numbers ................................. 4-23, 6-8
via device ......................................... 3-7, 3-38, 4-22
4-33, 4-67, 6-7
via lamp ........................................... 3-41, 6-7, 7-12
Multi-lingual service ............................................ 3-42
N
No-answer coverage mode ................................... 3-46
No-answer time .................................................... 4-69
M
Mailbox ................................................................. 3-33
delete ........................................................ 4-25, 5-6
general delivery ............ See General delivery mailbox
interview ................................. See Interview mailbox
setup .......................................................... 4-19, 5-4
subscribers ......................... See Subscribers mailbox
system managers ....... See System managers mailbox
message managers .. See Message managers mailbox
Mailbox capacity .................................. 3-35, 4-28, 5-7
Mailbox group ....... See Group distribution list, system
Message:
broadcasting .............................................. 3-7, 5-14
private ..................................................... 3-36, 3-50
Message delivery:
to subscribers .......................................... 3-36, 5-14
to non-subscribers ....... See External message delivery
checking of .................................... 3-24, 3-36, 5-15
O
Operator service ........................................... 3-46, 3-52
assign extension of ................................. 4-42, 6-10
Outgoing call setup sequence ............................... 4-66
Outside line, number of digit to access ................ 4-65
P
Password:
delete ................................................................. 5-6
enter ............................................................ 5-3, 6-3
set ..................................................... 5-16, 6-10, 7-3
Password, of external delivery message ............... 3-23
Pause time ............................................................. 4-65
PBX integration .................................................... 3-47
PBX interface parameters ..................................... 4-78
Personal greeting .................................................. 3-48

length ........................................................ 4-28, 5-7
play system prompt after ................. 3-49, 4-29, 5-8
Port service .................................................. 3-31, 3-49
Program version display ....................................... 7-10
Prompt for rotary callers ....................................... 4-38
Prompt, linked ............................................. 3-58, 6-40
Prompt, modifiable ............................................... 6-18
Prompt list, modified ............................................ 7-13
Prompt mode ........................................................ 3-43
for incoming calls ............................................ 4-38
in custom service ............................................. 4-51
in subscriber service ................................. 4-30, 5-9
Prompt selection number ...................................... 4-62
Q
Quick setup ...................................................... 4-3, 4-8
R
Reply to message sender ...................................... 3-51
Rotary telephone service ............................. 3-52, 4-71
RS-232C parameters ............................................. 4-76
S
Selection menu ..................................................... 3-42
recording .......................................................... 6-16
Service access commands ..................................... 3-53
Special feature authorization ................ 3-53, 4-32, 5-9
Subscribers mailbox ............................................ 3-33
Subscribers name:
spelling of .......................................................... 5-5
voiced ................................................................ 5-4
System callback number ................................ 3-7, 4-68
System managers mailbox ................... 3-34, 5-3, 7-25
System prompt ............................................. 3-42, 3-58
System reports .................................... 3-54, 5-12, 7-17
T
Time stamp, position of ........................................ 4-63
Two-way recording .............................................. 3-55
U
User prompt ................................................. 3-42, 3-58
recording .......................................................... 6-15
Utility commands .......................................... 3-56, 7-2
V
Voice mail service ............................... 3-31, 3-43 3-56
Voice prompts ...................................................... 3-58
Worksheets
Introduction
This manual consists of questionnaires and worksheets. To
set up your Voice Processing System (VPS) to operate
properly, some preparation is required. First, check up on
your existing telephone system using the questionnaires.
Second, fill in the worksheets with the data which you wish
to set. If you do these things beforehand, actual input
operation goes quicker and smoother.
Contents ............................................. 2 ~ 3
How to Use the Worksheets ........... 4 ~ 5
Planning the Application ................ W-0-1 ~ W-0-7
Worksheets for
System Administrator ...................... W-1-1 ~ W-1-32
Worksheets for
System Manager ............................... W-2-1 ~ W-2-5
Worksheets for
Message Manager ............................. W-3-1 ~ W-3-10
Note: If necessary, please make photocopies of

original worksheets.
Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................. 1
How to Use the Worksheets......................................................................... 4
Planning the Application ............................................................................. W-0-1
Background Information .................................................................................... W-0-2
Switch Capabilities ............................................................................................ W-0-2
Customers Call Handling Survey .................................................................... W-0-6
Worksheets for System Administrator ....................................................... W-1-1

Mailbox Settings ................................................................................................
Notification Setting ............................................................................................
Class of Service Setting ....................................................................................
Special Feature Authorization...........................................................................
Port Assignment .................................................................................................
Department Dialing ............................................................................................
Operators Parameters ........................................................................................
Alternate Extension Assignment .......................................................................
Custom Service ..................................................................................................
Mailbox Group ...................................................................................................
Extension Group.................................................................................................
Day Service ........................................................................................................
Holiday Setting...................................................................................................
Daylight Saving Time .......................................................................................
Prompt Setting ....................................................................................................
Extension Numbering Plan................................................................................
Dialing Parameters .............................................................................................
Message Waiting Notification Parameters .......................................................
External Message Delivery Parameters ...........................................................
Call Hold ............................................................................................................
Rotary Telephone Service .................................................................................
Intercom Paging Parameter ...............................................................................
Fax Management ................................................................................................
Disconnect Parameter ........................................................................................
RS-232C Parameters ..........................................................................................
Port Setting .........................................................................................................
Dialing Parameters .............................................................................................
Inband Signaling Parameters ............................................................................
Digit Translation Table Parameters..................................................................
2
W-1-2
W-1-3
W-1-4
W-1-5
W-1-6
W-1-7
W-1-8
W-1-11
W-1-12
W-1-13
W-1-14
W-1-15
W-1-16
W-1-17
W-1-18
W-1-19
W-1-20
W-1-21
W-1-22
W-1-23
W-1-24
W-1-25
W-1-26
W-1-27
W-1-28
W-1-29
W-1-30
W-1-31
W-1-32
Contents
Worksheets for System Manager ................................................................ W-2-1
Setting System Managers Password ............................................................... W-2-2
Mailbox Settings ................................................................................................ W-2-3
Class of Service Setting .................................................................................... W-2-4
Worksheets for Message Manager .............................................................. W-3-1

Message Managers Password ..........................................................................
Mailbox Owners Address ................................................................................
Company Greetings............................................................................................
Company Name ..................................................................................................
Department Dialing ............................................................................................
Custom Service Menus ......................................................................................
Mailbox Distribution Group Name ..................................................................
Modifying Voice Prompt...................................................................................
Selection Menu ...................................................................................................
W-3-2
W-3-3
W-3-4
W-3-5
W-3-6
W-3-7
W-3-8
W-3-9
W-3-10
How to Use the Worksheets

Use the worksheets to set the VPS parameters. If you have
filled in the worksheets with the values which you wish to
set beforehand, the actual input operation goes quicker and
smoother.
The top of each worksheet shows how to reach the setting
screen with key names in the System Administrators
worksheets and with key numbers in the System Managers
and the Message Managers worksheets.
Example for System Administrator

Indicates that:
Press [1] in the System Administration Top Menu.
Press [4].
Press [1].
Now the menu described on the worksheet will appear on
the screen (Two types of screen: VT100 compatible terminal and ASCII terminal). Enter the values according to the
worksheets.
Example for System Manager

System Manager Top Menu [6] [1]
Indicates that:
Enter the System Managers Mailbox number after accessing Voice Mail Service.
You will hear the VPS guidance.
Press

Press
Now enter the values according to the worksheets.
How to Use the Worksheets

Example for Message Manager
Message Manager Top Menu [5] [1]
Indicates that:
Enter the Message Managers Mailbox number after accessing Voice Mail Service.
Press

Press
Now enter the values according to the worksheets.
Example for Reference

See pages 4-27 4-31.
Indicates that:
Refer to pages 27 to 31 in Chapter 4 of the Installation
Manual.
Planning the Application

For installing the VPS, getting information about the
existing telephone system and the needs of the customers
company is helpful.
Contents
Background Information ........................................... W-0-2
Switch Capabilities ..................................................... W-0-2
Customers Call Handling Survey ............................. W-0-6
Background Information
Switch Make: ________________________ Model: __________________________
Software: _________________________
Manufacturer Contact: ___________________________________________________
Phone: ___________________________________________________
Company Name: ______________________
Phone: _______________________________________________________
Contact Name:
_______________________
Title: ________________________________________________________
Date: _________________________________________________________________
Switch Capabilities
Can the switch provide support for single line sets?
YES / NO
Can the switch provide for CO trunks?
YES / NO
a) Ground Start
YES / NO
b) Loop Start
YES / NO
c) E & M
YES / NO
d) DID
YES / NO
Can the switch provide End to End DTMF signaling?
YES / NO
a) for Single Line sets
YES / NO
b) for Digital sets
YES / NO
c) for Attendant Console
YES / NO
Can the switch provide Call Transfer?
YES / NO
a) Hook-flash Transfer
YES / NO
b) Feature access code Transfer
YES / NO
c) Automatic Transfer (dialing while connected initiates transfer)
YES / NO
d) Blind Transfer to the Operator
YES / NO
e) Supervised Transfer to the Operator
YES / NO
W-0-2
Worksheets
f) Blind Transfer to any station
YES / NO
g) Supervised Transfer to any station
YES / NO
Standard Ring Generation (min. 40Vrms ... @ 25Hz)

If NOT, can a Standard Ring Generator be added?
YES / NO
YES / NO
What is the Frequency and Duration of the Switch Busy Tone? _______________
Can the Switch provide forwarding capabilities?
a) a station that is Busy
YES / NO
YES / NO
Is CALLED party information (inband DTMF signaling)

passed?
YES / NO
Is CALLING party information (inband DTMF signaling)

passed?
YES / NO
b) a station that does NOT ANSWER
YES / NO

passed?
YES / NO

passed?
YES / NO
c) a station that is BUSY or does NOT ANSWER
YES / NO

passed?
YES / NO

passed?
YES / NO
d) a station at all times (All Call Forwarding)
YES / NO

passed?
YES / NO

passed?
YES / NO
e) Internal Stations ONLY (digital and Single Line sets)
YES / NO

passed?
YES / NO

passed?
YES / NO
Worksheets
W-0-3
f) External Stations ONLY (trunks)
YES / NO

passed?
YES / NO

passed?
YES / NO
Can the Switch provide Message Waiting Notification from

a Single Line set?
a) Turn ON any Message Waiting Indicator?
YES / NO
YES / NO
What is the ON sequence? _______________________________

b) Turn OFF any Message Waiting Indicator?
YES / NO
What is the OFF sequence? ______________________________

Type of Message Waiting Notification provided
YES / NO
a) Message Waiting Indication via (Digital Display)
YES / NO
b) Message Waiting Indication via (Lamp)
YES / NO
c) Message Waiting Indication via (Stutter dial tone)
YES / NO
When a station calls another (single line) station (station to station)

a) is CALLING party information (inband DTMF signaling) passed? YES / NO
b) is speed dialing supported by this switch?
YES / NO
c) can it be programmed to provide CALLING party into via

DTMF signaling?
YES / NO
If far end disconnect signaling supported?

a) Can the Switch provide open loop current when the far
end disconnects?
YES / NO
YES / NO
b) Can the Switch provide silence when the far end disconnects? YES / NO
c) Can the Switch provide a constant tone when the far
end disconnects?
YES / NO
(i.e. dial-tone or equivalent ... a minimum of 10 seconds is required)

d) Can the Switch provide a DTMF sequence when the far
end disconnects?
YES / NO
if so, what is the sequence? ________________________________
W-0-4
Worksheets
Can the Switch support any of the following types of Hunt groups?
YES / NO
a) special Voice Mail Hunt Groups
YES / NO
b) Pilot Hunt Groups
YES / NO
c) Circular Hunt Groups
YES / NO
d) UCD Hunt Groups
YES / NO
e) ACD Hunt Groups
YES / NO
f) If a forwarding method that would emulate Hunt Groups exists,

please describe: ___________________________________________
Does the Switch provide for attendant overflow positions
to single line stations?
YES / NO
Does the Switch provide any special feature that might relate to the
functionality of either voice mail or auto attendant?
YES / NO
Worksheets
W-0-5
Customers Call Handling Survey

Who attends incoming calls? ______________________________________________
Who are the customers callers? ___________________________________________
Does the attendant spend a lot of time answering repetitive
questions?
YES / NO
What happens when the operator is not available to answer incoming calls?
_______________________________________________________________________
How do callers know the extension number?
_______________________________________________________________________
When a call is transferred, what happens if the extension is busy or
does not answer?
a) Performs paging
YES / NO
b) Talks messages
YES / NO
c) Returns to attendant
YES / NO
Are there a lot of calls?

a) for departments
YES / NO
b) for extensions
YES / NO
What kind of messages do callers leave?

a) Callers name
YES / NO
b) Private message
YES / NO
c) Detailed information
YES / NO
Are there any employees sharing extensions?
YES / NO
How many outside employees do not have extensions? _______________________

How many employees use pagers? _________________________________________
What are peak calling times? _____________________________________________
Are after hours call answered by an answering machine?
W-0-6
YES / NO
Worksheets
Does the Customer require the VPS for

a) Main Receptionist
YES / NO
b) Call Routing
YES / NO
c) Backup Receptionist
YES / NO
d) Out of Hours Receptionist
YES / NO
e) Custom Service
YES / NO
Worksheets
W-0-7
Worksheets for
Contents
Mailbox Settings .......................................................
Notification Setting ..................................................
Class of Service Setting ............................................
Special Feature Authorization ................................
Port Assignment .......................................................
Department Dialing .................................................
Operators Parameters ............................................
Alternate Extension Assignment ............................
Custom Service .........................................................
Mailbox Group .........................................................
Extension Group ......................................................
Day Service ...............................................................
Holiday Setting .........................................................
Daylight Saving Time ..............................................
Prompt Setting .........................................................
Extension Numbering Plan .....................................
Dialing Parameters ..................................................
Message Waiting Notification Parameters ............
External Message Delivery Parameters .................
Call Hold ...................................................................
Rotary Telephone Service .......................................
Intercom Paging Parameter ....................................
Fax Management ......................................................
Disconnect Parameter ..............................................
RS-232C Parameters ...............................................
Port Setting ...............................................................
Dialing Parameters ..................................................
Inband Signaling Parameters .................................
Digit Translation Table Parameters ......................
W-1-2
W-1-3
W-1-4
W-1-5
W-1-6
W-1-7
W-1-8
W-1-11
W-1-12
W-1-13
W-1-14
W-1-15
W-1-16
W-1-17
W-1-18
W-1-19
W-1-20
W-1-21
W-1-22
W-1-23
W-1-24
W-1-25
W-1-26
W-1-27
W-1-28
W-1-29
W-1-30
W-1-31
W-1-32

Mbx
No.
Extn.
No.
2-5
digits
2-5
digits
Mailbox Owners Name

First
Up to 16 characters
Last
Up to 16 characters
COS
CExtn
IMBox
AlTrf
1-64
(* 1)
2-5
digits
2-5
digits
1: Yes
2: No*
Worksheets
* : Default
Note : Please make photo copies of this sheet if necessary.
Mailbox Settings
W-1-2
COS : Class of Service Number

CExtn : Covering Extenison
IMBox : Interview Mailbox
AlTrf : All Calls Transfer to Mailbox
Mbx
No.
Phone Number for Message Notification

Number to Dial (Up to 32 digits)
0-9, , #, P (Pause), T (Dial Tone
Detection), M (Dial Mode),
X (Callback Number Entry Code)
Use Device
Type
1: Not Use
Telephone*/ 2: Continuously*
Beeper
3: Scheduled
Number
of Retries
Busy
Delay
No Answer
Delay
Time frame 1, 2
MON - SUN
0-4 times
(* 0)
2-120 min.
(* 3)
2-120 min.
(* 30)
1-12: hour, 00-59: minute

AM/PM: a.m./p.m.
: All Day, Space: No Use
1st
2nd
3rd
1st
2nd
3rd
1st
2nd
3rd
1st
2nd
3rd
1st
2nd
3rd
W-1-3
* : Default
Notification Setting
Worksheets

System Administration Top Menu 1 1 1 Mailbox No. 2 Device No.
(5~100 msgs)
SI = Message Scanning with Information

SP = Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting
CW = Use Call Waiting on Busy
MsgC = Message Cancel for Live Call Screening
DMA = Direct Mailbox Access
PG = Intercom Paging Group (1~8)
Pr = Prompt Mode
CaT = Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time

RO = Message Retrieval Order

System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No. 1
COS
GL
RtN
RtS
Ln
CaN
CaT
Ro
SI
SP
CW
MsgC
DMA
PG
Pr
8-60
sec
(* 16)
1-30
days
(* 5)
1-30 days/
0: Unlimited
(* 5)
1-6
min.
(* 3)
5-100
msgs
(* 10)
5-100
min.
(* 10)
LIFO*/
FIFO
Y/N*
Y/N*
Y/N*
Y*/N
Y*/N
1*-8
System
User 1*
User 2
Worksheets
* : Default
Class of Service Setting
W-1-4
COS = Class of Service Number (1~64)

GL = Personal Greeting Length (8~60 sec)
RtN = New Message Retention Time (1~30 days)
RtS = Saved Message Retention Time (1~30 days, 0: Unlimited)
Ln = Message Length (1~6 min.)
CaN = Mailbox Capacity Maximum Messages
COS
External Message
Delivery
Message Notification
Y/N*
Beeper Callback MWL

No. Entry Mode Notification
for
Select
Unreceived
Without
Message
Before
After
Disable
Y/N
Y/N*
Device
Notification
for
Unreceived
Message
Y/N
Prompt
Mode
System
User 1
User 2
Selective
Auto Forwarding
Y/N*
Mailbox
No.
Delay
Time
Forwarding
Mode
00:05~
99:59
Copy
Move
W-1-5
* : Default
Special Feature Authorization
Worksheets

System Administration Top Menu 1 2 COS No. 2
Port Assignment
VM : Voice Mail Service
AA : Automated Attendant Service
IS : Interview Service
CS : Custom Service

System Administration Top Menu 1 3 1 ~ 4 1 ~ 2
Port
No.
Mode
Company
Greeting No.
Incoming Call
Service
Incoming Call
Service Prompt
Prompt for
Rotary Callers
Delayed Answer
Time
(1-32)
(VM/AA*/IS/CS)
(System/User1*/
User2/ Selective)
(System*/User1/
User2)
(0*-15 sec)
Day
Night
Day
Night
Day
3
4
Night
Day
Night
Day
Night
Day
Night
Day
Night
Day
Night
Day
Night
Day
10
Night
Day
11
Night
Day
12
Night
* : Default
W-1-6
Worksheets
Department Dialing
Department
Dialing No.
Extension No.
Remarks
(Department name, etc.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Worksheets
W-1-7
Operators Parameters
Day Mode Operator 1
Item
Value to Select
Operator Service
1. Disable
2. Enable *
Operators Extension No.
2 5 digits
(* 0)
Operators Mailbox No.
2 5 digits
(* 998)
Operator No-answer Time
10 60 sec
(* 30)
Busy Coverage Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hold *
No-answer Coverage
Call Waiting
Disconnect Message
No-answer Coverage Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
Caller Select *
Leave Message
Disconnect Message
Next Operator
Message Repeat Cycle
1 3 times
Value
(* 3)
* : Default
Day Mode Operator 2

Item
Value to Select
2 5 digits
2 5 digits
Busy Coverage Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hold *
No-answer Coverage
Call Waiting
Disconnect Message
1.
2.
3.
4.
Caller Select *
Leave Message
Disconnect Message
Next Operator
Value
* : Default
W-1-8
Worksheets
Day Mode Operator 3
Item
Value to Select
2 5 digits
2 5 digits
Busy Coverage Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
1. Caller Select *
2. Leave Message
Value
Hold *
No-answer Coverage
Call Waiting
Disconnect Message
* : Default
Night Mode Operator 1

Item
Value to Select
Operator Service
1. Disable
2. Enable *
2 5 digits
(* 0)
2 5 digits
(* 998)
Operator No-answer Time
10 60 sec
(* 30)
Busy Coverage Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hold *
No-answer Coverage
Call Waiting
Disconnect Message
1.
2.
3.
4.
Caller Select *
Leave Message
Disconnect Message
Next Operator
Message Repeat Cycle
1 3 times
Value
(* 3)
* : Default
Worksheets
W-1-9
Item
Value to Select
2 5 digits
2 5 digits
Busy Coverage Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hold *
No-answer Coverage
Call Waiting
Disconnect Message
1.
2.
3.
4.
Caller Select *
Leave Message
Disconnect Message
Next Operator
Value
* : Default

Item
Value to Select
2 5 digits
2 5 digits
Busy Coverage Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
1. Caller Select *
2. Leave Message
Value
Hold *
No-answer Coverage
Call Waiting
Disconnect Message
* : Default
W-1-10
Worksheets
Alternate Extension Assignment

Mailbox No.
Worksheets
W-1-11
Custom Service
System Administration Top Menu 1 4 2 Custom Service No.
Custom
Description
No.
1100
Prompt
Mode
Up to 32
System *
alphanumeric User 1
characters
User 2
Menu
Repeat
Cycle
1- 3 times
(* 3)
Call
Wait for
Transfer Second
Anytime
Digit
Extn. *
Mbx
No
1-5 sec
(* 1)
No DTMF
Input
Operation
a: Transfer
to Mailbox
b: Transfer
to Extension
c: Operator *
d: Exit
e: Previous
Menu
f: Custom
Service
Keypad Assignment
a: Transfer to Mailbox
b: Transfer to Extension
c: Operator
d: Exit
e: Previous Menu
f: Custom Service
g: Voice Mail Service
h: Call Transfer Service
i: Subscriber Service
j: Department Dialing
k: Dial by Name
l: Repeat Menu
m: Main Menu
n: Fax Transfer
1:
4:
7:
:d
2:
5:
8:
0: c
3:
6:
9:
#:
:d
2:
5:
8:
0: c
3:
6:
9:
#:
:d
2:
5:
8:
0: c
3:
6:
9:
#:
:d
2:
5:
8:
0: c
3:
6:
9:
#:
:d
2:
5:
8:
0: c
3:
6:
9:
#:
:d
2:
5:
8:
0: c
3:
6:
9:
#:
:d
2:
5:
8:
0: c
3:
6:
9:
#:
1:
4:
7:
1:
4:
7:
1:
4:
7:
1:
4:
7:
1:
4:
7:
1:
4:
7:
* : Default
W-1-12
Worksheets
Mailbox Group
Group
No.
Group
Name
Up to 16
characters
Mailbox No.
Worksheets
W-1-13
Extension Group
Group
No.
Group
Name
Up to 16
characters
Extension No.
W-1-14
Worksheets
Day Service
See page 4-58.
MON
Day service start time

Day service end time
TUE

WED

THU

FRI

SAT

SUN

Note : Set as hh;mm, AM/PM.
The Default is 9:00, AM for Start time and 5:00,
PM for End time.
Worksheets
W-1-15
Holiday Setting
System Administration Top Menu 1 5 3 1 Holiday No.
No.
Name of Holiday
Date
(MM/DD)
Retain
Holiday
(Y/N*)
Service
(VM/AA*/IS/
CS)
Company
Greeting
No. (1~32)
Port
Affected
(1-12*)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
* : Default
W-1-16
Worksheets

See page 4-61.
Item
Date
Start Date (1 hour forward)

(MM/DD)
End Date (1 hour back)
(MM/DD)
Worksheets
W-1-17
Prompt Setting
Item
Value to Select
System Prompt Selection Number
19
User 1 Prompt Selection Number
19
User 2 Prompt Selection Number
19
Position of AM/PM in Time Stamp
Value
Before/After*/None
* : Default
W-1-18
Worksheets
Extension Numbering Plan

See page 4-64.
Item
Default
Numbering Plan 1
2XX
Numbering Plan 2
3XX
Numbering Plan 3
Numbering Plan 4
Numbering Plan 5
Numbering Plan 6
Numbering Plan 7
Numbering Plan 8
Numbering Plan 9
Numbering Plan 10
Numbering Plan 11
Numbering Plan 12
Numbering Plan 13
Numbering Plan 14
Numbering Plan 15
Numbering Plan 16
Worksheets
Value
Selection
2 5
digits
(X: Dont care)
W-1-19
Dialing Parameters
Item
Default
Value
Selection
Number of Digits to Access Outside Line
0 8
digits
Call Transfer No-answer Time
20
10 60
sec
Outgoing Call No-answer Time
30
10 90
sec
Pause Time
1 9
sec
Outgoing Call Setup Sequence
Up to 12 digits
(F: Hook Flash)
(R: Ring Back Tone
Detection)
(S: Silence Detection)
(T: Dial Tone Detection)
(W: Wait for 1 second)
(19, 0, , #: Dial Codes)
W-1-20
Worksheets
Message Waiting Notification Parameters

Item
Default
Value
Selection
Outgoing Call Ports
1-12
1-12 (Port number)
Message Waiting Lamp Ports
1-12
1-12 (Port number)
Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message
No
Yes/No
Max. Digits for Callback No.
20
1 48
digits
Callback No. Entry Interdigit Time-Out
1 10
sec
System Callback No.
Up to 32 digits
Worksheets
W-1-21
External Message Delivery Parameters

Item
Default
Value
Selection
Retry Times
0 4
times
Busy Delay
2 60
min.
No-answer Delay
60
2 120
min.
Outgoing Call Ports
1-12
1 12 (Port number)
Message Length
1 6
min.
Max. Messages for Mailboxes
1 100
messages
System External Message Delivery Duration

Time
1 9
min.
Companys Telephone No.
Up to 32 digits
W-1-22
Worksheets
Call Hold
See page 4-70.
Item
Default
Value
Selection
Call Hold Mode
Enable
Enable/Disable
Call Queuing Announcement Mode
Enable
Enable/Disable
Call Retrieval Announcement Timing
1 30 sec
Redialing Cancel Timing
30
15/30/45/60 sec
Worksheets
W-1-23

See page 4-71.
Item
Default
Rotary Telephone Call Coverage Day Mode
G.D.M.
Rotary Telephone Call Coverage Night Mode
G.D.M.
W-1-24
Value
Selection
G.D.M./OPERATOR
EXTENSION
Worksheets
Intercom Paging Parameter

Item
Default
Value
Selection
Intercom Paging Sequence
Release for Intercom Paging
No-answer Time for Intercom Paging
1 30
sec
Announcement Repeat Cycle
1 3
times
Intercom Paging Retry
1 10
times
Paging Code for Group 1
Up to 12 (09) numeric
characters
Worksheets
Up to 12 digits
(D: Disconnecting)
(F: Hook Flash)
(R: Ring Back Tone
Detection)
(T: Dial Tone Detection)
(X: Pager Dialing)
(A: Answer)
(19, 0, , #: Dial Codes)
W-1-25
Fax Management
Item
Automatic Transfer of Incoming Fax Call
Default
Disable
Value
Selection
Enable/Disable
Main Fax Extension No.
2 5 digits (Extension No.)
Alternate Fax Extension No.
2 5 digits (Extension No.)
Fax No-answer Time
10
5 60 sec
Fax Manager Mailbox No.
2 5 digits (Mailbox No.)
Fax No-answer Coverage Mode
No
Extn./Mbx/No
Fax Notification Mode
No
W-1-26
Worksheets
Disconnect Parameter
See page 4-75.
Item
Maximum Silence Time
Worksheets
Default
10
Value
Selection
5 60
sec
W-1-27
RS-232C Parameters
Item
Baud Rate
Word Bit Length

Parity
Stop Bit Length
W-1-28
Default
9600
8
None
1
Value
Selection
300/600/1200/2400/4800/
9600/19200 b.p.s
7/8 bits
None/Odd/Even
1/2 bits
Worksheets
Port Setting
System Administration Top Menu 1 6 2 Port No.
Port No.
Flash Time
1 12
1 : 100 msec *
1
2
3
4
5
6
CPC Signal
Disconnect Time
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 : 1 sec
2 : 2 sec *
3 : 3 sec
:
:
8 : 8 sec
None
6.5 msec *
150 msec
300 msec
450 msec
600 msec
Dial Mode
1 : DTMF *
2 : Pulse 10 pps
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
* : Default
Worksheets
W-1-29
Dialing Parameters
Item
Default
Value
Selection
PBX Type
Other
Other Manufactures/
KX-T Series: T308
T616
T1232
T96
T336
TD816
TD1232
Integration Mode
None
None/Inband/D-PITS
Operator Transfer Sequence
FX
Extension Transfer Sequence
FX
Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence
FX
Reconnect Sequence on Busy
FWW
Reconnect Sequence on No-answer
FWW
Reconnect Sequence on Refuse Call
FWW
Light-On Sequence for MWL
Light-Off Sequence for MWL
Call Waiting Sequence
Release Sequence for Call Waiting
W-1-30
Up to 12 digits
(D: Disconnecting)
(R: Ring Back Tone
Detection)
(T: Dial Tone)
(X: Extension Dialing)
(F: Hook Flash)
(A: Answer)
09, , #:
Dial Codes
Worksheets
Inband Signaling Parameters

Item
Default
Ringback
Busy
Reorder
DND
Answer
Forward to VM Ringing
Forward to VM Busy
Forward to Other Extension
Confirmation
Disconnect
#9
Worksheets
Value
Selection
Up to 8 alphanumeric
characters
(09,
, # , A-D)
W-1-31
Digit Translation Table Parameters

See page 4-85.
Inter-Digit Timeout
Item
Default
Inter-digit Timeout
Value
Selection
1 4
sec
See page 4-86.

Digit Translation Table
Item
Default
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Table 8
W-1-32
Input-digit
Output-digit
Selection
Up to 8 digits
(09, , #, AD)
Worksheets
Worksheets for
System Manager
Contents
Setting System Managers Password ..................... W-2-2
Mailbox Settings ....................................................... W-2-3
Class of Service Setting ............................................ W-2-4
Setting System Managers Password

See page 5-16.
System Manager Top Menu [3]
Password
System Managers
Password
W-2-2
Worksheets
Mailbox Settings
IMBox : Interview Mailbox
AlTrf : All Calls Transfer to Mailbox
See pages 5-4 5-5.

Mbx No. Extn. No.
Mailbox Owners Name

For recording
Initial 3 or 4 letters
COS
1-64
(* 1)
IMBox
AlTrf
1: Yes
2: No*
* : Default
Worksheets
W-2-3
CW = Use Call Waiting on Busy

MsgC = Message Cancel for Live Call Screening
DMA = Direct Mailbox Access
PG = Intercom Paging Group
Pr = Prompt Mode
(5~100 msgs)
CaT = Message Capacity Maximum Message Time

RO = Message Retrieval Order
SI = Message Scanning with Information
SP = Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting
COS
See pages 5-7 5-9.

GL
RtN
RtS
Ln
CaN
CaT
Ro
SI
SP
CW
MsgC
DMA
PG
Pr
8-60
sec
(*16)
1-30
days
(*5)
1-30 days/
0: Unlimited
(*5)
1-6
min.
(*3)
5-100
msgs
(*10)
5-100
min.
(*10)
LIFO*/
FIFO
Y/N*
Y/N*
Y/N*
Y*/N
Y*/N
1*-8
System
User 1*
User 2
Worksheets
* : Default
W-2-4
COS = Class of Service Number (1~64)

GL = Personal Greeting Length (8~60 sec)
RtN = New Message Retention Time (1~30 days)
RtS = Saved Message Retention Time (1~30 days, 0: Unlimited)
Ln = Message Length (1~6 min.)
CaN = Message Capacity Maximum Messages
COS
External Message
Delivery

Y/N*
Beeper Callback MWL for

Device
Y/N*
No. Entry Mode Unreceived Notification
for
Message
Select
Unreceived
Without
Before
Message
Y/N
After
Disable
Y/N
Prompt
Mode
System
User 1
User 2
Selective
Auto Forwarding
Y/N*
Mailbox
No.
Delay
Time
Forwarding
Mode
00:05~
99:59
Copy
Move
W-2-5
* : Default
Worksheets
See pages 5-9 5-10.

Worksheets for
Message Manager
Contents
Message Managers Password ................................
Mailbox Owners Address .......................................
Company Greetings .................................................
Company Name ........................................................
Department Dialing .................................................
Custom Service Menus ............................................
Mailbox Distribution Group Name ........................
Modifying Voice Prompt .........................................
Selection Menu .........................................................
W-3-2
W-3-3
W-3-4
W-3-5
W-3-6
W-3-7
W-3-8
W-3-9
W-3-10
Message Managers Password

See page 6-10.
Message Manager Top Menu [3]
Message Managers
Password
W-3-2
Worksheets
Mailbox Owners Address

See page 6-6.
Use this sheet when you transfer messages in the
Mailbox No.
Mailbox Owners Name
Worksheets
W-3-3
Company Greetings
See page 6-12.
Company Greeting No.:
Message:

Message:

Message:
W-3-4
Worksheets
Company Name
Company Name:
Worksheets
W-3-5
Department Dialing
Dialing Menu:
Departmental
Dialing No.
Extension No.
Remarks
(Department name, etc.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
W-3-6
Worksheets
Custom Service Menus

See page 6-14.
Custom Service No.:
Menu Message:
Keypad Assignment
1:
2:
5:
6:
: Exit
9:
3:
4:
7:
8:
0: Operator
#:
3:
4:
7:
8:
0: Operator
#:
Custom Service No.:

Menu Message:
Keypad Assignment
1:
2:
5:
9:
6:
: Exit
Worksheets
W-3-7
Mailbox Distribution Group Name

See page 6-15.
Group
No.
Voice label
Up to 16 characters
W-3-8
Worksheets
Modifying Voice Prompt

Prompt No.:
Prompt:
Prompt No.:
Prompt:
Prompt No.:
Prompt:
Worksheets
W-3-9
Selection Menu
Selection Menu:
Prompt
Language
System
English
Key Assignment
User 1
User 2
W-3-10
Worksheets
Panasonic Business Systems U.K.

Panasonic House, Willoughby Road, Bracknell,
Berkshire RG12 8FP
Printed in Japan
PSQX1276ZA KF0997CM0
Voice Processing System
SUBSCRIBER'S
UIDE
G
Please read before using.
TVP10
VOICE PROCE
SSING SYSTE
M KX-TVP100
MODEL
KX-TVS100E
Panaso
nic
Introduction
The Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) provides you with powerful, convenient ways to manage your voice communications and increase your productivity
through your voice mailbox. As the owner of a VPS mailbox, or Subscriber, you can:
send a message to one or many people inside or outside of your office
transfer messages (with your annotation) to another VPS Subscriber
take messages when you are on the phone or unavailable
receive your messages from any touch-tone telephone
be notified by extension message waiting lamp, telephone or beeper (radio
pager) of messages waiting
screen your calls
automate the handling of callers
and more...
This guide is your reference to using and optimizing your VPS mailbox.
NOTE:
This Subscribers Guide does not show complete model numbers that indicate the
country where your models should be used. The model number of your unit is found
on the label affixed to the unit.
MODEL NO. - - - - - - - (label)
73/23/EEC
89/336/EEC
92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC
APPROVED for connection to

telecommunication systems specified in the instructions for use
subject to the conditions set out in
them.
606168
How to Use this Manual
This Subscribers Guide explains the Voice Processing Systems (VPS) operations by
touch tone telephone for Subscribers.
Each operation consists of a description, a diagram, tips and some notes. During
operations, the VPS plays voice prompts telling you what to do at each step though
they do not appear in this guide except for Voice Mail Service Entry.
Description
Describes the operation with the telephone keys to be
pressed step by step.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Receive
Message
*
0
Diagram
A diagram is provided for each function on the
lefthand of the text. It will help you understand how
the operation goes on in the tree-structured VPS
menu. You will know other options you can choose in
a certain step. It will also help you to perform your
desired operation faster if you press the outlined keys
in a row along the bold line.
Repeat Next Erase Reply Transfer Help
Tip
Step 3
You can call the message
sender by pressing [1].
Tip
Tips framed in a square are used to make you aware of
alternate options available at a particular step.
Note
This symbol describes additional information or useful advice about each feature.
Once you become familiar with operating the VPS, use the Quick Reference Section,
which appears at the end of this guide.
ii
ii
Terms to Know
The following words are used in this guide.

Subscriber
The owner of a VPS mailbox. The System Manager can create

a mailbox for you.
System Manager
The System Manager is the person who manages and maintains

the VPS to make it work efficiently. He controls mailbox creating and authorizes some of the features.
Caller
A caller is any person who is connected to a VPS service

besides the Subscriber or the System Manager.
iii
iii
Getting Started
Required Numbers
Get the following information before you begin the operation.
(1) Telephone Number Directly Connected to Voice Mail Service
If your VPS does not have one, call any extension number connected to the VPS
and press [#] [6] (Service Access Command).
(2) Your Mailbox Number
Usually, the same number as your extension number. Check with your System
Manager to be sure.
(3) The System Managers Phone Number
In case you need their help or need to change certain mailbox settings.
Basic Steps
You need to know your mailbox number to use this guide.
If you are going into your mailbox for the first time, read Chapter 5 Mailbox Setup
first. You need to customize it before sending or receiving messages. Especially, it is
important to identify yourself as the owner of the mailbox by setting the following.
Recording Personal Greetings (See page 5-7)
Recording Your Name (See page 5-9)
Changing Your Password (See page 5-8)
Then customize it as it suits you by setting the additional features as appropriate.
Setting the Call Transfer Status (See page 5-2)
Setting the Incomplete Call Handling Status (See page 5-4)
Message Waiting Lamp Notification Setting (See page 5-13)
Setting Notification by Calling (See page 5-14)
...
Once you complete your setting, find your desired operation from the titles, then call
the VPS.
iv
iv
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Using Your Mailbox and the VPS
Opening Your Mailbox (Mailbox Login) .......................................... 1-2

Accessing VPS Services ...................................................................... 1-3
Chapter 2
Receiving Messages
Receiving Messages ............................................................................. 2-2

Message Playback Options ................................................................ 2-3
Replying to Messages ......................................................................... 2-5
Message Transfer ................................................................................ 2-6
Erasing Messages ................................................................................ 2-7
Receiving Message Waiting Notification .......................................... 2-8
Live Call Screening ............................................................................. 2-9
Recording a Two-Way Conversation .............................................. 2-10
Chapter 3
Sending Messages
Delivering Messages to Other Subscribers ......................................

Checking Mailbox Distribution .........................................................
Setting up an External Message Delivery List .................................
Sending External Delivery Messages ................................................
Checking and Setting External Message Delivery Status ...............
Chapter 4
Caller Handling
Recording Messages (for any caller) .................................................

Recording Messages (from a rotary phone) .....................................
Receiving External Delivery Messages .............................................
Replying to External Delivery Messages ..........................................
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-6
3-7
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
Chapter 5
Mailbox Setup

(Call Block/Call Screening/Intercom Paging/Beeper Access) ........ 5-2
Setting up a Covering Extension ....................................................... 5-3
Setting the Incomplete Call Handling Status ................................... 5-4
Setting the Message Reception Mode ............................................... 5-6
Recording Personal Greetings ........................................................... 5-7
Changing Your Password ................................................................... 5-8
Recording Your Name ........................................................................ 5-9
Entry of Personal Group Distribution Lists .................................. 5-10
Recording the Names of Personal Group Distribution Lists ....... 5-11
Deleting from Personal Group Distribution Lists ......................... 5-12
Message Waiting Lamp Notification Setting .................................. 5-13
Setting Notification by Calling ........................................................ 5-14
Setting Answer Lengths for the Interview Mailbox ...................... 5-16
Recording Questions for the Interview Mailbox ........................... 5-17
Erasing Questions from the Interview Mailbox ............................ 5-18
vi
vi
Chapter 1
This chapter tells you how to enter Subscriber Service and other services
provided by the VPS.
Contents
Opening Your Mailbox (Mailbox Log in) ......................................... 1-2
Accessing VPS Services ...................................................................... 1-3
Opening Your Mailbox (Mailbox Log in)
+ Mailbox No.
Password +
To access Subscriber Services, you must open your

mailbox first. Follow the operation below.
Dial an extension number which is connected

to the Voice Mail Service.
Good morning/Good afternoon/Good evening

Welcome to the Voice Processing System.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
If the system is equipped with multiple languages (up to three languages), you will hear
a selection prompt as follows.
If you just want to record a

message in someone elses
mailbox, you do not have to
use this procedure.
See the following topic in
Chapter 4.
Recording Messages (for
any caller)
Recording Messages (from a
rotary phone)
If your company is using a
Panasonic KX-TD series telephone system, you can directly
access your mailbox just by
dialing the number of the V.M.
Service, depending upon System Programming. Check with
your System Manager.
Tip
Step 1
If no ports are assigned to
Voice Mail Service, press
# 6 after calling the
VPS.
(ex.)
For French, press [8].
For Chinese, press [9].
If you hear the above prompt, press the

number of the appropriate language.
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on
the line.
Press
, then enter your mailbox number.
Enter the password if you have one.

You are now in the main command menu.
1-2
Call VPS
Accessing VPS Services

In VPS operation, the following functions are available whenever the system is providing voice prompts.
Call VPS
#
1
#
3
#
6
Press the appropriate key to receive your

desired option (Service Access Commands).
#
9
#
8
Dialing by Name
If you press # 1 , you can call the desired
extension or mailbox by entering first 3 or 4
letters of the persons last name.
Voice Mail Service
* +Mailbox No
Password+
Subscriber's Service
#
5
#
7
* Retry
* Retry
Department Dialing
3 , you can call the
If you press #
intended extension and mailbox by pressing
one digit ( 1 9 ) according to the
Department Dialing Menu.
Voice Mail Service

If you press # 6 , you can access the
Voice Mail Service.
Call Transfer
If you press # 8 , you can access the
Automated Attendant Service and call your
desired extension.
Tip
# 5 and # 7 are
valid only for Subscriber
Service.
Exit the Menu

If you press #
9 , you can exit the VPS.
Back up
If you press * , you can retry to enter a
mailbox number, a password and also an
extension number while you are in the call
transfer status. In addition, you can move
back to a previous menu in the main command menu.
1-3
Accessing VPS Services

If you press # 5 , you can reselect a mailbox while you are in the main command
menu.
Restart
If you press # 7 , you can be back in the
initial main command menu.
1-4
Log in
Chapter 2
Receiving Messages
Receiving Messages
This chapter tells you how to access and manage received messages: Replying
immediately, transferring messages with or without an additional comment, and
replaying messages.
Contents
Receiving Messages ............................................................................
Message Playback Options ...............................................................
Replying to Messages ........................................................................
Message Transfer ...............................................................................
Erasing Messages ...............................................................................
Receiving Message Waiting Notification .........................................
Live Call Screening ............................................................................
Recording a Two-Way Conversation ...............................................
2-2
2-3
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
Receiving Messages
The VPS plays new messages and saved messages in
your mailbox with the information of the message
sender and the recorded date respectively.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
1
Receive
Message

The VPS tells you the number of messages.
Go to
Step 3
Press 1 to use the Receive Message menu.

Then it plays the messages.
Press 0 to listen to the whole menu (for

Help).
9 .
Tip
Step 3
You do not have to listen to the whole menu if you do not
wish to.
1
Repeat this message
1 1 Play the previous message
2
3
Erase this message
4
Reply
5
Rewind
6
Fast forward
7
Transfer
8
Message scan
2-2
Receiving Messages
You can end your call by pressing
Message Playback Options

While receiving messages, several message playback
options are available for efficient receiving.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Receive
Message
1
Repeat
1
1
1-2
3
8
Next Erase Reply Rewind Fast Transfer Scan

forward
Previous
Go to
Step 4
Same as Receiving Messages.

desired option. If you choose 8 , go to the
next step.
Repeating Messages
If you press 1 , you can listen to the current
message again.
Replaying the Previous Message

Receiving Messages
If you press 1 1 while receiving a message, you can listen to the previous message.
Playing the Next Message

If you press 2 while receiving a message,
you can listen to the next message.
Rewinding Messages
you can listen to it again.
Fast Forwarding Messages

you can fast forward it to the end.
Scanning Messages
If you press 8 , you can listen to the first
four seconds of each message.
2-3
Message Playback Options

4
Note :
Option 3 is available only
once.
Second time will erase the
message.
Messages are scanned one at a time.

If you press 1 , you will hear the previous
message.
If you press 2 , you will hear the next message.
If you press 3 , you will hear the entire message.
Receiving Messages
Tip
Step 3
You can receive the whole menu by pressing [0] for Help.
2-4
Replying to Messages
1-2
3
4
3 4 5 6 *
5
6
3
7
4
0
7
Erase Reply Transfer Help
8
Go to
Step 4
9
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Receive
Message
Repeat Next
Receiving Messages
This feature is available only

when the message has been
delivered from a Subscriber
using his mailbox i.e. Message
Transfer and Message Delivery.
Otherwise, you will hear this
prompt: Sorry, you cannot reply. The message sender is unknown.

Press 4 to reply to the message.
Record your message at the tone.
Press 1 to end recording.
Press 2 to accept.
Press 1 to set delivery time.
Press 1 to specify the delivery time or the
private status.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Press 2 to accept.
Enter the time and # .

Enter the date (the day of the month) and
# .
Press 1 to set this message to a private

message. Otherwise, press 2 .
Tip
Step 4
You can call the message sender by pressing [1].
Step 6
You can pause/restart recording by pressing [2].
Step 9
You can make your reply immediate by pressing [2].
You will skip to step 15.
Step 11
If you press [0] for help here, For example, to enter 5
oclock press [5] and [#] or 5 : 15 press [5], [1], [5] and
[#].
2-5
Message Transfer
This function allows you to transfer messages to other
mailboxes.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Receive
Message
Repeat
Next
Press 7 to use the Message Transfer menu.

Enter the mailbox number of the intended
recipient.
Change
Accept
Repeat
M.B. Info.
Add
Transfer
W. Comment M.B.
4
Review
Mailing
List
*
Cancel
Transfer
5
6
7
Press 2 to accept.
Press 2 if the comment is acceptable.
Press 2 to record a comment.

State your comment and press 1 to end
recording.
Receiving Messages
Transfer
Erase Replay Transfer Help
Mailbox No.
XXXX
1-2
3
4
Cancel
Tansfer
Go to
Step 7
If the message has been

assigned as private, you cannot
transfer it to other mailboxes.
Tip
Step 4
You can enter by name by pressing [#] [1] first. Also, you
can specify a Personal Group Distribution List or a System
Group Distribution List by entering the number followed
by [#].
Step 6
You can transfer the message without comment by pressing [1].
You can add the mailbox number by pressing [3].
You can review the mailing list by pressing [4].
You can cancel message transfer by pressing [*].
Step 7
You can press [2] to pause/restart recording.
Step 8
You can press [3] to change your comment.
You can press [1] to review your comment.
2-6
Erasing Messages
You can erase messages during playback. Erased messages cannot be recovered.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Receive
Message

2
0
Erase
The VPS tells you the number of messages,

and the message information. Then it plays
the message.
Press 3 to erase the messages.
Receiving Messages
The VPS will automatically

erase messages after a certain
number of days. Check with
your System Manager to find
out how many days you can
keep messages in your mailbox.
Press 1 to use the Receiving Messages

menu.
Tip
Step 3
Messages are erased one at a time. After a message is
erased, you will hear the following prompt and repeat step
3 for the next message.
The message is erased.
If all messages have been erased, you will hear All messages are erased.
2-7
Receiving Message Waiting Notification

The Message Waiting Notification is a feature to
notify you that unplayed messages are waiting in your
mailbox. Notification Calls are sent to you via specified device after the message is recorded.
VPS Calls you
Receive
Message
Hold
Password +
Pick up a call from the VPS.

a selection menu.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Receive
Message
2
3
Press 1 to receive the message.

Enter the password and # .
Now, you are in the main command menu.
Follow steps 2 3 of Receiving Messages.
Tip
Step 3
If a password is not assigned, skip this step.
2-8
Receiving Messages
Live Call Screening
Receiving Messages
This feature is available only if

your company is using a Panasonic KX-TD series telephone
system.
By assigning one of your telephone keys to this feature, you can monitor incoming calls that have been
forwarded to the Voice Mail Service.
In Hands-Free Mode, you can monitor the incoming
call through built-in speaker of the telephone. Also,
you can speak with the caller by picking up the handset.
In Private Mode, you can monitor the incoming call
by going off-hook after you hear the notification tone.
You can speak with the caller by pressing the feature
key. Or you can stop listening to the message by going
on-hook.
Note :
For detailed information,
please refer to the Installation
Manual of Panasonic KX-TD
series telephone systems'
PBXs (KXTD816,
KXTD1232).
2-9
Recording a Two-Way Conversation

This feature is available only if
your company is using a Panasonic KX-TD series telephone
system.
By assigning one of the function keys on your telephone to this feature, you can record the conversation
that you are having.
You should give your party a notice before recording
that your conversation will be recorded.
A beep sounds every sixteen

seconds during recording .
Receiving Messages
2-10
Chapter 3
Sending Messages
This chapter tells you how to send messages, including recording and delivery.
Contents
Sending Messages
Delivering Messages to Other Subscribers ......................................

Checking Mailbox Distribution .........................................................
Setting up an External Message Delivery List .................................
Sending External Delivery Messages ................................................
Checking and Setting External Message Delivery Status ...............
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-6
3-7
Delivering Messages to Other Subscribers

If you are sending an identical message to several
Subscribers, follow the steps below.
You can send it with a single operation.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
3 4
Deliver
Message
Mailbox No.
Go to
Step 5
XXXX
To use Personal Group Distribution

Lists, they must have been created
beforehand. To use the System
Group Distribution Lists, check
with your System Manager to see
if there is any list in your VPS.
2
3
Press 2 for Message Delivery.
Press 2 to accept the mailbox number if it

is correct.
Tip
Step 4
You can review the mailing list by
pressing [3].
Step 6
You can press [2] to pause recording
while you are in the message recording process. Restart the recording
within 20 seconds, or the VPS will
stop it automatically.
You can deliver the message immediately and return to the main command
menu by pressing [2].
Step 10
You can deliver your message immediately after recording by pressing [2].
Then you will skip to step 14.
Step 11
You can press [0] for Help menu. It
will guide you how to enter the time.
6
7
8
9
State your message at the tone.

Press 2 to accept.
Press 1 to set delivery time or private status.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Press 2 to accept.
Enter the time and # .

Enter the date (the day of the month) and
# .

3-2
Sending Messages
Step 9

recipient.
You can add mailbox numbers by pressing

2 . Then repeat step 3 and step 4. You can
specify a maximum of 20 mailboxes as the
destination.
Step 3
You can enter by name if you press [#]
[1] first. Also, you can specify a Personal Group Distribution List or a System Group Distribution List by entering the number followed by [#].
Checking Mailbox Distribution

This function lets you check the status of messages
which you have recorded in your mailbox to deliver
to other mailboxes.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
1
Check
M.B.
Distribution
Sending Messages
Go to
Step 3
You can check the history (delivery status) of up to

84 message transmissions.
1
2
3
Select 1 to delete verification of this

message or 2 to cancel message delivery.
Press 3 to check distribution status.

Press 3 to cancel the message or delete
verification.
Tip
Step 3
You can listen to the message by pressing [1].
You can check the previous message by pressing [1] twice.
You can check the next message by pressing [2].
3-3
Setting up an External Message Delivery

List
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
Interview
M.B.
Management
Message
Waiting
Notification
Setting
External
Message
Delivery
Record
Message
Check
Delivery
Status
Mailing
List
Setting
Go to
Step 5
To use this feature, you must

have your System Manager
authorize it beforehand.
Tip
Step 8
1
2
1
2
3
4
5

Press 3 for External Message Delivery.
Press 3 to set up the mailing list.
Press 1 or 2 to choose the delivery list.
(Up to two delivery lists can be established.)
To add members:
Press 1 to add members to the list.

You can have up to 8 members on the list.
7
8
9
10
11

Record the name and press 1 .
Press 2 to accept.
Press 1 to continue adding members or
2 to end.
If you press
7 11.
1 , you will repeat steps
3-4
Sending Messages
3
4
5
6
7
Change the telephone

number
Accept
Review
Add more digits
Insert a pause
Set dial mode
Insert a wait for dial
tone
Setting up an External Message Delivery List lets you

send the same message to several people outside of
the system with a single operation. Up to two lists can
be maintained at the same time, and each list can contain up to eight members.
Setting up an External Message Delivery

List
To delete members:
Sending Messages
Go to the Delivery List Menu.

(See steps 1 5 in Setting up an External Message
Delivery List.)
3-5
6
7
Press 2 to delete members from the list.
Press 1 to delete the number, or 2 to

keep the number and play the next telephone
number.
Press 1 to delete all members from the list.

Otherwise, press 2 .
Sending External Delivery Messages

Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
Interview
M.B.
Management
Message
Waiting
Notification
Setting
External
Message
Delivery
Record
Message
Check
Delivery
Status
Mailing
List
Setting
Go to
Step 5

Tip
Step 5
You can press [2] to send
your message by mailing
list 1 or 2.
Step 7
1
2
3
6
7
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Press 1 to record an external delivery message.
Press 1 to send to a recipient.
Enter the password.
Record the recipients name and press 1 .
Enter the time and press # .
Enter the date and press # .
Review your setting and press 2 to accept
the setting.
Record your message.
(See Recording Messages.)
Sending Messages
4
5
Change the telephone

number
Accept
Review
Add more digits
Insert a pause
Set dial mode
Insert a wait for dial
tone
1
2
3
4
Step 10
You can press [0] for Help
menu. It will guide you
how to enter the time.
3-6
Checking and Setting External Message

Delivery Status
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
1
Interview
M.B.
Management
2
Message
Waiting
Notification
Setting
3
External
Message
Delivery
Record
Message
Check
Delivery
Status
Mailing
List
Setting
Go to
Step 5

After recording your external delivery messages, you

may want to check the delivery schedules or the recipients. You can listen to the report from the VPS unless
the messages have been delivered yet. After listening,
you have the option of deleting unnecessary ones or
changing the schedules.
1
2
3
4

Press 2 to check External Message Delivery status.
The VPS tells you when the message is
being sent.
5
6
Press 1 to reschedule the setting.

Press 1 to cancel the external message
delivery.
(To change the time and date, press 2 .
See Sending External Delivery Messages
steps 10 to 13.)
Tip
Sending Messages
Step 3
You can skip the Help menu.
Step 5
You can play the next schedule by pressing [2], repeat this
schedule by pressing [3] or play the previous schedule by
pressing [4].
Step 6
If you press [*] twice, you will return to the External Message Delivery menu.
3-7
Chapter 4
Caller Handling
This chapter describes how callers can be handled by the Subscribers mailbox.
Caller Handling
Contents
Recording Messages (for any caller) .................................................
Recording Messages (from a rotary phone) .....................................
Receiving External Delivery Messages .............................................
Replying to External Delivery Messages ..........................................
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
Recording Messages (for any caller)

Anyone who reaches the Voice Mail Service can
record messages in the mailboxes.
Caller Handling
Call VPS
Selection
Prompt
Mailbox
No.
Name
Rotary
Phone
XXXX XXXX
Tip
Step 3, 6
When the beeper callback no.
entry mode is not disabled,
the VPS will ask you a
callback number according
to the intended mailbox setting; before recording a
message, after recording a
message or after selecting an
urgent message.
Please enter your callback
number.
You can enter up to ... digits.
1 Enter the number.

Step 6
1 Review
2 Accept
3 Record a new one
4 Add
5 Erase and exit
4-2
If the system supports multiple service (up to

three languages), you will hear a selection
menu.
0
Operator
Go to
Step 4
Call the VPS and access the Voice Mail Service.
If you hear the above prompt, press the

number of the appropriate language.

recipient.
To enter by name, press # 1 and first 3
or 4 letters of the recipient last name.
4
5
6
7
State your message at the tone.

Press 2 to accept.
Recording Messages (from a rotary phone)

Call VPS
Mailbox
No.
Name
Rotary
Phone
XXXX XXXX
0
Operator
Go to
Step 2
From a rotary phone, once your

message has been recorded, you
cannot re-record nor erase it.
Call the VPS and access the Voice Mail Service.
2
3
4
Wait a moment.
State your message.
Hang up the phone.
4-3
Caller Handling
Selection
Prompt
If you are using a rotary phone, you cannot specify a

mailbox because every key entry is invalid. Wait a
moment until the VPS guides you to the General
Delivery Mailbox where you can leave your message.
The recorded messages will be delivered to your
intended party later. Callers who do not enter anything because they are unfamiliar with the VPS can
also leave messages in the same way.
Receiving External Delivery Messages

External Delivery Messages are delivered by the VPS
to telephone numbers instead of mailboxes.
Caller Handling
VPS Calls you
Selection
Prompt
Receive
Message
Hold
Call
Back
Password +
Receive Message
Repeat
Reply
End
Pick up a call from the VPS.

a selection prompt.
Press the number of the appropriate language.
3
4
Press 1 to receive the message.

Then the VPS plays the external message.
Help
Press
to end the call.
Tip
Step 4
If a password is not assigned, you can listen directly to
the message.
If you enter the incorrect password three times, the VPS
will play the following prompt and you cannot receive the
external message any more.
This message is from SENDER of Company Name.
Please call TELEPHONE NUMBER.
Extension number ... .
To repeat, press [1].
To end this call, press [*].
When you press [1], the VPS will repeat this prompt.
4-4
Replying to External Delivery Messages

1-4
VPS Calls you
Receive
Message
Hold
Call
Back
Password +
7
8
Press 2 to reply to the message.

Record the message and press 1 to continue.
Press 2 to accept.
Receive Message
2
Reply
Go to
Step 6
4-5
Caller Handling
5
6
Selection
Prompt
Same as Receiving External Delivery Messages.
Chapter 5
Mailbox Setup
Mailbox Setup
This chapter describes the setup procedures using a touch-tone telephone for
subscribers.
Contents
(Call Block/Call Screening/Intercom Paging/Beeper Access) ....... 5-2
Setting up a Covering Extension ........................................................ 5-3
Setting the Incomplete Call Handling Status .................................... 5-4
Setting the Message Reception Mode ................................................ 5-6
Recording Personal Greetings ............................................................ 5-7
Changing Your Password .................................................................... 5-8
Recording Your Name ......................................................................... 5-9
Entry of Personal Group Distribution Lists ..................................... 5-10
Recording the Names of Personal Group Distribution Lists .......... 5-11
Deleting from Personal Group Distribution Lists ............................ 5-12
Message Waiting Lamp Notification Setting ..................................... 5-13
Setting Notification by Calling ........................................................... 5-14
Setting Answer Lengths for the Interview Mailbox ......................... 5-16
Recording Questions for the Interview Mailbox .............................. 5-17
Erasing Questions from the Interview Mailbox ............................... 5-18

(Call Block/Call Screening/Intercom Paging/Beeper Access)
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Automated
Attendant
Status
1
Call
Transfer
Status
You can specify how the VPS should handle a call

when a caller specifies your extension number in the
Automated Attendant Service. You can set one of the
four functions or you can set none of them.
Covering Message Incomplete

Extension Reception Handling
Mode
Status
Setting
Call
Intercom Calling
Disable
Call
Blocking Screening Paging a Beeper all transfer
services
1
2
3

Press 4 for Automated Attendant status.
Press 1 to set the call transfer status.
The VPS tells you the current status.

desired option.
1
Call Blocking
Blocks all incoming calls to your extension.
Call Screening
Tells you the callers name before you
answer the call. Then you can decide
whether or not to answer it.
Intercom Paging
Pages you over the Intercom Paging
System.
Calling a Beeper
Calls your beeper and displays the callers callback number on the LCD.
Disable all transfer services

Rings your extension directly.
5-2
Mailbox Setup
The Intercom Paging feature is

available only if your company
is using a Panasonic KX-TD
series telephone system.
Setting up a Covering Extension

Setting up a Covering Extension lets you have incoming calls and messages transferred to a designated
extension.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Automated
Attendant
Status
1
Call
Transfer
Status

Mode
Status
Setting
Go to
Step 4
The owner of this extension

should be someone whom you
can rely on, as he will be handling your calls when you are
not available.
Mailbox Setup
This extension also performs as a personal operator.

When the caller presses 0 while receiving the personal
greeting, the call is transferred to this extension.
This feature does not work unless Covering Extension Transfer

is enabled (see page 5-4).
1
2
3
4
5

Press 2 to set up a covering extension.
Press 1 to set the extension.
Enter the extension number.
The VPS tells you the number you have just
entered.
Press 2 to accept.
Tip
Step 4
You can accept the current status by pressing [2].
You can delete the current extension by pressing [3] if you
dont need it.
5-3
Setting the Incomplete Call Handling

Status
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Automated
Attendant
Status
1
Call
Transfer
Status
Incomplete calls are calls which are unanswered or for

which the line is busy. The Incomplete Call Handling
status can be set to record a message from the caller,
transfer the caller to a covering extension, page the
mailboxs owner by intercom, notify the mailboxs
owner via beeper, transfer the caller to the operator, or
let the caller try another extension. You may enable as
many features as you may need among the six.

Mode
Status
Setting
Leave Covering Intercom Beeper Operator Return to

Message
Ext.
Paging
Transfer A.A. Service
Transfer
Top Menu
1
2
3

Press 4 to set the Incomplete Call Handling
status.
Mailbox Setup
Enabling Leaving a Message Status

The Intercom Paging feature is
available only if your company
is using a Panasonic KX-TD
series telephone system.
Press 1 .
Press 1 to change or
(enable/disable).
to accept
Enabling Covering Extension Transfer

Status
Press 2 .
(enable/disable).
to accept
Enabling Intercom Paging Status
Press 3 .
(enable/disable).
to accept
5-4
Setting the Incomplete Call Handling

Status
Enabling Beeper Access Status
Press 4 .
(enable/disable).
to accept
Enabling Operator Transfer Status
Press 5 .
(enable/disable).
to accept
Mailbox Setup
Returning to Top Menu Automated

Attendant Service Status
Press 6 .
5-5
(enable/disable).
to accept
Setting the Message Reception Mode

Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Automated
Attendant
Status
1
Call
Transfer
Status
If you are not available to answer calls, those calls are

treated according to the Incomplete Call Handling
Status setting. When callers decide to leave messages
in your mailbox, you can specify whether callers are
directed to your regular mailbox or your interview
mailbox.

Mode
Status
Setting
Go to
Step 4

Press 3 to set the message reception mode.
Press 1 to change the current setting to the
other (interview mode/message recording
mode).
Mailbox Setup
To use an interview mailbox,

you must have the System
Manager assign an interview
mailbox number beforehand.
1
2
3
4
Tip
Step 4
You can press [2] to accept the current setting.
5-6
Recording Personal Greetings

Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Mailbox
Management
Change
Personal
Greeting
Change
Password
3
Change
Owner's
Name
After reaching your mailbox, callers will hear your

personal greeting messages first. You will record three
kinds of the personal greetings; (1) No Answer Greeting, (2) Busy Greeting and (3) After Hours Greeting.
The VPS plays one of them as appropriate by each
call.
4
Group
Distribution
List
Setting
Go to
Step 4
1
2
3
4

Press 5 for Mailbox Management.
Press 1 to record a personal greeting.
Press 1 3 to change the greeting.
Mailbox Setup
The VPS tells you the current personal

greeting (if it exists).
Note:
It is helpful to include a
statement of your answering
telephone number with the
exchange name or normal
code in the greeting message.
A greeting message begins
within 3 seconds of answering, of paytone ceasing, or of
answering ceasing, as appropriate.
5
6
7
8
Press 1 to record a greeting.

Record your greeting and press 1 .
Press 2 to accept.
Confirm your setting and press 2 to accept.
Tip
Step 4
1 No answer greeting
2 Busy greeting
3 After hours greeting
Step 7
1 Review
2 Accept
3 Record a new one
4 Add
5 Erase and exit
Step 8
You can erase the greeting by pressing [3].
5-7
Changing Your Password

Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Mailbox
Management
Change
Personal
Greeting
Change
Password
Go to
Step 4
3
Change
Owner's
Name
You have the option of assigning a password to your

mailbox to prevent someone else accessing it to receive
Subscribers Service. A password should be no longer
than eight digits and the valid keys are from 0 to 9.
You can change it at any time.
4
Group
Distribution
List
Setting
For your password, avoid setting

it to obvious combinations of
numbers.

Press 2 to change the password.
Press 1 to set the mailbox password.
The VPS tells you the password.
Mailbox Setup
If you forget your password,

delete it, then you can assign a
new one.
1
2
3
4
5
Press 2 to accept.
5-8
Recording Your Name

Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Mailbox
Management
Change
Personal
Greeting
Change
Password
Change
Owner's
Name
4
Group
Distribution
List
Setting
Go to
Step 4
Record the name by which most

people know you.
Mailbox Setup
This recording is played for callers who have reached

your mailbox. This assures them that they are in the
right mailbox. In addition, when a caller is specifying
the mailbox by entering first three or four letters of the
owners last name, the VPS will announce a series of
the recorded names among which they can select.
If a name has been already

recorded, the VPS plays the
recording for you. You can then
make a new recording.
1
2
3
4
5

Press 3 to record the owners name.
Press 1 to record a new one.
Record your name and press 1 .
The VPS tells you the owners name.
Press 2 to accept.
Tip
Step 4
You can accept the current owners name by pressing [2].
You can erase the name by pressing [3].
5-9
Entry of Personal Group Distribution

Lists
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Mailbox
Management
Change
Personal
Greeting
Change
Password
3
Change
Owner's
Name
A Personal Group Distribution List is used in Message Delivery and Message Transfer to send the same
message to several mailboxes with a single operation.
Up to four lists can be maintained at the same time,
and each list can contain up to twenty members.
4
Group
Distribution
List
Setting
Group No.
Change
Group
Name
Add
Members
Go to
Step 6
3
Delete
Members
4
Review
List

Press 4 to set the group distribution list.
Enter the group number (1 4).
Press 2 to add members to the list.
Enter the mailbox number to be added.
Mailbox Setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press 2 to add the number.

Press 2 to end adding members.
Tip
Step 7
You can change the number by pressing [1].
You can end adding members by pressing [*].
Step 8
You can continue adding members by pressing [1].
5-10
Recording the Names of Personal Group

Distribution Lists
The VPS will play the recording for you when you
specify a personal group distribution list. Then you
assure that it is the right one.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Mailbox
Management
Change
Personal
Greeting
Change
Password
3
Change
Owner's
Name
4
Group
Distribution
List
Setting
Mailbox Setup
Group No.
Change
Group
Name
Add
Members
3
Delete
Members
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Press 1 to record the group name.
Record the name and press 1 .
Press 2 to accept.
4
Review
List
Go to
Step 6
Tip
Step 5, 6
If a group name is already recorded, press [1] to change
this name, then record the new one.
Step 7
You can erase the name by pressing [3].
5-11
Deleting from Personal Group Distribution

Lists
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
Mailbox
Management
Change
Personal
Greeting
Change
Password
3
Change
Owner's
Name
4
Group
Distribution
List
Setting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Press 3 to delete members from the list.
Press 2 to delete a member.
Group No.
2
Add
Members
3
Delete
Members
Mailbox Setup
1
Change
Group
Name
Review
List
Go to
Step 6
Tip
Step 6
You can delete all members by pressing [1].
Step 7
You can keep the mailbox and play the next mailbox by
pressing [2].
5-12
Message Waiting Lamp Notification

Setting
The VPS illuminates the message waiting lamp of
your extension when a new message is recorded in
your mailbox.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
1
Mailbox Setup
Interview
M.B.
Management
2
Message
Waiting
Notification
Setting
1
2
3
External
Message
Delivery
Press 1 to change the Message Waiting

Lamp Notification Status.
Press 1 to change the Message Waiting

Lamp Notification Status, or 2 to accept
it.
Other
Features
Message
Waiting
Lamp
Status
Change
Device
Status
Assign
Tel. No.
Go to
Step 5
5-13

Press 2 to set Message Waiting Notification.

The VPS calls the preset telephone or beeper when a
new message is recorded in your mailbox. Set the following three parameters as appropriate.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
1
Interview
M.B.
Management
2
Message
Waiting
Notification
Setting
3
External
Message
Delivery
Change
M.W.
Lamp
Status
Change
Device
Status
Assign
Tel. No.
Device No.
Schedule
Continuously
Do not use
Setting Device Status

For each device, the notification is enabled, disabled
or enabled on the preset schedule.
If you want to enable it on the schedule, contact your
System Administrator as you are not allowed to set
the schedule by yourself.
1-3
4
5
6

Press 2 to set the device status.
Enter the device number.
Press 1 3 to select the status.
Tip
Step 6
1 Schedule (enabled on the schedule)
2 Continuously (enabled whole day)
3 Do not use (disabled whole day)
5-14
Mailbox Setup
The VPS can notify your beeper with the callback

number of the party who left the message. For this
feature to work, the telephone number stored on the
VPS for your beeper must include the beeper display
command.

You must have your System
Manager authorize the use of
the Callback Number Entry
Mode beforehand.
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
Mailbox Setup
Interview
M.B.
Management
2
Message
Waiting
Notification
Setting
3
External
Message
Delivery
Change
M.W.
Lamp
Status
Change
Device
Status
Assign
Tel. No.
Notification Number Assignment

You can set the telephone or beeper numbers where
you wish to receive notification calls up to three. You
can use the keys 0 to 9, a tone/pulse switch.
1-3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Press 3 to assign the telephone number.
Press 1 to change the first telephone
number, 2 to change the second telephone
number, 3 to change the third telephone
number.
Press 1 to set the telephone number.
Press 2 to accept.
Select 1 to be notified by telephone or 2
by a beeper.
Go to
Step 5
Tip
Step 8
1 Change the telephone number
2 Accept
3 Review
4 Add more digits
5 Insert a pause
6 Set dial mode
7 Insert a wait for dial tone
8 Insert a beeper display command
5-15
Setting Answer Lengths for the Interview

Mailbox
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
1
Interview
M.B.
Management
2
Message
Waiting
Notification
Setting
3
External
Message
Delivery
Record
Question
Answer
Length
Erase
Question
Every Subscriber can maintain

an interview mailbox. Be sure
to have your System Manager
assign an interview mailbox
number.
1
2
3

Press 1 for Interview Mailbox Management.
Press 2 to set the answer length.

The VPS plays the question No.1 if it has
been recorded.
Press 1 to set or change the length of question No. 1.

The VPS plays the length if it has been set.
6
7
Press 1 to change the length.
Accept the length by pressing 2 .

Then, the VPS plays the next question if it
has been recorded.
Repeat steps 5 8.
Press 1 for 4 seconds , 2 for 8 seconds,

3 for 16 seconds or 4 for 32 seconds.
The VPS plays the length that you have just
entered.
Tip
Step 5
You can go to the next question by pressing [2] and to the
previous question by pressing [3].
You can jump to the desired question by pressing [4], then
the question number and [#].
5-16
Mailbox Setup
Go to
Step 5
An Interview Mailbox plays prerecorded questions to

callers and records their answers. You can record up to
ten questions and set the answer lengths from four to
thirty-two seconds. The answers are recorded in a
string and stored in your mailbox.
Recording Questions for the Interview

Mailbox
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
Mailbox Setup
Interview
M.B.
Management
2
Message
Waiting
Notification
Setting
Press 1 to record questions.
Answer
Length
Erase
Question

The VPS plays the question.
3
External
Message
Delivery
Record
Question
Go to
Step 5
1
2
3
5
6
Press 1 to record question No. 1.
Press 2 to accept the question.
Record the question and press 1 to end

recording.
The VPS plays the next question.
Repeat steps 6 8.
Tip
Step 5
Step 7
1 Review
2 Accept
3 Record a new one
4 Add
5 Erase and exit
5-17
Erasing Questions from the Interview

Mailbox
Subscriber's
Main Command Menu
1
6
Other
Features
1
2
3
4
1
Interview
M.B.
Management
2
Message
Waiting
Notification
Setting

Press 3 to erase the question.
The VPS plays question No. 1.
3
External
Message
Delivery
Press 1 to erase question No. 1.

The VPS plays the next question.
Record
Question
Answer
Length
Erase
Question
Repeat step 5.
Mailbox Setup
Go to
Step 5
Tip
Step 5
5-18
1 Receive
******** Quick Reference ********
Entering a Mailbox
1
Repeat
1 1 Previous
Next
2
Erase
3
Reply
4
Rewind
5
6
Fast Forward
7
Transfer
8
Scan
1 Name
(Help Menu)
2 Deliver
RECORD MESSAGES
Mailbox No.
1 Record message
2 Add Mailbox
3 Review Mailing List
3 Check Mailbox Distribution

Status
Mailbox No.
Play the message

1
1 1 Play previous message
Play next message
2
3
Cancel
4 Automated Attendant Status
Password #
1
2
3
4
Set Call Transfer Status

Set Covering Extension
Set Message Reception Mode
Set Incomplete Call Handling
Status
MAIN COMMAND
5 Mailbox Management
1
2
3
4
5
6
Receive message
Deliver message
Check mailbox
distribution
For Automated
Attendant Status
For Mailbox
Management
Other features
End this call
1
2
3
4
Record Personal Greetings

Set Password
Enter Owner's Name
Set Group Distribution Lists
6 Other Features
1 Set Interview Mailbox
2 Set Message Waiting Notification
3 Set External Delivery Message
1 Call Transfer Status
Note:
1
2
3
4
5
Call Blocking
Call Screening
Intercom Paging
Beeper Access
All disable
Press * at any time to exit the menu.

Press 0 to have the Help menu.
If you have to hang up before the prompt is
finished, press # 9 . Then hang up the
phone.
***** Service Access Commands *****

Commands
4 Incomplete Call Handling Status

1
2
3
4
5
6
Leaving a Message
Covering Extension
Intercom Paging
Beeper Access
Operator
Return to A.A. Service Top Menu
1 Personal Greetings
1 No Answer
2 Busy
3 After Hours
1 Interview Mailbox Management
ABC
2
#1
Dialing by
Name
#D
Department
Dialing
JKL
5
MNO
6
#L
Login
#M
Voice Mail
PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
#R Restart
(Main Menu)
#T
Transfer
#X
Exit
*
*
Backup
GHI
4
1 Record Question
2 Set Answer Length
3 Erase Question
2 Message Notification
1 Message Waiting Lamp
2 Device Status
3 Assign Telephone Numbers
3 External Message Delivery

1 Record message
2 Check delivery status
3 Set a mailing list
DEF
3
2
1 Schedule
2 Continuously
3 Do not use
Memo
Memo
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.

Central P.O. Box 288, Osaka 530-91, Japan
Printed in Japan
PSQX1102ZA KK0596CK0

Overline KXTVP200 Voicemail User Programming Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Overline KXTVP200 Voicemail User Programming Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Voice Processing System

APPROVED for connection to

in the instructions for use subject to

or the BSI mark

on the body of the fuse.

WARNING : THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.

Ringer Equivalence Number (REN):

TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS

For your future reference

The person in charge of system setup tasks such as setting

The person in charge of daily management of system, such as

The owner of a personal mailbox. Subscribers can retrieve

A caller who does not have a mailbox. He or she can select

A storage place for messages on the VPS. A Subscriber

An interface between the telephone line and the VPS. The

A recorded list of options or a guidance message played to the

An abbreviation for Digital Proprietary Telephone.

(KX-TVP200 Installation Manual)

Introduction .......................................................................................... 1-2

Call Services ......................................................................................... 1-4

Other Features ..................................................................................... 1-7

Outside Caller Handling ..................................................................... 1-9

Configuration ........................................................................................ 1-10

Guidelines for Preparation ................................................................. 1-11

Mailbox Management .......................................................................... 1-15

System Diagnosis .................................................................................. 1-17

Detailed Feature and Service Descriptions

Alternate Extension Group ....................................................................

Broadcasting Messages .......................................................................... 3-7

Callback Number Entry .........................................................................

Call Transfer Status ...............................................................................

Day Service ............................................................................................

Extension Group ....................................................................................

Fax Management ................................................................................... 3-24

Group Distribution List, Personal ......................................................... 3-25

Hold ........................................................................................................ 3-26

Live Call Screening (D-PITS Only) ..................................................... 3-32

No-Answer Coverage Mode.................................................................. 3-46

Operator Service .................................................................................... 3-46

PBX Integration .....................................................................................

Receive Message ...................................................................................

Selection Menu ......................................................................................

Two-Way Recording (D-PITS Only) ................................................... 3-55

Utility Commands .................................................................................. 3-56

Voice Mail Service ................................................................................ 3-56

System Administrators Guide

System Administrators Function ...................................................... 4-2

Using the Interface .............................................................................. 4-4

Startup System ..................................................................................... 4-6

Programming Menu Structure Diagram .......................................... 4-16

Programming the System Parameters .............................................. 4-18

System Managers Guide

System Managers Function ............................................................... 5-2

Accessing the System Managers Mailbox ....................................... 5-3

Setting up Mailboxes ...........................................................................

Setting COS (Class of Service) Parameters ..................................... 5-7

Setting the System Clock .................................................................... 5-11

Checking System Usage (System Reports) ....................................... 5-12

Customizing the System Managers Mailbox .................................. 5-16

Listening to Messages ......................................................................... 5-17

Message Managers Guide

Message Managers Function ............................................................. 6-2

Accessing the Message Managers Mailbox ..................................... 6-3

Managing the General Delivery Mailbox ......................................... 6-5